US20050127191A1 - Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code - Google Patents

Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20050127191A1
US20050127191A1 US11/039,850 US3985005A US2005127191A1 US 20050127191 A1 US20050127191 A1 US 20050127191A1 US 3985005 A US3985005 A US 3985005A US 2005127191 A1 US2005127191 A1 US 2005127191A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
data
pixel
column
dot
target
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/039,850
Inventor
Kia Silverbrook
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd
Original Assignee
Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/112,781 external-priority patent/US6786420B1/en
Application filed by Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd filed Critical Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd
Priority to US11/039,850 priority Critical patent/US20050127191A1/en
Assigned to SILVERBROOK RESEARCH PTY. LTD. reassignment SILVERBROOK RESEARCH PTY. LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SILVERBROOK, KIA
Publication of US20050127191A1 publication Critical patent/US20050127191A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/14Structure thereof only for on-demand ink jet heads
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J15/00Devices or arrangements of selective printing mechanisms, e.g. ink-jet printers or thermal printers, specially adapted for supporting or handling copy material in continuous form, e.g. webs
    • B41J15/04Supporting, feeding, or guiding devices; Mountings for web rolls or spindles
    • B41J15/044Cassettes or cartridges containing continuous copy material, tape, for setting into printing devices
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/14Structure thereof only for on-demand ink jet heads
    • B41J2/14314Structure of ink jet print heads with electrostatically actuated membrane
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/14Structure thereof only for on-demand ink jet heads
    • B41J2/14427Structure of ink jet print heads with thermal bend detached actuators
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1601Production of bubble jet print heads
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1623Manufacturing processes bonding and adhesion
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1626Manufacturing processes etching
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1626Manufacturing processes etching
    • B41J2/1628Manufacturing processes etching dry etching
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1626Manufacturing processes etching
    • B41J2/1629Manufacturing processes etching wet etching
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1631Manufacturing processes photolithography
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1632Manufacturing processes machining
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1635Manufacturing processes dividing the wafer into individual chips
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1637Manufacturing processes molding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/1637Manufacturing processes molding
    • B41J2/1639Manufacturing processes molding sacrificial molding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/164Manufacturing processes thin film formation
    • B41J2/1642Manufacturing processes thin film formation thin film formation by CVD [chemical vapor deposition]
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/164Manufacturing processes thin film formation
    • B41J2/1643Manufacturing processes thin film formation thin film formation by plating
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/164Manufacturing processes thin film formation
    • B41J2/1645Manufacturing processes thin film formation thin film formation by spincoating
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1621Manufacturing processes
    • B41J2/164Manufacturing processes thin film formation
    • B41J2/1646Manufacturing processes thin film formation thin film formation by sputtering
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/16Production of nozzles
    • B41J2/1648Production of print heads with thermal bend detached actuators
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17513Inner structure
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17596Ink pumps, ink valves
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J29/00Details of, or accessories for, typewriters or selective printing mechanisms not otherwise provided for
    • B41J29/02Framework
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J29/00Details of, or accessories for, typewriters or selective printing mechanisms not otherwise provided for
    • B41J29/12Guards, shields or dust excluders
    • B41J29/13Cases or covers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J3/00Typewriters or selective printing or marking mechanisms characterised by the purpose for which they are constructed
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82YSPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y30/00Nanotechnology for materials or surface science, e.g. nanocomposites
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/02Bodies
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/24Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor with means for separately producing marks on the film, e.g. title, time of exposure
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/48Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor adapted for combination with other photographic or optical apparatus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B27/00Photographic printing apparatus
    • G03B27/02Exposure apparatus for contact printing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1626Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with a single-body enclosure integrating a flat display, e.g. Personal Digital Assistants [PDAs]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F12/00Accessing, addressing or allocating within memory systems or architectures
    • G06F12/02Addressing or allocation; Relocation
    • G06F12/08Addressing or allocation; Relocation in hierarchically structured memory systems, e.g. virtual memory systems
    • G06F12/0802Addressing of a memory level in which the access to the desired data or data block requires associative addressing means, e.g. caches
    • G06F12/0866Addressing of a memory level in which the access to the desired data or data block requires associative addressing means, e.g. caches for peripheral storage systems, e.g. disk cache
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F21/00Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F21/70Protecting specific internal or peripheral components, in which the protection of a component leads to protection of the entire computer
    • G06F21/78Protecting specific internal or peripheral components, in which the protection of a component leads to protection of the entire computer to assure secure storage of data
    • G06F21/79Protecting specific internal or peripheral components, in which the protection of a component leads to protection of the entire computer to assure secure storage of data in semiconductor storage media, e.g. directly-addressable memories
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F21/00Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F21/70Protecting specific internal or peripheral components, in which the protection of a component leads to protection of the entire computer
    • G06F21/86Secure or tamper-resistant housings
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K1/00Methods or arrangements for marking the record carrier in digital fashion
    • G06K1/12Methods or arrangements for marking the record carrier in digital fashion otherwise than by punching
    • G06K1/121Methods or arrangements for marking the record carrier in digital fashion otherwise than by punching by printing code marks
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K19/00Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings
    • G06K19/06Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings characterised by the kind of the digital marking, e.g. shape, nature, code
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K19/00Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings
    • G06K19/06Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings characterised by the kind of the digital marking, e.g. shape, nature, code
    • G06K19/06009Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings characterised by the kind of the digital marking, e.g. shape, nature, code with optically detectable marking
    • G06K19/06037Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings characterised by the kind of the digital marking, e.g. shape, nature, code with optically detectable marking multi-dimensional coding
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K19/00Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings
    • G06K19/06Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings characterised by the kind of the digital marking, e.g. shape, nature, code
    • G06K19/067Record carriers with conductive marks, printed circuits or semiconductor circuit elements, e.g. credit or identity cards also with resonating or responding marks without active components
    • G06K19/07Record carriers with conductive marks, printed circuits or semiconductor circuit elements, e.g. credit or identity cards also with resonating or responding marks without active components with integrated circuit chips
    • G06K19/073Special arrangements for circuits, e.g. for protecting identification code in memory
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K7/00Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
    • G06K7/10Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K7/00Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
    • G06K7/10Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
    • G06K7/10544Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation by scanning of the records by radiation in the optical part of the electromagnetic spectrum
    • G06K7/10712Fixed beam scanning
    • G06K7/10722Photodetector array or CCD scanning
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K7/00Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
    • G06K7/10Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
    • G06K7/14Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation using light without selection of wavelength, e.g. sensing reflected white light
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K7/00Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
    • G06K7/10Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
    • G06K7/14Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation using light without selection of wavelength, e.g. sensing reflected white light
    • G06K7/1404Methods for optical code recognition
    • G06K7/1408Methods for optical code recognition the method being specifically adapted for the type of code
    • G06K7/14172D bar codes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/30Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks
    • G06Q20/36Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks using electronic wallets or electronic money safes
    • G06Q20/367Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks using electronic wallets or electronic money safes involving electronic purses or money safes
    • G06Q20/3674Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific devices or networks using electronic wallets or electronic money safes involving electronic purses or money safes involving authentication
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/38Payment protocols; Details thereof
    • G06Q20/382Payment protocols; Details thereof insuring higher security of transaction
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/38Payment protocols; Details thereof
    • G06Q20/382Payment protocols; Details thereof insuring higher security of transaction
    • G06Q20/3829Payment protocols; Details thereof insuring higher security of transaction involving key management
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T1/00General purpose image data processing
    • G06T1/20Processor architectures; Processor configuration, e.g. pipelining
    • G06T3/02
    • GPHYSICS
    • G07CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07FCOIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F7/00Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus
    • G07F7/08Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus by coded identity card or credit card or other personal identification means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G07CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07FCOIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F7/00Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus
    • G07F7/08Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus by coded identity card or credit card or other personal identification means
    • G07F7/086Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus by coded identity card or credit card or other personal identification means by passive credit-cards adapted therefor, e.g. constructive particularities to avoid counterfeiting, e.g. by inclusion of a physical or chemical security-layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G07CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07FCOIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F7/00Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus
    • G07F7/08Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring, coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus by coded identity card or credit card or other personal identification means
    • G07F7/12Card verification
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/002Recording, reproducing or erasing systems characterised by the shape or form of the carrier
    • G11B7/0033Recording, reproducing or erasing systems characterised by the shape or form of the carrier with cards or other card-like flat carriers, e.g. flat sheets of optical film
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/007Arrangement of the information on the record carrier, e.g. form of tracks, actual track shape, e.g. wobbled, or cross-section, e.g. v-shaped; Sequential information structures, e.g. sectoring or header formats within a track
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C11/00Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor
    • G11C11/56Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using storage elements with more than two stable states represented by steps, e.g. of voltage, current, phase, frequency
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/22Safety or protection circuits preventing unauthorised or accidental access to memory cells
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L23/57Protection from inspection, reverse engineering or tampering
    • H01L23/576Protection from inspection, reverse engineering or tampering using active circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L9/00Cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communications; Network security protocols
    • H04L9/32Cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communications; Network security protocols including means for verifying the identity or authority of a user of the system or for message authentication, e.g. authorization, entity authentication, data integrity or data verification, non-repudiation, key authentication or verification of credentials
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00127Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
    • H04N1/00278Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a printing apparatus, e.g. a laser beam printer
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00127Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
    • H04N1/00326Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a data reading, recognizing or recording apparatus, e.g. with a bar-code apparatus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/0035User-machine interface; Control console
    • H04N1/00352Input means
    • H04N1/00355Mark-sheet input
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/0035User-machine interface; Control console
    • H04N1/00405Output means
    • H04N1/00408Display of information to the user, e.g. menus
    • H04N1/0044Display of information to the user, e.g. menus for image preview or review, e.g. to help the user position a sheet
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00962Input arrangements for operating instructions or parameters, e.g. updating internal software
    • H04N1/00965Input arrangements for operating instructions or parameters, e.g. updating internal software using a plug-in memory module, e.g. memory card, memory stick
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00962Input arrangements for operating instructions or parameters, e.g. updating internal software
    • H04N1/00968Input arrangements for operating instructions or parameters, e.g. updating internal software by scanning marks on a sheet
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/21Intermediate information storage
    • H04N1/2104Intermediate information storage for one or a few pictures
    • H04N1/2112Intermediate information storage for one or a few pictures using still video cameras
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/21Intermediate information storage
    • H04N1/2104Intermediate information storage for one or a few pictures
    • H04N1/2112Intermediate information storage for one or a few pictures using still video cameras
    • H04N1/2154Intermediate information storage for one or a few pictures using still video cameras the still video camera incorporating a hardcopy reproducing device, e.g. a printer
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/23Reproducing arrangements
    • H04N1/2307Circuits or arrangements for the control thereof, e.g. using a programmed control device, according to a measured quantity
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N1/32101Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N1/32106Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title separate from the image data, e.g. in a different computer file
    • H04N1/32122Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title separate from the image data, e.g. in a different computer file in a separate device, e.g. in a memory or on a display separate from image data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N1/32101Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N1/32128Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title attached to the image data, e.g. file header, transmitted message header, information on the same page or in the same computer file as the image
    • H04N1/32133Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title attached to the image data, e.g. file header, transmitted message header, information on the same page or in the same computer file as the image on the same paper sheet, e.g. a facsimile page header
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N25/00Circuitry of solid-state image sensors [SSIS]; Control thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/222Studio circuitry; Studio devices; Studio equipment
    • H04N5/262Studio circuits, e.g. for mixing, switching-over, change of character of image, other special effects ; Cameras specially adapted for the electronic generation of special effects
    • H04N5/2628Alteration of picture size, shape, position or orientation, e.g. zooming, rotation, rolling, perspective, translation
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/165Preventing or detecting of nozzle clogging, e.g. cleaning, capping or moistening for nozzles
    • B41J2/16585Preventing or detecting of nozzle clogging, e.g. cleaning, capping or moistening for nozzles for paper-width or non-reciprocating print heads
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/015Ink jet characterised by the jet generation process
    • B41J2/04Ink jet characterised by the jet generation process generating single droplets or particles on demand
    • B41J2002/041Electromagnetic transducer
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/135Nozzles
    • B41J2/14Structure thereof only for on-demand ink jet heads
    • B41J2002/14491Electrical connection
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2202/00Embodiments of or processes related to ink-jet or thermal heads
    • B41J2202/01Embodiments of or processes related to ink-jet heads
    • B41J2202/21Line printing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2212/00Indexing scheme relating to accessing, addressing or allocation within memory systems or architectures
    • G06F2212/20Employing a main memory using a specific memory technology
    • G06F2212/202Non-volatile memory
    • G06F2212/2022Flash memory
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2221/00Indexing scheme relating to security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F2221/21Indexing scheme relating to G06F21/00 and subgroups addressing additional information or applications relating to security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F2221/2129Authenticate client device independently of the user
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/0264Details of driving circuits
    • G09G2310/0281Arrangement of scan or data electrode driver circuits at the periphery of a panel not inherent to a split matrix structure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2924/00Indexing scheme for arrangements or methods for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies as covered by H01L24/00
    • H01L2924/0001Technical content checked by a classifier
    • H01L2924/0002Not covered by any one of groups H01L24/00, H01L24/00 and H01L2224/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/00127Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2101/00Still video cameras
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/0008Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/0077Types of the still picture apparatus
    • H04N2201/0084Digital still camera
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3212Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image
    • H04N2201/3222Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image of processing required or performed, e.g. forwarding, urgent or confidential handling
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3225Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
    • H04N2201/3242Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document of processing required or performed, e.g. for reproduction or before recording
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3261Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of multimedia information, e.g. a sound signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3261Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of multimedia information, e.g. a sound signal
    • H04N2201/3264Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of multimedia information, e.g. a sound signal of sound signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3269Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of machine readable codes or marks, e.g. bar codes or glyphs
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3274Storage or retrieval of prestored additional information
    • H04N2201/3276Storage or retrieval of prestored additional information of a customised additional information profile, e.g. a profile specific to a user ID
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/328Processing of the additional information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K1/00Printed circuits
    • H05K1/02Details
    • H05K1/14Structural association of two or more printed circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K1/00Printed circuits
    • H05K1/18Printed circuits structurally associated with non-printed electric components
    • H05K1/189Printed circuits structurally associated with non-printed electric components characterised by the use of a flexible or folded printed circuit
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D10/00Energy efficient computing, e.g. low power processors, power management or thermal management
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S977/00Nanotechnology
    • Y10S977/839Mathematical algorithms, e.g. computer software, specifically adapted for modeling configurations or properties of nanostructure
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S977/00Nanotechnology
    • Y10S977/84Manufacture, treatment, or detection of nanostructure
    • Y10S977/842Manufacture, treatment, or detection of nanostructure for carbon nanotubes or fullerenes
    • Y10S977/843Gas phase catalytic growth, i.e. chemical vapor deposition
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S977/00Nanotechnology
    • Y10S977/84Manufacture, treatment, or detection of nanostructure
    • Y10S977/901Manufacture, treatment, or detection of nanostructure having step or means utilizing electromagnetic property, e.g. optical, x-ray, electron beamm
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S977/00Nanotechnology
    • Y10S977/902Specified use of nanostructure
    • Y10S977/932Specified use of nanostructure for electronic or optoelectronic application
    • Y10S977/94Specified use of nanostructure for electronic or optoelectronic application in a logic circuit

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a data distribution system and in particular discloses a data distribution mechanism in the form of Dotcards.
  • the form of distribution can suffer a number of data corruption errors when the surface is scanned by a scanning device.
  • the errors can include:
  • CD compact disc
  • CD compact disc
  • the utilization of Compact Disks provides for an extremely low cost form of storage.
  • the technologies involved are quite complex and the use of rewritable CD type devices is extremely limited.
  • a data storage device which comprises
  • the data carrier may be a card such that the array of detectable items are positioned on a first surface of the card and a visual depiction representing the code may be positioned on a second opposite surface of the card.
  • the card may be of a plastics material that is coated with a hydrophilic dye-fixing layer.
  • the detectable items may be in the form of dots printed on the first surface of the card.
  • the redundancy encoding may include reed-solomon fault correction encoding.
  • the array of dots may be printed with a 1600 dpi resolution.
  • the dots may define at least one target which is detectable by the sensor, the target being associated with at least one data area defined by the dots.
  • the targets may be oriented to permit reading of the card in at least two directions.
  • an identifying card comprising: a first surface carrying human readable information relevant to an owner of the identifying card; and a second, opposed surface carrying encoded information encoded in a highly fault tolerant manner, said encoded information being adapted for sensing by a sensing device and decoded by a computational processor, so as to provide information relevant to the owner in a human readable form, the encoded information comprising an array of dots applied to said second surface; wherein the encoded information comprises spatially distributed redundancy encoded data such that the information is encoded in a highly fault tolerant manner and can be decoded by said processor despite a localized obliteration of the encoded information on the card.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an Artcam device constructed in accordance with the preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic block diagram of the main Artcam electronic components
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a time line of the process of sampling an Artcard
  • FIG. 4 illustrates the super sampling process
  • FIG. 5 illustrates the process of reading a rotated Artcard
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a flow chart of the steps necessary to decode an Artcard
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an enlargement of the left hand corner of a single Artcard
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a single target for detection
  • FIG. 9 illustrates the method utilised to detect targets
  • FIG. 10 illustrates the method of calculating the distance between two targets
  • FIG. 11 illustrates the process of centroid drift
  • FIG. 12 shows one form of centroid lookup table
  • FIG. 13 illustrates the centroid updating process
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a delta processing lookup table utilised in the preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 15 illustrates the process of unscrambling Artcard data
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a magnified view of a series of dots
  • FIG. 17 illustrates the data surface of a dot card
  • FIG. 18 illustrates schematically the layout of a single datablock
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a single datablock
  • FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 illustrate magnified views of portions of the datablock of FIG. 19 ;
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a single target structure
  • FIG. 23 illustrates the target structure of a datablock
  • FIG. 24 illustrates the positional relationship of targets relative to border clocking regions of a data region
  • FIG. 25 illustrates the orientation columns of a datablock
  • FIG. 26 illustrates the array of dots of a datablock
  • FIG. 27 illustrates schematically the structure of data for Reed-Solomon encoding
  • FIG. 28 illustrates an example Reed-Solomon encoding
  • FIG. 29 illustrates the Reed-Solomon encoding process
  • FIG. 30 illustrates the layout of encoded data within a datablock
  • FIG. 31 illustrates the sampling process in sampling an alternative Artcard
  • FIG. 32 illustrates, in exaggerated form, an example of sampling a rotated alternative Artcard
  • FIG. 33 illustrates the scanning process
  • FIG. 34 illustrates the likely scanning distribution of the scanning process
  • FIG. 35 illustrates the relationship between probability of symbol errors and Reed-Solomon block errors
  • FIG. 36 illustrates a flow chart of the decoding process
  • FIG. 37 illustrates a process utilization diagram of the decoding process
  • FIG. 38 illustrates the dataflow steps in decoding
  • FIG. 39 illustrates the reading process in more detail
  • FIG. 40 illustrates the process of detection of the start of an alternative Artcard in more detail
  • FIG. 41 illustrates the extraction of bit data process in more detail
  • FIG. 42 illustrates the segmentation process utilized in the decoding process
  • FIG. 43 illustrates the decoding process of finding targets in more detail
  • FIG. 44 illustrates the data structures utilized in locating targets
  • FIG. 45 illustrates the Lancos 3 function structure
  • FIG. 46 illustrates an enlarged portion of a datablock illustrating the clockmark and border region
  • FIG. 47 illustrates the processing steps in decoding a bit image
  • FIG. 48 illustrates the dataflow steps in decoding a bit image
  • FIG. 49 illustrates the descrambling process of the preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 50 illustrates the process of generating an 8 bit dot output
  • FIG. 51 illustrates a perspective view of the card reader
  • FIG. 52 illustrates an exploded perspective of a card reader
  • FIG. 53 illustrates a close up view of the Artcard reader
  • FIG. 54 illustrates a perspective view of the print roll and print head
  • FIG. 55 illustrates a first exploded perspective view of the print roll
  • FIG. 56 illustrates a second exploded perspective view of the print roll
  • FIG. 57 illustrates the print roll authentication chip
  • FIG. 58 illustrates an enlarged view of the print roll authentication chip
  • the digital image processing camera system constructed in accordance with the preferred embodiment is as illustrated in FIG. 1 .
  • the camera unit 1 includes means for the insertion of an integral print roll (not shown).
  • the camera unit 1 can include an area image sensor 2 which sensors an image 3 for captured by the camera.
  • the second area image sensor can be provided to also image the scene 3 and to optionally provide for the production of stereographic output effects.
  • the camera 1 can include an optional color display 5 for the display of the image being sensed by the sensor 2 .
  • the button 6 can be depressed resulting in the printed image 8 being output by the camera unit 1 .
  • a series of cards, herein after known as “Artcards” 9 contain, on one surface encoded information and on the other surface, contain an image distorted by the particular effect produced by the Artcard 9 .
  • the Artcard 9 is inserted in an Artcard reader 10 in the side of camera 1 and, upon insertion, results in output image 8 being distorted in the same manner as the distortion appearing on the surface of Artcard 9 .
  • a user wishing to produce a particular effect can insert one of many Artcards 9 into the Artcard reader 10 and utilize button 19 to take a picture of the image 3 resulting in a corresponding distorted output image 8 .
  • the camera unit 1 can also include a number of other control button 13 , 14 in addition to a simple LCD output display 15 for the display of informative information including the number of printouts left on the internal print roll on the camera unit. Additionally, different output formats can be controlled by CHP switch 17 .
  • FIG. 2 there is illustrated a schematic view of the internal hardware of the camera unit 1 .
  • the internal hardware is based around an Artcam central processor unit (ACP) 31 .
  • ACP Artcam central processor unit
  • the Artcam central processor 31 provides many functions which form the ‘heart’ of the system.
  • the ACP 31 is preferably implemented as a complex, high speed, CMOS system on-a-chip. Utilizing standard cell design with some full custom regions is recommended. Fabrication on a 0.25 ⁇ CMOS process will provide the density and speed required, along with a reasonably small die area.
  • the functions provided by the ACP 31 include:
  • a quartz crystal 58 is used as a frequency reference for the system clock.
  • the ACP 31 includes a phase locked loop clock circuit to increase the frequency derived from the crystal 58 .
  • the Artcard 9 is a program storage medium for the Artcam unit. As noted previously, the programs are in the form of Vark scripts. Vark is a powerful image processing language especially developed for the Artcam unit. Each Artcard 9 contains one Vark script, and thereby defines one image processing style.
  • the VARK language is highly image processing specific.
  • the language includes facilities for handling many image processing functions including image warping via a warp map, convolution, color lookup tables, posterizing an image, adding noise to an image, image enhancement filters, painting algorithms, brush jittering and manipulation edge detection filters, tiling, illumination via light sources, bump maps, text, face detection and object detection attributes, fonts, including three dimensional fonts, and arbitrary complexity pre-rendered icons. Further details of the operation of the Vark language interpreter are contained hereinafter.
  • VARK interpreter is incorporated in the camera device
  • a device independent scenario is provided whereby the underlying technology can be completely varied over time.
  • the VARK scripts can be updated as new filters are created and distributed in an inexpensive manner, such as via simple cards for card reading.
  • the Artcard 9 is a piece of thin white plastic with the same format as a credit card (86 mm long by 54 mm wide).
  • the Artcard is printed on both sides using a high resolution ink jet printer.
  • the inkjet printer technology is assumed to be the same as that used in the Artcam, with 1600 dpi (63 dpmm) resolution.
  • a major feature of the Artcard 9 is low manufacturing cost.
  • Artcards can be manufactured at high speeds as a wide web of plastic film.
  • the plastic web is coated on both sides with a hydrophilic dye fixing layer.
  • the web is printed simultaneously on both sides using a ‘pagewidth’ color ink jet printer.
  • the web is then cut and punched into individual cards.
  • On one face of the card is printed a human readable representation of the effect the Artcard 9 will have on the sensed image. This can be simply a standard image which has been processed using the Vark script stored on the back face of the card.
  • the print area is 80 mm ⁇ 50 mm, giving a total of 15,876,000 dots.
  • This array of dots could represent at least 1.89 Mbytes of data.
  • extensive error detection and correction is incorporated in the array of dots. This allows a substantial portion of the card to be defaced, worn, creased, or dirty with no effect on data integrity.
  • the data coding used is Reed-Solomon coding, with half of the data devoted to error correction. This allows the storage of 967 Kbytes of error corrected data on each Artcard 9 .
  • the Artcard linear sensor 34 converts the aforementioned Artcard data image to electrical signals.
  • the linear image sensor can be fabricated using either CCD or APS CMOS technology.
  • the active length of the image sensor 34 is 50 mm, equal to the width of the data array on the Artcard 9 .
  • the resolution of the linear image sensor 34 must be at least twice the highest spatial frequency of the Artcard optical image reaching the image sensor. In practice, data detection is easier if the image sensor resolution is substantially above this.
  • a resolution of 4800 dpi (189 dpmm) is chosen, giving a total of 9,450 pixels. This resolution requires a pixel sensor pitch of 5.3 ⁇ m. This can readily be achieved by using four staggered rows of 20 ⁇ m pixel sensors.
  • the linear image sensor is mounted in a special package which includes a LED 65 to illuminate the Artcard 9 via a light-pipe (not shown).
  • the Artcard reader light-pipe can be a molded light-pipe which has several function:
  • the Artcard reader motor propels the Artcard past the linear image sensor 34 at a relatively constant rate.
  • the motor 37 is a standard miniature motor geared down to an appropriate speed to drive a pair of rollers which move the Artcard 9 .
  • the speed variations, rumble, and other vibrations will affect the raw image data as circuitry within the APC 31 includes extensive compensation for these effects to reliably read the Artcard data.
  • the motor 37 is driven in reverse when the Artcard is to be ejected.
  • the Artcard motor driver 61 is a small circuit which amplifies the digital motor control signals from the APC 31 to levels suitable for driving the motor 37 .
  • the card insertion sensor 49 is an optical sensor which detects the presence of a card as it is being inserted in the card reader 34 . Upon a signal from this sensor 49 , the APC 31 initiates the card reading process, including the activation of the Artcard reader motor 37 .
  • a card eject button 16 ( FIG. 1 ) is used by the user to eject the current Artcard, so that another Artcard can be inserted.
  • the APC 31 detects the pressing of the button, and reverses the Artcard reader motor 37 to eject the card.
  • a card status indicator 66 is provided to signal the user as to the status of the Artcard reading process. This can be a standard bi-color (red/green) LED. When the card is successfully read, and data integrity has been verified, the LED lights up green continually. If the card is faulty, then the LED lights up red.
  • the power supply voltage is less than the forward voltage drop of the greed LED, and the LED will not light.
  • red LEDs can be used, or the LED can be powered from a voltage pump which also powers other circuits in the Artcam which require higher voltage.
  • the camera utilizes 8 Mbytes of memory 33 . This can be provided by a single 64 Mbit memory chip. Of course, with changing memory technology increased Dram storage sizes may be substituted.
  • High speed access to the memory chip is required. This can be achieved by using a Rambus DRAM (burst access rate of 500 Mbytes per second) or chips using the new open standards such as double data rate (DDR) SDRAM or Synclink DRAM.
  • Rambus DRAM burst access rate of 500 Mbytes per second
  • DDR double data rate SDRAM
  • Synclink DRAM Synclink DRAM
  • the Artcard Sensor 49 detects it notifying the ACP72. This results in the software inserting an ‘Artcard Inserted’ event into the event queue. When the event is processed several things occur:
  • the current Artcard is marked as invalid (as opposed to ‘none’).
  • the Print Image is marked as invalid.
  • the Artcard motor 37 is started up to load the Artcard.
  • the Artcard Interface 87 is instructed to read the Artcard.
  • the Artcard Interface 87 accepts signals from the Artcard scanner linear CCD 34 , detects the bit pattern printed on the card, and corrects errors in the detected bit pattern, producing a valid Artcard data block in DRAM.
  • the Data Card reading process has 4 phases operated while the pixel data is read from the card.
  • the phases are as follows:
  • the Artcard 9 must be sampled at least at double the printed resolution to satisfy Nyquist's Theorem. In practice it is better to sample at a higher rate than this.
  • the pixels are sampled 230 at 3 times the resolution of a printed dot in each dimension, requiring 9 pixels to define a single dot.
  • the resolution of the Artcard 9 is 1600 dpi
  • the resolution of the sensor 34 is 4800 dpi
  • a dot is not exactly aligned with the sampling CCD the worst and most likely case is that a dot will be sensed over a 16 pixel area (4 ⁇ 4) 231.
  • An Artcard 9 may be slightly warped due to heat damage, slightly rotated (up to, say 0 degree) due to differences in insertion into an Artcard reader, and can have slight differences in true data rate due to fluctuations in the speed of the reader motor 37 . These changes will cause columns of data from the card not to be read as corresponding columns of pixel data. As illustrated in FIG. 5 , a 1 degree rotation in the Artcard 9 can cause the pixels from a column on the card to be read as pixels across 166 columns:
  • the Artcard 9 should be read in a reasonable amount of time with respect to the human operator.
  • the data on the Artcard covers most of the Artcard surface, so timing concerns can be limited to the Artcard data itself. A reading time of 1.5 seconds is adequate for Artcard reading.
  • the Artcard should be loaded in 1.5 seconds. Therefore all 16,000 columns of pixel data must be read from the CCD 34 in 1.5 second, i.e. 10,667 columns per second. Therefore the time available to read one column is ⁇ fraction (1/10667) ⁇ seconds, or 93,747 ns. Pixel data can be written to the DRAM one column at a time, completely independently from any processes that are reading the pixel data.
  • the time to write one column of data (9450/2 bytes since the reading can be 4 bits per pixel giving 2 ⁇ 4 bit pixels per byte) to DRAM is reduced by using 8 cache lines. If 4 lines were written out at one time, the 4 banks can be written to independently, and thus overlap latency reduced. Thus the 4725 bytes can be written in 11,840 ns (4725/128*320 ns). Thus the time taken to write a given column's data to DRAM uses just under 13% of the available bandwidth.
  • the old stored Print Image and any expanded Photo Image becomes invalid.
  • the new Artcard 9 can contain directions for creating a new image based on the currently captured Photo Image.
  • the old Print Image is invalid, and the area holding expanded Photo Image data and image pyramid is invalid, leaving more than 5 MB that can be used as scratch memory during the read process.
  • the 1 MB area where the Artcard raw data is to be written can also be used as scratch data during the Artcard read process as long as by the time the final Reed-Solomon decode is to occur, that 1 MB area is free again.
  • the reading process described here does not make use of the extra 1 MB area (except as a final destination for the data).
  • the unscrambling process requires two sets of 2 MB areas of memory since unscrambling cannot occur in place. Fortunately the 5 MB scratch area contains enough space for this process.
  • FIG. 6 there is shown a flowchart 220 of the steps necessary to decode the Artcard data. These steps include reading in the Artcard 221 , decoding the read data to produce corresponding encoded XORed scrambled bitmap data 223 . Next a checkerboard XOR is applied to the data to produces encoded scrambled data 224 . This data is then unscrambled 227 to produce data 225 before this data is subjected to Reed-Solomon decoding to produce the original raw data 226 . Alternatively, unscrambling and XOR process can take place together, not requiring a separate pass of the data. Each of the above steps is discussed in further detail hereinafter. As noted previously with reference to FIG. 6 , the Artcard Interface, therefore, has 4 phases, the first 2 of which are time-critical, and must take place while pixel data is being read from the CCD:
  • Phase 1 As the Artcard 9 moves past the CCD 34 the AI must detect the start of the data area by robustly detecting special targets on the Artcard to the left of the data area. If these cannot be detected, the card is marked as invalid. The detection must occur in real-time, while the Artcard 9 is moving past the CCD 34 .
  • rotation invariance can be provided.
  • the targets are repeated on the right side of the Artcard, but relative to the bottom right corner instead of the top corner. In this way the targets end up in the correct orientation if the card is inserted the “wrong” way.
  • Phase 3 below can be altered to detect the orientation of the data, and account for the potential rotation.
  • the main read process begins, placing pixel data from the CCD into an ‘Artcard data window’, detecting bits from this window, assembling the detected bits into bytes, and constructing a byte-image in DRAM. This must all be done while the Artcard is moving past the CCD.
  • Phase 3 Once all the pixels have been read from the Artcard data area, the Artcard motor 37 can be stopped, and the byte image descrambled and XORed. Although not requiring real-time performance, the process should be fast enough not to annoy the human operator. The process must take 2 MB of scrambled bit-image and write the unscrambled/XORed bit-image to a separate 2 MB image.
  • Phase 4 The final phase in the Artcard read process is the Reed-Solomon decoding process, where the 2 MB bit-image is decoded into a 1 MB valid Artcard data area. Again, while not requiring real-time performance it is still necessary to decode quickly with regard to the human operator. If the decode process is valid, the card is marked as valid. If the decode failed, any duplicates of data in the bit-image are attempted to be decoded, a process that is repeated until success or until there are no more duplicate images of the data in the bit image.
  • the four phase process described requires 4.5 MB of DRAM. 2 MB is reserved for Phase 2 output, and 0.5 MB is reserved for scratch data during phases 1 and 2. The remaining 2 MB of space can hold over 440 columns at 4725 byes per column. In practice, the pixel data being read is a few columns ahead of the phase 1 algorithm, and in the worst case, about 180 columns behind phase 2, comfortably inside the 440 column limit.
  • This phase is concerned with robustly detecting the left-hand side of the data area on the Artcard 9 .
  • Accurate detection of the data area is achieved by accurate detection of special targets printed on the left side of the card. These targets are especially designed to be easy to detect even if rotated up to 1 degree.
  • FIG. 7 there is shown an enlargement of the left hand side of an Artcard 9 .
  • the side of the card is divided into 16 bands, 239 with a target eg. 241 located at the center of each band.
  • the bands are logical in that there is no line drawn to separate bands.
  • FIG. 8 there is shown a single target 241 .
  • the target 241 is a printed black square containing a single white dot. The idea is to detect firstly as many targets 241 as possible, and then to join at least 8 of the detected white-dot locations into a single logical straight line. If this can be done, the start of the data area 243 is a fixed distance from this logical line. If it cannot be done, then the card is rejected as invalid.
  • the height of the card 9 is 3150 dots.
  • a target (Target 0 ) 241 is placed a fixed distance of 24 dots away from the top left corner 244 of the data area so that it falls well within the first of 16 equal sized regions 239 of 192 dots (576 pixels) with no target in the final pixel region of the card.
  • the target 241 must be big enough to be easy to detect, yet be small enough not to go outside the height of the region if the card is rotated 0 degree.
  • a suitable size for the target is a 31 ⁇ 31 dot (93 ⁇ 93 sensed pixels) black square 241 with the white dot 242 .
  • the black part of the rectangle is 57 pixels high (19 dots) we can be sure that at least 9.5 black pixels will be read in the same column by the CCD (worst case is half the pixels are in one column and half in the next).
  • 31 dots is 91 pixels, which at most suffers a 3 pixel shift in column, easily within the 576 pixel band.
  • each target is a block of 31 ⁇ 31 dots (93 ⁇ 93 pixels) each with the composition:
  • Targets are detected by reading columns of pixels, one column at a time rather than by detecting dots. It is necessary to look within a given band for a number of columns consisting of large numbers of contiguous black pixels to build up the left side of a target. Next, it is expected to see a white region in the center of further black columns, and finally the black columns to the left of the target center.
  • Each logical read fills 4 cache lines via 4 sub-reads while the other 4 cache-lines are being used. This effectively uses up 13% of the available DRAM bandwidth.
  • the detection mechanism FIFO for detecting the targets uses a filter 245 , run-length encoder 246 , and a FIFO 247 that requires special wiring of the top 3 elements (S1, S2, and S3) for random access.
  • the columns of input pixels are processed one at a time until either all the targets are found, or until a specified number of columns have been processed.
  • the pixels are read from DRAM, passed through a filter 245 to detect a 0 or 1, and then run length encoded 246 .
  • the bit value and the number of contiguous bits of the same value are placed in FIFO 247 .
  • Each entry of the FIFO 249 is in 8 bits, 7 bits 250 to hold the run-length, and 1 bit 249 to hold the value of the bit detected.
  • the run-length encoder 246 only encodes contiguous pixels within a 576 pixel (192 dot) region.
  • the top 3 elements in the FIFO 247 can be accessed 252 in any random order.
  • the run lengths (in pixels) of these entries are filtered into 3 values: short, medium, and long in accordance with the following table: Short Used to detect white dot.
  • RunLength ⁇ 16 Medium Used to detect runs of 16 ⁇ RunLength ⁇ 48 black above or below the white dot in the center of the target.
  • Long Used to detect run lengths RunLength > 48 of black to the left and right of the center dot in the target.
  • Case 1 white long
  • S2StartPixel 254 When beginning to process a given pixel column, the register value S2StartPixel 254 is reset to 0. As entries in the FIFO advance from S2 to S1, they are also added 255 to the existing S2StartPixel value, giving the exact pixel position of the run currently defined in S2. Looking at each of the 3 cases of interest in the FIFO, S2StartPixel can be used to determine the start of the black area of a target (Cases 1 and 2), and also the start of the white dot in the center of the target (Case 3).
  • the targets After the targets have been detected, they should be processed. All the targets may be available or merely some of them. Some targets may also have been erroneously detected.
  • This phase of processing is to determine a mathematical line that passes through the center of as many targets as possible. The more targets that the line passes through, the more confident the target position has been found. The limit is set to be 8 targets. If a line passes through at least 8 targets, then it is taken to be the right one.
  • the resulting algorithm takes 180 divides to calculate ⁇ row and ⁇ column, 180 multiply/adds to calculate target 0 position, and then 2880 adds/comparisons.
  • Step 0 Locate the Data Area
  • TargetA From Target 0 ( 241 of FIG. 7 ) it is a predetermined fixed distance in rows and columns to the top left border 244 of the data area, and then a further 1 dot column to the vertical clock marks 276 . So we use TargetA, ⁇ row and ⁇ column found in the previous stage ( ⁇ row and ⁇ column refer to distances between targets) to calculate the centroid or expected location for Target 0 as described previously.
  • Step 1 Write Out the Initial Centroid Deltas (A) and Bit History
  • bit history is actually an expected bit history since it is known that to the left of the clock mark column 276 is a border column 277 , and before that, a white area.
  • the bit history therefore is 011, 010, 011, 010 etc.
  • Step 2 Update the Centroids Based on Actual Pixels Read.
  • the bit history is set up in Step 1 according to the expected clock marks and data border.
  • the actual centroids for each dot row can now be more accurately set (they were initially 0) by comparing the expected data against the actual pixel values.
  • the centroid updating mechanism is achieved by simply performing step 3 of Phase 2.
  • Phase 2 Detect Bit Pattern from Artcard Based on Pixels Read, and Write as Bytes.
  • the worst case is that we cannot process the first column until at least 165 columns have been read into DRAM. Phase 2 would therefore finish the same amount of time after the read process had terminated.
  • Step 0 Advance to the Next Dot Column
  • the column number is recorded in a register called CurrentColumn. Every time the sensor advances to the next dot column it is necessary to increment the CurrentColumn register. The first time it is incremented, it is incremented from ⁇ 1 to 0 (see Step 0 Phase 1).
  • the CurrentColumn register determines when to terminate the read process (when reaching maxColumns), and also is used to advance the DataOut Pointer to the next column of byte information once all 8 bits have been written to the byte (once every 8 dot columns). The lower 3 bits determine what bit we're up to within the current byte. It will be the same bit being written for the whole column.
  • Step 1 Detect the Top and Bottom of an Artcard Dot Column.
  • dotColumnTop points to the clock mark column 276 .
  • step 276 The first task will be to add the ⁇ row and ⁇ column values to dotColumnTop to arrive at the first data dot of the column.
  • Step 2 Process an Artcard's Dot Column
  • the pixels around the centroid need to be examined to detect the status of the dot and hence the value of the bit.
  • a dot covers a 4 ⁇ 4 pixel area.
  • the number of pixels required to detect the status of the dot and hence the bit value is much less than this. We only require access to 3 columns of pixel columns at any one time.
  • centroids will shift 1 column every 57 pixel rows, but since a dot is 3 pixels in diameter, a given column will be valid for 171 pixel rows (3*57). As a byte contains 2 pixels, the number of bytes valid in each buffered read (4 cache lines) will be a worst case of 86 (out of 128 read).
  • the read/shift&OR/write process requires 2 cache lines.
  • a dot 290 has a radius of about 1.5 pixels. Therefore the pixel 291 that holds the centroid, regardless of the actual position of the centroid within that pixel, should be 100% of the dot's value. If the centroid is exactly in the center of the pixel 291 , then the pixels above 292 & below 293 the centroid's pixel, as well as the pixels to the left 294 & right 295 of the centroid's pixel will contain a majority of the dot's value. The further a centroid is away from the exact center of the pixel 295 , the more likely that more than the center pixel will have 100% coverage by the dot.
  • FIG. 11 only shows centroids differing to the left and below the center, the same relationship obviously holds for centroids above and to the right of center. center.
  • the centroid is exactly in the center of the middle pixel 295 .
  • the center pixel 295 is completely covered by the dot, and the pixels above, below, left, and right are also well covered by the dot.
  • the centroid is to the left of the center of the middle pixel 291 .
  • the center pixel is still completely covered by the dot, and the pixel 294 to the left of the center is now completely covered by the dot.
  • the pixels above 292 and below 293 are still well covered.
  • the centroid is below the center of the middle pixel 291 .
  • the center pixel 291 is still completely covered by the dot 291 , and the pixel below center is now completely covered by the dot.
  • the pixels left 294 and right 295 of center are still well covered.
  • the centroid is left and below the center of the middle pixel.
  • the center pixel 291 is still completely covered by the dot, and both the pixel to the left of center 294 and the pixel below center 293 are completely covered by the dot.
  • the algorithm for updating the centroid uses the distance of the centroid from the center of the middle pixel 291 in order to select 3 representative pixels and thus decide the value of the dot:
  • the value of each pixel is output to a pre-calculated lookup table 301 .
  • the 3 pixels are fed into a 12-bit lookup table, which outputs a single bit indicating the value of the dot—on or off.
  • the lookup table 301 is constructed at chip definition time, and can be compiled into about 500 gates.
  • the lookup table can be a simple threshold table, with the exception that the center pixel (Pixel 1) is weighted more heavily.
  • Step 3 Update the Centroid ⁇ s for Each Row in the Column
  • the idea of the As processing is to use the previous bit history to generate a ‘perfect’ dot at the expected centroid location for each row in a current column.
  • the actual pixels (from the CCD) are compared with the expected ‘perfect’ pixels. If the two match, then the actual centroid location must be exactly in the expected position, so the centroid ⁇ s must be valid and not need updating. Otherwise a process of changing the centroid ⁇ s needs to occur in order to best fit the expected centroid location to the actual data.
  • the new centroid ⁇ s will be used for processing the dot in the next column.
  • centroid ⁇ are processed as ⁇ column ⁇ row respectively to reduce complexity.
  • centroid updating requires more than simply the information about a given single dot.
  • FIG. 13 shows a single dot 310 from the previous column with a given centroid 311 .
  • the 20 bit bit-pattern represents the expected ⁇ values for each of the 5 pixels across the horizontal dimension.
  • the first nibble would represent the rightmost pixel of the leftmost dot.
  • the next 3 nibbles represent the 3 pixels across the center of the dot 310 from the previous column, and the last nibble would be the leftmost pixel 317 of the rightmost dot (from the current column).
  • the pixels to the left and right of the center dot are either 0 or D depending on whether the bit was a 0 or 1 respectively.
  • the center three pixels are either 000 or DFD depending on whether the bit was a 0 or 1 respectively. These values are based on the physical area taken by a dot for a given pixel. Depending on the distance of the centroid from the exact center of the pixel, we would expect data shifted slightly, which really only affects the pixels either side of the center pixel. Since there are 16 possibilities, it is possible to divide the distance from the center by 16 and use that amount to shift the expected pixels.
  • the 20 bit 5 pixel expected value can be compared against the actual pixels read. This can proceed by subtracting the expected pixels from the actual pixels read on a pixel by pixel basis, and finally adding the differences together to obtain a distance from the expected ⁇ values.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates one form of implementation of the above algorithm which includes a look up table 320 which receives the bit history 322 and central fractional component 323 and outputs 324 the corresponding 20 bit number which is subtracted 321 from the central pixel input 326 to produce a pixel difference 327 .
  • the 2 MB bit-image DRAM area is read from and written to during Phase 2 processing.
  • the 2 MB pixel-data DRAM area is read.
  • the next step in decoding is to unscramble and XOR the raw data.
  • the 2 MB byte image as taken from the Artcard, is in a scrambled XORed form. It must be unscrambled and re-XORed to retrieve the bit image necessary for the Reed Solomon decoder in phase 4.
  • the unscrambling process 330 takes a 2 MB scrambled byte image 331 and writes an unscrambled 2 MB image 332 .
  • the process cannot reasonably be performed in-place, so 2 sets of 2 MB areas are utilised.
  • the scrambled data 331 is in symbol block order arranged in a 16 ⁇ 16 array, with symbol block 0 ( 334 ) having all the symbol 0 's from all the code words in random order.
  • Symbol block 1 has all the symbol 1 's from all the code words in random order etc. Since there are only 255 symbols, the 256% symbol block is currently unused.
  • a linear feedback shift register is used to determine the relationship between the position within a symbol block eg. 334 and what code word eg. 355 it came from. This works as long as the same seed is used when generating the original Artcard images.
  • the XOR of bytes from alternative source lines with 0xAA and 0x55 respectively is effectively free (in time) since the bottleneck of time is waiting for the DRAM to be ready to read/write to non-sequential addresses.
  • This phase is a loop, iterating through copies of the data in the bit image, passing them to the Reed-Solomon decode module until either a successful decode is made or until there are no more copies to attempt decode from.
  • the Reed-Solomon decoder used can be the VLIW processor, suitably programmed or, alternatively, a separate hardwired core such as LSI Logic's L64712.
  • the overall time taken to read the Artcard 9 and decode it is therefore approximately 2.15 seconds.
  • the apparent delay to the user is actually only 0.65 seconds (the total of Phases 3 and 4), since the Artcard stops moving after 1.5 seconds.
  • the Artvark script must be interpreted, Rather than run the script immediately, the script is only run upon the pressing of the ‘Print’ button 13 ( FIG. 1 ).
  • the time taken to run the script will vary depending on the complexity of the script, and must be taken into account for the perceived delay between pressing the print button and the actual print button and the actual printing.
  • the Alternative Artcards can be used in both embedded and PC type applications, providing a user-friendly interface to large amounts of data or configuration information.
  • Alternative Artcard technology can also be independent of the printing resolution.
  • the notion of storing data as dots on a card simply means that if it is possible put more dots in the same space (by increasing resolution), then those dots can represent more data.
  • the preferred embodiment assumes utilisation of 1600 dpi printing on a 86 mm ⁇ 55 mm card as the sample Artcard, but it is simple to determine alternative equivalent layouts and data sizes for other card sizes and/or other print resolutions. Regardless of the print resolution, the reading technique remain the same.
  • alternative Artcards are capable of storing up to 1 Megabyte of data at print resolutions up to 1600 dpi.
  • Alternative Artcards can store megabytes of data at print resolutions greater than 1600 dpi.
  • the following two tables summarize the effective alternative Artcard data storage capacity for certain print resolutions:
  • the dots on the data side of an alternative Artcard can be monochrome. For example, black dots printed on a white background at a predetermined desired print resolution. Consequently a “black dot” is physically different from a “white dot”.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates various examples of magnified views of black and white dots.
  • the monochromatic scheme of black dots on a white background is preferably chosen to maximize dynamic range in blurry reading environments.
  • the black dots are printed at a particular pitch (eg. 1600 dpi)
  • the dots themselves are slightly larger in order to create continuous lines when dots are printed contiguously.
  • the dots are not as merged as they may be in reality as a result of bleeding. There would be more smoothing out of the black indentations.
  • the alternative Artcard system described in the preferred embodiment allows for flexibly different dot sizes, exact dot sizes and ink/printing behaviour for a particular printing technology should be studied in more detail in order to obtain best results.
  • the term dot refers to a physical printed dot (ink, thermal, electro-photographic, silver-halide etc) on an alternative Artcard.
  • the dots must be sampled at least double the printed resolution to satisfy Nyquist's Theorem.
  • the term pixel refers to a sample value from an alternative Artcard reader device. For example, when 1600 dpi dots are scanned at 4800 dpi there are 3 pixels in each dimension of a dot, or 9 pixels per dot. The sampling process will be further explained hereinafter.
  • each alternative Artcard consists of an “active” region 1102 surrounded by a white border region 1103 .
  • the white border 1103 contains no data information, but can be used by an alternative Artcard reader to calibrate white levels.
  • the active region is an array of data blocks eg. 1104 , with each data block separated from the next by a gap of 8 white dots eg. 1106 .
  • the number of data blocks on an alternative Artcard will vary.
  • the array can be 8 ⁇ 8.
  • Each data block 1104 has dimensions of 627 ⁇ 394 dots. With an inter-block gap 1106 of 8 white dots, the active area of an alternative Artcard is therefore 5072 ⁇ 3208 dots (8.1 mm ⁇ 5.1 mm at 1600 dpi).
  • FIG. 18 there is shown a single data block 1107 .
  • the active region of an alternative Artcard consists of an array of identically structured data blocks 1107 .
  • Each of the data blocks has the following structure: a data region 1108 surrounded by clock-marks 1109 , borders 1110 , and targets 1111 .
  • the data region holds the encoded data proper, while the clock-marks, borders and targets are present specifically to help locate the data region and ensure accurate recovery of data from within the region.
  • Each data block 1107 has dimensions of 627 ⁇ 394 dots. Of this, the central area of 595 ⁇ 384 dots is the data region 1108 . The surrounding dots are used to hold the clock-marks, borders, and targets.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a data block with FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 illustrating magnified edge portions thereof.
  • the top 5 dot high region consists of an outer black dot border line 1112 (which stretches the length of the data block), a white dot separator line 1113 (to ensure the border line is independent), and a 3 dot high set of clock marks 1114 .
  • the clock marks alternate between a white and black row, starting with a black clock mark at the 8th column from either end of the data block. There is no separation between clockmark dots and dots in the data region.
  • the clock marks are symmetric in that if the alternative Artcard is inserted rotated 180 degrees, the same relative border/clockmark regions will be encountered.
  • the border 1112 , 1113 is intended for use by an alternative Artcard reader to keep vertical tracking as data is read from the data region.
  • the clockmarks 1114 are intended to keep horizontal tracking as data is read from the data region.
  • the separation between the border and clockmarks by a white line of dots is desirable as a result of blurring occurring during reading.
  • the border thus becomes a black line with white on either side, making for a good frequency response on reading.
  • the clockmarks alternating between white and black have a similar result, except in the horizontal rather than the vertical dimension.
  • Any alternative Artcard reader must locate the clockmarks and border if it intends to use them for tracking.
  • targets which are designed to point the way to the clockmarks, border and data.
  • each target region 1116 , 1117 there are two 15-dot wide target regions 1116 , 1117 in each data block: one to the left and one to the right of the data region.
  • the target regions are separated from the data region by a single column of dots used for orientation.
  • the purpose of the Target Regions 1116 , 1117 is to point the way to the clockmarks, border and data regions.
  • Each Target Region contains 6 targets eg. 1118 that are designed to be easy to find by an alternative Artcard reader.
  • FIG. 22 there is shown the structure of a single target 1120 .
  • Each target 1120 is a 15 ⁇ 15 dot black square with a center structure 1121 and a run-length encoded target number 1122 .
  • the center structure 1121 is a simple white cross, and the target number component 1122 is simply two columns of white dots, each being 2 dots long for each part of the target number.
  • target number I's target id 1122 is 2 dots long
  • target number 2 's target id 1122 is 4 dots wide etc.
  • the targets are arranged so that they are rotation invariant with regards to card insertion. This means that the left targets and right targets are the same, except rotated 180 degrees.
  • the targets are arranged such that targets 1 to 6 are located top to bottom respectively.
  • the targets are arranged so that target numbers 1 to 6 are located bottom to top. The target number id is always in the half closest to the data region.
  • the magnified view portions of FIG. 23 reveals clearly the how the right targets are simply the same as the left targets, except rotated 180 degrees.
  • the targets 1124 , 1125 are specifically placed within the Target Region with centers 55 dots apart.
  • the first black clockmark in both regions begins directly in line with the target center (the 8th dot position is the center of the 15 dot-wide target).
  • FIG. 24 illustrates the distances between target centers as well as the distance from Target 1 ( 1124 ) to the first dot of the first black clockmark ( 1126 ) in the upper border/clockmark region. Since there is a distance of 55 dots to the clockmarks from both the upper and lower targets, and both sides of the alternative Artcard are symmetrical (rotated through 180 degrees), the card can be read left-to-right or right-to-left. Regardless of reading direction, the orientation does need to be determined in order to extract the data from the data region.
  • Orientation Columns 1127 , 1128 there are two 1 dot wide Orientation Columns 1127 , 1128 in each data block: one directly to the left and one directly to the right of the data region.
  • the Orientation Columns are present to give orientation information to an alternative Artcard reader: On the left side of the data region (to the right of the Left Targets) is a single column of white dots 1127 . On the right side of the data region (to the left of the Right Targets) is a single column of black dots 1128 . Since the targets are rotation invariant, these two columns of dots allow an alternative Artcard reader to determine the orientation of the alternative Artcard—has the card been inserted the right way, or back to front. From the alternative Artcard reader's point of view, assuming no degradation to the dots, there are two possibilities:
  • the data region of a data block consists of 595 columns of 384 dots each, for a total of 228,480 dots. These dots must be interpreted and decoded to yield the original data. Each dot represents a single bit, so the 228,480 dots represent 228,480 bits, or 28,560 bytes. The interpretation of each dot can be as follows: Black 1 White 0
  • Reed-Solomon encoding is preferably chosen for its ability to deal with burst errors and effectively detect and correct errors using a minimum of redundancy.
  • Reed Solomon encoding is adequately discussed in the standard texts such as Wicker, S., and Bhargava, V., 1994, Reed-Solomon Codes and their Applications, IEEE Press. Rorabaugh, C, 1996 , Error Coding Cookbook, McGraw-Hill. Lyppens, H., 1997, Reed-Solomon Error Correction, Dr. Dobb's Journal, January 1997 (Volume 22, Issue 1).
  • Reed-Solomon encoding can be used, including different symbol sizes and different levels of redundancy.
  • the following encoding parameters are used:
  • n 255 bytes (2 8 ⁇ 1 symbols).
  • 2t symbols in the final block size must be taken up with redundancy symbols.
  • t-64 means that 64 bytes (symbols) can be corrected per block if they are in error.
  • the practical result is that 127 bytes of original data are encoded to become a 255-byte block of Reed-Solomon encoded data.
  • the encoded 255-byte blocks are stored on the alternative Artcard and later decoded back to the original 127 bytes again by the alternative Artcard reader.
  • the 384 dots in a single column of a data block's data region can hold 48 bytes (384/8). 595 of these columns can hold 28,560 bytes. This amounts to 112 Reed-Solomon blocks (each block having 255 bytes).
  • the 64 data blocks of a complete alternative Artcard can hold a total of 7168 Reed-Solomon blocks (1,827,840 bytes, at 255 bytes per Reed-Solomon block).
  • FIG. 27 illustrates the overall form of encoding utilised.
  • Each of the 2 Control blocks 1132 , 1133 contain the same encoded information required for decoding the remaining 7,166 Reed-Solomon blocks:
  • Each control block is then Reed-Solomon encoded, turning the 127 bytes of control information into 255 bytes of Reed-Solomon encoded data.
  • the Control Block is stored twice to give greater chance of it surviving.
  • the repetition of the data within the Control Block has particular significance when using Reed-Solomon encoding.
  • the first 127 bytes of data are exactly the original data, and can be looked at in an attempt to recover the original message if the Control Block fails decoding (more than 64 symbols are corrupted).
  • the Control Block fails decoding it is possible to examine sets of 3 bytes in an effort to determine the most likely values for the 2 decoding parameters. It is not guaranteed to be recoverable, but it has a better chance through redundancy.
  • the last 159 bytes of the Control Block are destroyed, and the first 96 bytes are perfectly ok. Looking at the first 96 bytes will show a repeating set of numbers. These numbers can be sensibly used to decode the remainder of the message in the remaining 7,166 Reed-Solomon blocks.
  • the alternative Artcard would consist of 7,168 Reed-Solomon blocks.
  • the first 2 blocks would be Control Blocks
  • the next 79 would be the encoded data
  • the next 79 would be a duplicate of the encoded data
  • the next 79 would be another duplicate of the encoded data, and so on.
  • the remaining 56 Reed-Solomon blocks would be another duplicate of the first 56 blocks from the 79 blocks of encoded data (the final 23 blocks of encoded data would not be stored again as there is not enough room on the alternative Artcard).
  • a hex representation of the 127 bytes in each Control Block data before being Reed-Solomon encoded would be as illustrated in FIG. 28 .
  • a maximum 1,827,840 bytes of data can be stored on the alternative Artcard (2 Control Blocks and 7,166 information blocks, totalling 7,168 Reed-Solomon encoded blocks).
  • the data is not directly stored onto the alternative Artcard at this stage however, or all 255 bytes of one Reed-Solomon block will be physically together on the card. Any dirt, grime, or stain that causes physical damage to the card has the potential of damaging more than 64 bytes in a single Reed-Solomon block, which would make that block unrecoverable. If there are no duplicates of that Reed-Solomon block, then the entire alternative Artcard cannot be decoded.
  • the solution is to take advantage of the fact that there are a large number of bytes on the alternative Artcard, and that the alternative Artcard has a reasonable physical size.
  • the data can therefore be scrambled to ensure that symbols from a single Reed-Solomon block are not in close proximity to one another.
  • pathological cases of card degradation can cause Reed-Solomon blocks to be unrecoverable, but on average, the scrambling of data makes the card much more robust.
  • the scrambling scheme chosen is simple and is illustrated schematically in FIG. 29 . All the Byte 0 s from each Reed-Solomon block are placed together 1136 , then all the Byte Is etc. There will therefore be 7,168 byte 0 's, then 7,168 Byte I's etc.
  • Each data block on the alternative Artcard can store 28,560 bytes. Consequently there are approximately 4 bytes from each Reed-Solomon block in each of the 64 data blocks on the alternative Artcard.
  • the data is simply written out to the alternative Artcard data blocks so that the first data block contains the first 28,560 bytes of the scrambled data, the second data block contains the next 28,560 bytes etc.
  • the data is written out column-wise left to right.
  • the left-most column within a data block contains the first 48 bytes of the 28,560 bytes of scrambled data
  • the last column contains the last 48 bytes of the 28,560 bytes of scrambled data.
  • bytes are written out top to bottom, one bit at a time, starting from bit 7 and finishing with bit 0 . If the bit is set (1), a black dot is placed on the alternative Artcard, if the bit is clear (0), no dot is placed, leaving it the white background color of the card.
  • a set of 1,827,840 bytes of data can be created by scrambling 7,168 Reed-Solomon encoded blocks to be stored onto an alternative Artcard.
  • the first 28,560 bytes of data are written to the first data block.
  • the first 48 bytes of the first 28,560 bytes are written to the first column of the data block, the next 48 bytes to the next column and so on.
  • the first two bytes of the 28,560 bytes are hex D3 5F. Those first two bytes will be stored in column 0 of the data block.
  • Bit 7 of byte 0 will be stored first, then bit 6 and so on.
  • Bit 7 of byte 1 will be stored through to bit 0 of byte 1 . Since each “1” is stored as a black dot, and each “0” as a white dot, these two bytes will be represented on the alternative Artcard as the following set of dots:
  • This section deals with extracting the original data from an alternative Artcard in an accurate and robust manner. Specifically, it assumes the alternative Artcard format as described in the previous chapter, and describes a method of extracting the original pre-encoded data from the alternative Artcard.
  • an alternative Artcard is to store data for use in different applications.
  • a user inserts an alternative Artcard into an alternative Artcard reader, and expects the data to be loaded in a “reasonable time”.
  • a motor transport moves the alternative Artcard into an alternative Artcard reader. This is not perceived as a problematic delay, since the alternative Artcard is in motion. Any time after the alternative Artcard has stopped is perceived as a delay, and should be minimized in any alternative Artcard reading scheme. Ideally, the entire alternative Artcard would be read while in motion, and thus there would be no perceived delay after the card had stopped moving.
  • a reasonable time for an alternative Artcard to be physically loaded is defined to be 1.5 seconds. There should be a minimization of time for additional decoding after the alternative Artcard has stopped moving. Since the Active region of an alternative Artcard covers most of the alternative Artcard surface we can limit our timing concerns to that region.
  • the dots on an alternative Artcard must be sampled by a CCD reader or the like at least at double the printed resolution to satisfy Nyquist's Theorem. In practice it is better to sample at a higher rate than this.
  • dots are preferably sampled at 3 times their printed resolution in each dimension, requiring 9 pixels to define a single dot. If the resolution of the alternative Artcard dots is 1600 dpi, the alternative Artcard reader's image sensor must scan pixels at 4800 dpi. Of course if a dot is not exactly aligned with the sampling sensor, the worst and most likely case as illustrated in FIG. 31 , is that a dot will be sensed over a 4 ⁇ 4 pixel area.
  • Each sampled pixel is 1 byte (8 bits). The lowest 2 bits of each pixel can contain significant noise. Decoding algorithms must therefore be noise tolerant.
  • this angle of rotation is a maximum of 1 degree. There can be some slight aberrations in angle due to jitter and motor rumble during the reading process, but these are assumed to essentially stay within the 1-degree limit.
  • the length of the CCD itself must accommodate:
  • the actual amount of memory required for reading and decoding an alternative Artcard is twice the amount of space required to hold the encoded data, together with a small amount of scratch space (1-2 KB). For the 1600 dpi alternative Artcard, this implies a 4 MB memory requirement.
  • the actual usage of the memory is detailed in the following algorithm description.
  • a standard Rambus Direct RDRAM architecture is assumed, as defined in Rambus Inc, October 1997 , Direct Rambus Technology Disclosure , with a peak data transfer rate of 1.6 GB/sec. Assuming 75% efficiency (easily achieved), we have an average of 1.2 GB/sec data transfer rate. The average time to access a block of 16 bytes is therefore 12 ns.
  • Alternative Artcards Physically damaged alternative Artcards can be inserted into a reader.
  • Alternative Artcards may be scratched, or be stained with grime or dirt.
  • a alternative Artcard reader can't assume to read everything perfectly. The effect of dirty data is made worse by blurring, as the dirty data affects the surrounding clean dots.
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic illustration of the overlapping of sensed data.
  • Black and white dots were chosen for alternative Artcards to give the best dynamic range in blurry reading environments. Blurring can cause problems in attempting to determine whether a given dot is black or white.
  • FIG. 34 shows the distribution of resultant center dot values for black and white dots.
  • the diagram is intended to be a representative blurring.
  • the curve 1140 from 0 to around 180 shows the range of black dots.
  • the curve 1141 from 75 to 250 shows the range of white dots.
  • a pixel value at the center point of intersection is ambiguous—the dot is equally likely to be a black or a white.
  • FIG. 34 is a graph of number predicted number of alternative Artcard Reed-Solomon blocks that cannot be recovered given a particular symbol error rate. Notice how the Reed-Solomon decoding scheme performs well and then substantially degrades. If there is no Reed-Solomon block duplication, then only 1 block needs to be in error for the data to be unrecoverable. Of course, with block duplication the chance of an alternative Artcard decoding increases.
  • FIG. 35 only illustrates the symbol (byte) errors corresponding to the number of Reed-Solomon blocks in error.
  • the amount of blurring that can be coped with compared to the amount of damage that has been done to a card. Since all error detection and correction is performed by a Reed-Solomon decoder, there is a finite number of errors per Reed-Solomon data block that can be coped with. The more errors introduced through blurring, the fewer the number of errors that can be coped with due to alternative Artcard damage.
  • a motor transport ideally carries the alternative Artcard past a monochrome linear CCD image sensor.
  • the card is sampled in each dimension at three times the printed resolution.
  • Alternative Artcard reading hardware and software compensate for rotation up to 1 degree, jitter and vibration due to the motor transport, and blurring due to variations in alternative Artcard to CCD distance.
  • a digital bit image of the data is extracted from the sampled image by a complex method described here.
  • Reed-Solomon decoding corrects arbitrarily distributed data corruption of up to 25% of the raw data on the alternative Artcard. Approximately 1 MB of corrected data is extracted from a 1600 dpi card.
  • the decoding process requires the following steps:
  • the rotation and unscrambling of the bit image cannot occur until the whole bit image has been extracted. It is therefore necessary to assign a memory region to hold the extracted bit image.
  • the bit image fits easily within 2 MB, leaving 2 MB for use in the extraction process.
  • the 4 MB memory is therefore used as follows:
  • the time taken for Phase I is 1.5 seconds, since this is the time taken for the alternative Artcard to travel past the CCD and physically load.
  • Phase 2 has no real-time requirements, in that the alternative Artcard has stopped moving, and we are only concerned with the user's perception of elapsed time. Phase 2 therefore involves the remaining tasks of decoding an alternative Artcard:
  • the input to Phase 2 is the 2 MB bit image buffer. Unscrambling and rotating cannot be performed in situ, so a second 2 MB buffer is required. The 2 MB buffer used to hold scanned pixels in Phase I is no longer required and can be used to store the rotated unscrambled data.
  • the Reed-Solomon decoding task takes the unscrambled bit image and decodes it to 910,082 bytes.
  • the decoding can be performed in situ, or to a specified location elsewhere. The decoding process does not require any additional memory buffers.
  • the 4 MB memory is therefore used as follows:
  • Phase 2 The time taken for Phase 2 is hardware dependent and is bound by the time taken for Reed-Solomon decoding. Using a dedicated core such as LSI Logic's L64712, or an equivalent CPU/DSP combination, it is estimated that Phase 2 would take 0.32 seconds.
  • Phase 1 can be divided into 2 asynchronous process streams.
  • the first of these streams is simply the real-time reader of alternative Artcard pixels from the CCD, writing the pixels to DRAM.
  • the second stream involves looking at the pixels, and extracting the bits.
  • the second process stream is itself divided into 2 processes.
  • the first process is a global process, concerned with locating the start of the alternative Artcard.
  • the second process is the bit image extraction proper.
  • FIG. 38 illustrates the data flow from a data/process perspective.
  • the CCD scans the alternative Artcard at 4800 dpi, and generates 11,000 1-byte pixel samples per column. This process simply takes the data from the CCD and writes it to DRAM, completely independently of any other process that is reading the pixel data from DRAM.
  • FIG. 39 illustrates the steps involved.
  • the pixels are written contiguously to a 2 MB buffer that can hold 190 full columns of pixels.
  • the buffer always holds the 190 columns most recently read. Consequently, any process that wants to read the pixel data (such as Processes 2 and 3) must firstly know where to look for a given column, and secondly, be fast enough to ensure that the data required is actually in the buffer.
  • Process 1 makes the current scanline number (CurrentScanLine) available to other processes so they can ensure they are not attempting to access pixels from scanlines that have not been read yet.
  • Process 1 therefore uses just under 9% of the available DRAM bandwidth ( 8256 / 92296 ).
  • This process is concerned with locating the Active Area on a scanned alternative Artcard.
  • the input to this stage is the pixel data from DRAM (placed there by Process 1).
  • the output is a set of bounds for the first 8 data blocks on the alternative Artcard, required as input to Process 3.
  • a high level overview of the process can be seen in FIG. 40 .
  • An alternative Artcard can have vertical slop of 1 mm upon insertion. With a rotation of 1 degree there is further vertical slop of 1.5 mm (86 sin 1°). Consequently there is a total vertical slop of 2.5 mm. At 1600 dpi, this equates to a slop of approximately 160 dots. Since a single data block is only 394 dots high, the slop is just under half a data block. To get a better estimate of where the data blocks are located the alternative Artcard itself needs to be detected.
  • Process 2 therefore consists of two parts:
  • the scanned pixels outside the alternative Artcard area are black (the surface can be black plastic or some other non-reflective surface).
  • the ProcessColumn function is simple. Pixels from two areas of the scanned column are passed through a threshold filter to determine if they are black or white. It is possible to then wait for a certain number of white pixels and announce the start of the alternative Artcard once the given number has been detected.
  • the logic of processing a pixel column is shown in the following pseudocode. 0 is returned if the alternative Artcard has not been detected during the column. Otherwise the pixel number of the detected location is returned.
  • the second step of Process 2 determines which was detected and sets the data block bounds for Phase 3 appropriately.
  • each data block has a StartPixel and an EndPixel to determine where to look for targets in order to locate the data block's data region.
  • the pixel value is in the upper half of the card, it is possible to simply use that as the first StartPixel bounds. If the pixel value is in the lower half of the card, it is possible to move back so that the pixel value is the last segment's EndPixel bounds. We step forwards or backwards by the alternative Artcard data size, and thus set up each segment with appropriate bounds. We are now ready to begin extracting data from the alternative Artcard.
  • the MaxPixel value is defined in Process 3, and the SetBounds function simply sets StartPixel and EndPixel clipping with respect to 0 and MaxPixel.
  • This process is concerned with extracting the bit data from the CCD pixel data.
  • the process essentially creates a bit-image from the pixel data, based on scratch information created by Process 2, and maintained by Process 3.
  • a high level overview of the process can be seen in FIG. 41 .
  • Process 3 Rather than simply read an alternative Artcard's pixel column and determine what pixels belong to what data block, Process 3 works the other way around. It knows where to look for the pixels of a given data block. It does this by dividing a logical alternative Artcard into 8 segments, each containing 8 data blocks as shown in FIG. 42 .
  • the segments as shown match the logical alternative Artcard. Physically, the alternative Artcard is likely to be rotated by some amount. The segments remain locked to the logical alternative Artcard structure, and hence are rotation-independent. A given segment can have one of two states:
  • Targets are being located by scanning pixel column data in the bounds indicated by the segment bounds. Once the data block has been located via the targets, and bounds set for black & white, the state changes to ExtractingBitImage.
  • the process is complete when all 64 data blocks have been extracted, 8 from each region.
  • Each data block consists of 595 columns of data, each with 48 bytes.
  • the 2 orientation columns for the data block are each extracted at 48 bytes each, giving a total of 28,656 bytes extracted per data block.
  • the nth data block for a given segment is stored at the location: StartBuffer +(256 k*n ) Data Structure for Segments
  • Each of the 8 segments has an associated data structure.
  • the data structure defining each segment is stored in the scratch data area.
  • the structure can be as set out in the following table: DataName Comment CurrentState Defines the current state of the segment. Can be one of: LookingForTargets ExtractingBitImage Initial value is LookingForTargets Used during LookingForTargets: StartPixel Upper pixel bound of segment. Initially set by Process 2. EndPixel Lower pixel bound of segment. Initially set by Process 2 MaxPixel The maximum pixel number for any scanline. It is set to the same value for each segment: 10,866. CurrentColumn Pixel column we're up to while looking for targets. FinalColumn Defines the last pixel column to look in for targets.
  • Process 3 simply iterates through each of the segments, performing a single line of processing depending on the segment's current state.
  • Process 3 must be halted by an external controlling process if it has not terminated after a specified amount of time. This will only be the case if the data cannot be extracted. A simple mechanism is to start a countdown after Process 1 has finished reading the alternative Artcard. If Process 3 has not finished by that time, the data from the alternative Artcard cannot be recovered.
  • Targets are detected by reading columns of pixels, one pixel-column at a time rather than by detecting dots within a given band of pixels (between StartPixel and EndPixel) certain patterns of pixels are detected.
  • the pixel columns are processed one at a time until either all the targets are found, or until a specified number of columns have been processed. At that time the targets can be processed and the data area located via clockmarks.
  • the state is changed to ExtractingBitImage to signify that the data is now to be extracted. If enough valid targets are not located, then the data block is ignored, skipping to a column definitely within the missed data block, and then beginning again the process of looking for the targets in the next data block.
  • Each pixel column is processed within the specified bounds (between StartPixel and EndPixel) to search for certain patterns of pixels which will identify the targets.
  • the structure of a single target (target number 2 ) is as previously shown in FIG. 23 :
  • a target can be identified by:
  • the pixels 1150 from each column are passed through a filter 1151 to detect black or white, and then run length encoded 1152 .
  • the run-lengths are then passed to a state machine 1153 that has access to the last 3 run lengths and the 4th last color. Based on these values, possible targets pass through each of the identification stages.
  • the GatherMin&Max process 1155 simply keeps the minimum & maximum pixel values encountered during the processing of the segment. These are used once the targets have been located to set BlackMax, WhiteMin, and MidRange values.
  • Each segment keeps a set of target structures in its search for targets. While the target structures themselves don't move around in memory, several segment variables point to lists of pointers to these target structures. The three pointer lists are repeated here: LocatedTargets Points to a set of Target structures that represent located targets. PossibleTargets Points to a set of pointers to Target structures that represent currently investigated pixel shapes that may be targets. AvailableTargets Points to a set of pointers to Target structures that are currently unused.
  • TargetsFound PossibleTargetCount
  • AvailableTargetCount AvailableTargetCount
  • TargetsFound and PossibleTargetCount are set to 0, and AvailableTargetCount is set to 28 (the maximum number of target structures possible to have under investigation since the minimum size of a target border is 40 pixels, and the data area is approximately 1152 pixels).
  • AvailableTargetCount is set to 28 (the maximum number of target structures possible to have under investigation since the minimum size of a target border is 40 pixels, and the data area is approximately 1152 pixels).
  • An example of the target pointer layout is as illustrated in FIG. 44 .
  • the target data structure is updated, and the pointer to the structure is added to the PossibleTargets list 1158 .
  • a target is completely verified, it is added to the LocatedTargets list 1159 . If a possible target is found not to be a target after all, it is placed back onto the AvailableTargets list 1157 . Consequently there are always 28 target pointers in circulation at any time, moving between the lists.
  • the Target data structure 1160 can have the following form: DataName Comment CurrentState The current state of the target search DetectCount Counts how long a target has been in a given state StartPixel Where does the target start? All the lines of pixels in this target should start within a tolerance of this pixel value. TargetNumber Which target number is this (according to what was read) Column Best estimate of the target's center column ordinate Pixel Best estimate of the target's center pixel ordinate
  • the ProcessPixelColumn function within the find targets module 1162 goes through all the run lengths one by one, comparing the runs against existing possible targets (via StartPixel), or creating new possible targets if a potential target is found where none was previously known. In all cases, the comparison is only made if S0.color is white and S1.color is black.
  • AddToTarget is a function within the find targets module that determines whether it is possible or not to add the specific run to the given target:
  • the EvaluateState procedure takes action depending on the current state and the run type.
  • the located targets (in the LocatedTargets list) are stored in the order they were located. Depending on alternative Artcard rotation these targets will be in ascending pixel order or descending pixel order. In addition, the target numbers recovered from the targets may be in error. We may have also have recovered a false target. Before the clockmark estimates can be obtained, the targets need to be processed to ensure that invalid targets are discarded, and valid targets have target numbers fixed if in error (e.g. a damaged target number due to dirt). Two main steps are involved:
  • the first step is simple.
  • the nature of the target retrieval means that the data should already be sorted in either ascending pixel or descending pixel.
  • a simple swap sort ensures that if the 6 targets are already sorted correctly a maximum of 14 comparisons is made with no swaps. If the data is not sorted, 14 comparisons are made, with 3 swaps.
  • Locating and fixing erroneous target numbers is only slightly more complex.
  • each of the N targets found is assumed to be correct.
  • the other targets are compared to this “correct” target and the number of targets that require change should target N be correct is counted. If the number of changes is 0, then all the targets must already be correct. Otherwise the target that requires the fewest changes to the others is used as the base for change.
  • a change is registered if a given target's target number and pixel position do not correlate when compared to the “correct” target's pixel position and target number.
  • the change may mean updating a target's target number, or it may mean elimination of the target. It is possible to assume that ascending targets have pixels in ascending order (since they have already been sorted).
  • the LocatedTargets list needs to be compacted and all NULL targets removed.
  • the upper region's first clockmark dot 1126 is 55 dots away from the center of the first target 1124 (which is the same as the distance between target centers).
  • the center of the clockmark dots is a further 1 dot away, and the black border line 1123 is a further 4 dots away from the first clockmark dot.
  • the lower region's first clockmark dot is exactly 7 targets-distance away (7 ⁇ 55 dots) from the upper region's first clockmark dot 1126 .
  • Targets 1 and 6 have been located, so it is necessary to use the upper-most and lower-most targets, and use the target numbers to determine which targets are being used. It is necessary at least 2 targets at this point.
  • the target centers are only estimates of the actual target centers. It is to locate the target center more accurately. The center of a target is white, surrounded by black. We therefore want to find the local maximum in both pixel & column dimensions. This involves reconstructing the continuous image since the maximum is unlikely to be aligned exactly on an integer boundary (our estimate).
  • the existing target centers actually are the top left coordinate of the bounding box of the target center. It is a simple process to go through each of the pixels for the area defining the center of the target, and find the pixel with the highest value. There may be more than one pixel with the same maximum pixel value, but the estimate of the center value only requires one pixel.
  • the target center coordinates point to the whitest pixel of the target, which should be within one pixel of the actual center.
  • the process of building a more accurate position for the target center involves reconstructing the continuous signal for 7 scanline slices of the target, 3 to either side of the estimated target center.
  • the 7 maximum values found are then used to reconstruct a continuous signal in the column dimension and thus to locate the maximum value in that dimension.
  • FindMax is a function that reconstructs the original 1 dimensional signal based sample points and returns the position of the maximum as well as the maximum value found.
  • the method of signal reconstruction/resampling used is the Lanczos3 windowed sinc function as shown in FIG. 45 .
  • the Lanczos3 windowed sinc function takes 7 (pixel) samples from the dimension being reconstructed, centered around the estimated position X, i.e. at X ⁇ 3, X ⁇ 2, X ⁇ 1, X, X+1, X+2, X+3.
  • We use 6 points for X ⁇ 1 to X, and 6 points for X to X+ 1 requiring 7 points overall in order to get pixel values from X ⁇ 1 to X+1 since some of the pixels required are the same.
  • LowerClock.pixel UpperClock.pixel + ((TARGETS_PER_BLOCK+1) * deltaPixel)
  • LowerClock.column UpperClock.column + ((TARGETS_PER_BLOCK+1) * deltaColumn)
  • the pixel ranges for black and white dots needs to be ascertained.
  • the minimum and maximum pixels encountered during the search for targets were stored in WhiteMin and BlackMax respectively, but these do not represent valid values for these variables with respect to data extraction. They are merely used for storage convenience.
  • the following pseudocode shows the method of obtaining good values for WhiteMin and BlackMax based on the min & max pixels encountered:
  • the ExtractingBitImage state is one where the data block has already been accurately located via the targets, and bit data is currently being extracted one dot column at a time and written to the alternative Artcard bit image.
  • the following of data block clockmarks/borders gives accurate dot recovery regardless of rotation, and thus the segment bounds are ignored.
  • Processing a given dot column involves two tasks:
  • FIG. 46 illustrates an example data block's top left which corner reveals that there are clockmarks 3 dots high 1166 extending out to the target area, a white row, and then a black border line.
  • an estimation of the center of the first black clockmark position is provided (based on the target positions).
  • the clockmark estimate is taken and by looking at the pixel data in its vicinity, the continuous signal is reconstructed and the exact center is determined. Since we have broken out the two dimensions into a clockmark and border, this is a simple one-dimensional process that needs to be performed twice. However, this is only done every second dot column, when there is a black clockmark to register against. For the white clockmarks we simply use the estimate and leave it at that. Alternatively, we could update the pixel coordinate based on the border each dot column (since it is always present). In practice it is sufficient to update both ordinates every other column (with the black clockmarks) since the resolution being worked at is so fine.
  • DetermineAccurateUpperDotCenter is implemented via the following pseudocode: // Use the estimated pixel position of // the border to determine where to look for // a more accurate clockmark center.
  • the clockmark // is 3 dots high so even if the estimated position // of the border is wrong, it won't affect the // fixing of the clockmark position.
  • GetAccuratePixel and GetAccurateColumn are functions that determine an accurate dot center given a coordinate, but only from the perspective of a single dimension. Determining accurate dot centers is a process of signal reconstruction and then finding the location where the minimum signal value is found (this is different to locating a target center, which is locating the maximum value of the signal since the target center is white, not black).
  • the method chosen for signal reconstruction/resampling for this application is the Lanczos3 windowed sinc function as previously discussed with reference to FIG. 45 .
  • the clockmark or border has been damaged in some way—perhaps it has been scratched. If the new center value retrieved by the resampling differs from the estimate by more than a tolerance amount, the center value is only moved by the maximum tolerance. If it is an invalid position, it should be close enough to use for data retrieval, and future clockmarks will resynchronize the position.
  • the first thing to do is calculate the deltas for the dot column. This is achieved simply by subtracting the UpperClock from the LowerClock, and then dividing by the number of dots between the two points. It is possible to actually multiply by the inverse of the number of dots since it is constant for an alternative Artcard, and multiplying is faster. It is possible to use different constants for obtaining the deltas in pixel and column dimensions.
  • the delta in pixels is the distance between the two borders, while the delta in columns is between the centers of the two clockmarks.
  • DetermineDatalnfo is two parts. The first is given by the pseudocode:
  • the variable CurrentDot points is determined to the center of the first dot of the current column.
  • DataDelta 2 additions: 1 for the column ordinate, the other for the pixel ordinate.
  • a sample of the dot at the given coordinate (bi-linear interpolation) is taken, and a pixel value representing the center of the dot is determined.
  • the pixel value is then used to determine the bit value for that dot.
  • the GetPixel function takes a dot coordinate (fixed point) and samples 4 CCD pixels to arrive at a center pixel value via bilinear interpolation.
  • the DetermineCenterDot function takes the pixel values representing the dot centers to either side of the dot whose bit value is being determined, and attempts to intelligently guess the value of that center dot's bit value. From the generalized blurring curve of FIG. 33 there are three common cases to consider:
  • the scheme used to determine a dot's value if the pixel value is between BlackMax and WhiteMin is not too complex, but gives good results. It uses the pixel values of the dot centers to the left and right of the dot in question, using their values to help determine a more likely value for the center dot:
  • the clockmark values are no longer needed. They are conveniently updated in readiness for the next column after the data has been retrieved for the column. Since the clockmark direction is perpendicular to the traversal of dots down the dot column, it is possible to use the pixel delta to update the column, and subtract the column delta to update the pixel for both clocks:
  • DRAM utilization is specified relative to Process 1, which writes each pixel once in a consecutive manner, consuming 9% of the DRAM bandwidth.
  • the timing as described in this section shows that the DRAM is easily able to cope with the demands of the alternative Artcard Reader algorithm.
  • the timing bottleneck will therefore be the implementation of the algorithm in terms of logic speed, not DRAM access.
  • the algorithms have been designed however, with simple architectures in mind, requiring a minimum number of logical operations for every memory cycle. From this point of view, as long as the implementation state machine or equivalent CPU/DSP architecture is able to perform as described in the following sub-sections, the target speed will be met.
  • Targets are located by reading pixels within the bounds of a pixel column. Each pixel is read once at most. Assuming a run-length encoder that operates fast enough, the bounds on the location of targets is memory access. The accesses will therefore be no worse than the timing for Process 1, which means a 9% utilization of the DRAM bandwidth.
  • the total utilization of DRAM during target location (including Process 1) is therefore 18%, meaning that the target locator will always be catching up to the alternative Artcard image sensor pixel reader.
  • a target is positively identified on the first pixel column after the target number. Since there are 2 dot columns before the orientation column, there are 6 pixel columns.
  • the Target Location process effectively uses up the first of the pixel columns, but the remaining 5 pixel columns are not processed at all. Therefore the data area can be located in 2 ⁇ 5 of the time available without impinging on any other process time.
  • Extracting the dot information involves only 4 pixel reads per dot (rather than the average 9 that define the dot). Considering the data area of 1152 pixels (384 dots), at best this will save 72 cache reads by only reading 4 pixel dots instead of 9. The worst case is a rotation of 10 which is a single pixel translation every 57 pixels, which gives only slightly worse savings.
  • Phase 2 is the non-real-time phase of alternative Artcard data recovery algorithm.
  • a bit image has been extracted from the alternative Artcard. It represents the bits read from the data regions of the alternative Artcard. Some of the bits will be in error, and perhaps the entire data is rotated 180° because the alternative Artcard was rotated when inserted.
  • Phase 2 is concerned with reliably extracting the original data from this encoded bit image. There are basically 3 steps to be carried out as illustrated in FIG. 48 :
  • Each of the 3 steps is defined as a separate process, and performed consecutively, since the output of one is required as the input to the next. It is straightforward to combine the first two steps into a single process, but for the purposes of clarity, they are treated separately here.
  • Phase 2 has the structure as illustrated in FIG. 49 .
  • Processes 1 and 2 are likely to be negligible, consuming less than ⁇ fraction (1/1000) ⁇ th of a second between them.
  • Process 3 (Reed Solomon decode) consumes approximately 0.32 seconds, making this the total time required for Phase 2.
  • bit map in DRAM now represents the retrieved data from the alternative Artcard. However the bit image is not contiguous. It is broken into 64 32 k chunks, one chunk for each data block. Each 32 k chunk contains only 28,656 useful bytes:
  • the 2 MB buffer used for pixel data (stored by Process 1 of Phase 1) can be used to hold the reorganized bit image, since pixel data is not required during Phase 2. At the end of the reorganization, a correctly oriented contiguous bit image will be in the 2 MB pixel buffer, ready for Reed-Solomon decoding.
  • the leftmost Orientation Column will be white and the rightmost Orientation Column will be black. If the card has been rotated 180°, then the leftmost Orientation Column will be black and the rightmost Orientation Column will be white.
  • the bit image is now 1,827,840 contiguous, correctly oriented, but scrambled bytes.
  • the bytes must be unscrambled to create the 7,168 Reed-Solomon blocks, each 255 bytes long.
  • the unscrambling process is quite straightforward, but requires a separate output buffer since the unscrambling cannot be performed in situ.
  • FIG. 49 illustrates the unscrambling process conducted memory.
  • the algorithm performs the decoding one Reed-Solomon block at a time, and can (if desired) be performed in situ, since the encoded block is larger than the decoded block, and the redundancy bytes are stored after the data bytes.
  • the first 2 Reed-Solomon blocks are control blocks, containing information about the size of the data to be extracted from the bit image. This meta-information must be decoded first, and the resultant information used to decode the data proper.
  • the decoding of the data proper is simply a case of decoding the data blocks one at a time. Duplicate data blocks can be used if a particular block fails to decode.
  • the GetControlData function is straightforward as long as there are no decoding errors.
  • the function simply calls DecodeBlock to decode one control block at a time until successful.
  • the control parameters can then be extracted from the first 3 bytes of the decoded data (destBlocks is stored in the bytes 0 and 1 , and lastblock is stored in byte 2 ). If there are decoding errors the function must traverse the 32 sets of 3 bytes and decide which is the most likely set value to be correct.
  • One simple method is to find 2 consecutive equal copies of the 3 bytes, and to declare those values the correct ones.
  • An alternative method is to count occurrences of the different sets of 3 bytes, and announce the most common occurrence to be the correct one.
  • Reed-Solomon decode depends on the implementation. While it is possible to use a dedicated core to perform the Reed-Solomon decoding process (such as LSI Logic's L64712), it is preferable to select a CPU/DSP combination that can be more generally used throughout the embedded system (usually to do something with the decoded data) depending on the application. Of course decoding time must be fast enough with the CPU/DSP combination.
  • the L64712 has a throughput of 50 Mbits per second (around 6.25 MB per second), so the time is bound by the speed of the Reed-Solomon decoder rather than the maximum 2 MB read and 1 MB write memory access time.
  • the current reading algorithm of the preferred embodiment has the ability to use the surrounding dots in the same column in order to make a better decision about a dot's value. Since the previous column's dots have already been decoded, a previous column dot history could be useful in determining the value of those dots whose pixel values are in the not-sure range.
  • a different possibility with regard to the initial stage is to remove it entirely, make the initial bounds of the data blocks larger than necessary and place greater intelligence into the ProcessingTargets functions. This may reduce overall complexity. Care must be taken to maintain data block independence.
  • control block mechanism can be made more robust:
  • FIG. 51 there is illustrated one form of card reader 500 which allows for the insertion of Artcards 9 for reading.
  • FIG. 50 shows an exploded perspective of the reader of FIG. 51 .
  • Cardreader is interconnected to a computer system and includes a CCD reading mechanism 35 .
  • the cardreader includes pinch rollers 506 , 507 for pinching an inserted Artcard 9 .
  • One of the roller e.g. 506 is driven by an Artcard motor 37 for the advancement of the card 9 between the two rollers 506 and 507 at a uniformed speed.
  • the Artcard 9 is passed over a series of LED lights 512 which are encased within a clear plastic mould 514 having a semi circular cross section.
  • the cross section focuses the light from the LEDs eg 512 onto the surface of the card 9 as it passes by the LEDs 512 . From the surface it is reflected to a high resolution linear CCD 34 which is constructed to a resolution of approximately 480 dpi.
  • the surface of the Artcard 9 is encoded to the level of approximately 1600 dpi hence, the linear CCD 34 supersamples the Artcard surface with an approximately three times multiplier.
  • the Artcard 9 is further driven at a speed such that the linear CCD 34 is able to supersample in the direction of Artcard movement at a rate of approximately 4800 readings per inch.
  • the scanned Artcard CCD data is forwarded from the Artcard reader to ACP 31 for processing.
  • a sensor 49 which can comprise a light sensor acts to detect of the presence of the card 13 .
  • the CCD reader includes a bottom substrate 516 , a top substrate 514 which comprises a transparent molded plastic. In between the two substrates is inserted the linear CCD array 34 which comprises a thin long linear CCD array constructed by means of semi-conductor manufacturing processes.
  • FIG. 52 there is illustrated a side perspective view, partly in section, of an example construction of the CCD reader unit.
  • the series of LEDs eg. 512 are operated to emit light when a card 9 is passing across the surface of the CCD reader 34 .
  • the emitted light is transmitted through a portion of the top substrate 523 .
  • the substrate includes a portion eg. 529 having a curved circumference so as to focus light emitted from LED 512 to a point eg. 532 on the surface of the card 9 .
  • the focused light is reflected from the point 532 towards the CCD array 34 .
  • a series of microlenses eg. 534 shown in exaggerated form, are formed on the surface of the top substrate 523 .
  • the microlenses 523 act to focus light received across the surface to the focused down to a point 536 which corresponds to point on the surface of the CCD reader 34 for sensing of light falling on the light sensing portion of the CCD array 34 .
  • the sensing devices on the linear CCD 34 may be staggered.
  • the corresponding microlenses 34 can also be correspondingly formed as to focus light into a staggered series of spots so as to correspond to the staggered CCD sensors.
  • the data surface area of the Artcard 9 is modulated with a checkerboard pattern as previously discussed with reference to FIG. 5 .
  • Other forms of high frequency modulation may be possible however.
  • an Artcard printer can be provided as for the printing out of data on storage Artcard.
  • the Artcard system can be utilized as a general form of information distribution outside of the Artcam device.
  • An Artcard printer can prints out Artcards on high quality print surfaces and multiple Artcards can be printed on same sheets and later separated.
  • On a second surface of the Artcard 9 can be printed information relating to the files etc. stored on the Artcard 9 for subsequent storage.
  • the Artcard system allows for a simplified form of storage which is suitable for use in place of other forms of storage such as CD ROMs, magnetic disks etc.
  • the Artcards 9 can also be mass produced and thereby produced in a substantially inexpensive form for redistribution.
  • FIG. 54 there is illustrated the print roll 42 and print-head portions of the Artcam.
  • the paper/film 611 is fed in a continuous “web-like” process to a printing mechanism 15 which includes further pinch rollers 616 - 619 and a print head 44 .
  • the pinch roller 613 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) and upon rotation of the print roller 613 , “paper” in the form of film 611 is forced through the printing mechanism 615 and out of the picture output slot 6 .
  • a rotary guillotine mechanism (not shown) is utilised to cut the roll of paper 611 at required photo sizes.
  • printer roll 42 is responsible for supplying “paper” 611 to the print mechanism 615 for printing of photographically imaged pictures.
  • FIG. 55 there is shown an exploded perspective of the print roll 42 .
  • the printer roll 42 includes output printer paper 611 which is output under the operation of pinching rollers 612 , 613 .
  • FIG. 56 there is illustrated a more fully exploded perspective view, of the print roll 42 of FIG. 55 without the “paper” film roll.
  • the print roll 42 includes three main parts comprising ink reservoir section 620 , paper roll sections 622 , 623 and outer casing sections 626 , 627 .
  • the ink reservoir section 620 which includes the ink reservoir or ink supply sections 633 .
  • the ink for printing is contained within three bladder type containers 630 - 632 .
  • the printer roll 42 is assumed to provide full color output inks.
  • a first ink reservoir or bladder container 630 contains cyan colored ink.
  • a second reservoir 631 contains magenta colored ink and a third reservoir 632 contains yellow ink.
  • Each of the reservoirs 630 - 632 although having different volumetric dimensions, are designed to have substantially the same volumetric size.
  • the ink reservoir sections 621 , 633 , in addition to cover 624 can be made of plastic sections and are designed to be mated together by means of heat sealing, ultra violet radiation, etc.
  • Each of the equally sized ink reservoirs 630 - 632 is connected to a corresponding ink channel 639 - 641 for allowing the flow of ink from the reservoir 630 - 632 to a corresponding ink output port 635 - 637 .
  • the ink reservoirs 630 - 632 can be filled with corresponding ink and the section 633 joined to the section 621 .
  • the ink reservoir sections 630 - 632 being collapsible bladders, allow for ink to traverse ink channels 639 - 641 and therefore be in fluid communication with the ink output ports 635 - 637 .
  • an air inlet port can also be provided to allow the pressure associated with ink channel reservoirs 630 - 632 to be maintained as required.
  • the cap 624 can be joined to the ink reservoir section 620 so as to form a pressurized cavity, accessible by the air pressure inlet port.
  • the ink reservoir sections 621 , 633 and 624 are designed to be connected together as an integral unit and to be inserted inside printer roll sections 622 , 623 .
  • the printer roll sections 622 , 623 are designed to mate together by means of a snap fit by means of male portions 645 - 647 mating with corresponding female portions (not shown).
  • female portions 654 - 656 are designed to mate with corresponding male portions 660 - 662 .
  • the paper roll sections 622 , 623 are therefore designed to be snapped together.
  • One end of the film within the role is pinched between the two sections 622 , 623 when they are joined together.
  • the print film can then be rolled on the print roll sections 622 , 625 as required.
  • the ink reservoir sections 620 , 621 , 633 , 624 are designed to be inserted inside the paper roll sections 622 , 623 .
  • the printer roll sections 622 , 623 are able to be rotatable around stationery ink reservoir sections 621 , 633 and 624 to dispense film on demand.
  • the outer casing sections 626 and 627 are further designed to be coupled around the print roller sections 622 , 623 .
  • each end of pinch rollers eg 612 , 613 is designed to clip in to a corresponding cavity eg 670 in cover 626 , 627 with roller 613 being driven externally (not shown) to feed the print film and out of the print roll.
  • a cavity 677 can be provided in the ink reservoir sections 620 , 621 for the insertion and gluing of an silicon chip integrated circuit type device 53 for the storage of information associated with the print roll 42 .
  • the print roll 42 is designed to be inserted into the Arteam camera device so as to couple with a coupling unit 680 which includes connector pads 681 for providing a connection with the silicon chip 53 .
  • the connector 680 includes end connectors of four connecting with ink supply ports 635 - 637 .
  • the ink supply ports are in turn to connect to ink supply lines eg 682 which are in turn interconnected to printheads supply ports eg. 687 for the flow of ink to print-head 44 in accordance with requirements.
  • the “media” 611 utilised to form the roll can comprise many different materials on which it is designed to print suitable images.
  • opaque rollable plastic material may be utilized
  • transparencies may be used by using transparent plastic sheets
  • metallic printing can take place via utilization of a metallic sheet film.
  • fabrics could be utilised within the printer roll 42 for printing images on fabric, although care must be taken that only fabrics having a suitable stiffness or suitable backing material are utilised.
  • the print media When the print media is plastic, it can be coated with a layer which fixes and absorbs the ink. Further, several types of print media may be used, for example, opaque white matte, opaque white gloss, transparent film, frosted transparent film, lenticular array film for stereoscopic 3D prints, metallised film, film with the embossed optical variable devices such as gratings or holograms, media which is pre-printed on the reverse side, and media which includes a magnetic recording layer.
  • the metallic foil When utilising a metallic foil, the metallic foil can have a polymer base, coated with a thin (several micron) evaporated layer of aluminum or other metal and then coated with a clear protective layer adapted to receive the ink via the ink printer mechanism.
  • the print roll 42 is obviously designed to be inserted inside a camera device so as to provide ink and paper for the printing of images on demand.
  • the ink output ports 635 - 637 meet with corresponding ports within the camera device and the pinch rollers 672 , 673 are operated to allow the supply of paper to the camera device under the control of the camera device.
  • a mounted silicon chip 53 is insert in one end of the print roll 42 .
  • the authentication chip 53 is shown in more detail and includes four communications leads 680 - 683 for communicating details from the chip 53 to the corresponding camera to which it is inserted.
  • the chip can be separately created by means of encasing a small integrated circuit 687 in epoxy and running bonding leads eg. 688 to the external communications leads 680 - 683 .
  • the integrated chip 687 being approximately 400 microns square with a 100 micron scribe boundary. Subsequently, the chip can be glued to an appropriate surface of the cavity of the print roll 42 .
  • FIG. 58 there is illustrated the integrated circuit 687 interconnected to bonding pads 681 , 682 in an exploded view of the arrangement of FIG. 57 .
  • Artcards can, of course, be used in many other environments.
  • ArtCards can be used in both embedded and personal computer (PC) applications, providing a user-friendly interface to large amounts of data or configuration information.
  • PC personal computer
  • ArtCards reader can be attached to a PC.
  • the applications for PCs are many and varied.
  • the simplest application is as a low cost read-only distribution medium. Since ArtCards are printed, they provide an audit trail if used for data distribution within a company.
  • FIG. 59 provides for an efficient distribution of information in the forms of books, newspapers, magazines, technical manuals, etc.
  • the front side of a ArtCards 80 can show an image that includes an artistic effect to be applied to a sampled image.
  • a camera system 81 can be provided which includes a cardreader 82 for reading the programmed data on the back of the card 80 and applying the algorithmic data to a sampled image 83 so as to produce an output image 84 .
  • the camera unit 81 including an on board inkjet printer and sufficient processing means for processing the sampled image data.
  • BizCard is to store company information on business cards. BizCard is a new concept in company information.
  • the front side of a bizCard as illustrated in FIG.
  • each bizcard looks and functions exactly as today's normal business card. It includes a photograph and contact information, with as many varied card styles as there are business cards. However, the back of each bizcard contains a printed array of black and white dots that holds 1-2 megabytes of data about the company. The result is similar to having the storage of a 3.5′′ disk attached to each business card.
  • BizCards can be read by any ArtCards reader such as an attached PC card reader, which can be connected to a standard PC by a USB port. BizCards can also be displayed as documents on specific embedded devices. In the case of a PC, a user simply inserts the bizCard into their reader. The bizcard is then preferably navigated just like a web-site using a regular web browser.
  • each bizcard can be used to electronically verify that the person is in fact who they claim to be and does actually work for the specified company.
  • a bizCard permits simple initiation of secure communications.
  • TourCard is an application of the ArtCards which contains information for tourists and visitors to a city.
  • information can be in the form of:
  • TourCard is a low cost alternative to tourist brochures, guide books and street directories. With a manufacturing cost of just one cent per card, tourCards could be distributed at tourist information centres, hotels and tourist attractions, at a minimum cost, or free if sponsored by advertising. The portability of the bookreader makes it the perfect solution for tourists. TourCards can also be used at information kiosk's, where a computer equipped with the ArtCards reader can decode the information encoded into the tourCard on any web browser.
  • the ArtCards could include a book's contents or a newspaper's contents.
  • An example of such a system is as illustrated in FIG. 59 wherein the ArtCards 70 includes a book title on one surface with the second surface having the encoded contents of the book printed thereon.
  • the card 70 is inserted in the reader 72 which can include a flexible display 73 which allows for the folding up of card reader 72 .
  • the card reader 72 can include display controls 74 which allow for paging forward and back and other controls of the card reader 72 .

Abstract

A data storage device includes a data carrier having at least one planar surface. An array of detectable items is positioned on the planar surface and is detectable with a sensing device. The array is configured to represent a two-dimensional code that defines at least executable instructions and redundancy encoding to impart fault tolerant characteristics to the code. The executable instructions include image processing algorithms.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCES TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • The present application is a Continuation-in-Part of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/962,404 filed on Oct. 13, 2004, which is a Continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/269,998 filed on Oct. 15, 2002 which is a Continuation of 09/112,781 filed Jul. 10, 1998, the entire contents of which are herein incorporated by reference.
    US PATENT/PATENT
    CROSS-REFERENCED APPLICATION (CLAIMING
    AUSTRALIAN PRO- RIGHT OF PRIORITY
    VISIONAL PATENT FROM AUSTRALIAN PRO- DOCKET
    APPLICATION NO. VISIONAL APPLICATION) NO.
    PO7991 09/113,060 ART01
    PO8505 09/113,070 ART02
    PO7988 09/113,073 ART03
    PO9395 6,322,181 ART04
    PO8017 09/112,747 ART06
    PO8014 09/112,776 ART07
    PO8025 09/112,750 ART08
    PO8032 09/112,746 ART09
    PO7999 09/112,743 ART10
    PO7998 09/112,742 ART11
    PO8031 09/112,741 ART12
    PO8030 6,196,541 ART13
    PO7997 6,195,150 ART15
    PO7979 09/113,053 ART16
    PO8015 09/112,738 ART17
    PO7978 09/113,067 ART18
    PO7982 09/113,063 ART19
    PO7989 09/113,069 ART20
    PO8019 09/112,744 ART21
    PO7980 6,356,715 ART22
    PO8018 09/112,777 ART24
    PO7938 09/113,224 ART25
    PO8016 6,366,693 ART26
    PO8024 09/112,805 ART27
    PO7940 09/113,072 ART28
    PO7939 09/112,785 ART29
    PO8501 6,137,500 ART30
    PO8500 09/112,796 ART31
    PO7987 09/113,071 ART32
    PO8022 09/112,824 ART33
    PO8497 09/113,090 ART34
    PO8020 09/112,823 ART38
    PO8023 09/113,222 ART39
    PO8504 09/112,786 ART42
    PO8000 09/113,051 ART43
    PO7977 09/112,782 ART44
    PO7934 09/113,056 ART45
    PO7990 09/113,059 ART46
    PO8499 09/113,091 ART47
    PO8502 09/112,753 ART48
    PO7981 6,317,192 ART50
    PO7986 09/113,057 ART51
    PO7983 09/113,054 ART52
    PO8026 09/112,752 ART53
    PO8027 09/112,759 ART54
    PO8028 09/112,757 ART56
    PO9394 09/112,758 ART57
    PO9396 09/113,107 ART58
    PO9397 6,271,931 ART59
    PO9398 6,353,772 ART60
    PO9399 6,106,147 ART61
    PO9400 09/112,790 ART62
    PO9401 6,304,291 ART63
    PO9402 09/112,788 ART64
    PO9403 6,305,770 ART65
    PO9405 6,289,262 ART66
    PP0959 6,315,200 ART68
    PP1397 6,217,165 ART69
    PP2370 09/112,781 DOT01
    PP2371 09/113,052 DOT02
    PO8003 09/112,834 Fluid01
    PO8005 09/113,103 Fluid02
    PO9404 09/113,101 Fluid03
    PO8066 6,227,652 IJ01
    PO8072 6,213,588 IJ02
    PO8040 6,213,589 IJ03
    PO8071 6,231,163 IJ04
    PO8047 6,247,795 IJ05
    PO8035 09/113,099 IJ06
    PO8044 6,244,691 IJ07
    PO8063 6,257,704 IJ08
    PO8057 09/112,778 IJ09
    PO8056 6,220,694 IJ10
    PO8069 6,257,705 IJ11
    PO8049 6,247,794 IJ12
    PO8036 6,234,610 IJ13
    PO8048 6,247,793 IJ14
    PO8070 6,264,306 IJ15
    PO8067 6,241,342 IJ16
    PO8001 6,247,792 IJ17
    PO8038 6,264,307 IJ18
    PO8033 6,254,220 IJ19
    PO8002 6,234,611 IJ20
    PO8068 09/112,808 IJ21
    PO8062 6,283,582 IJ22
    PO8034 6,239,821 IJ23
    PO8039 09/113,083 IJ24
    PO8041 6,247,796 IJ25
    PO8004 09/113,122 IJ26
    PO8037 09/112,793 IJ27
    PO8043 09/112,794 IJ28
    PO8042 09/113,128 IJ29
    PO8064 09/113,127 IJ30
    PO9389 6,227,653 IJ31
    PO9391 6,234,609 IJ32
    PP0888 6,238,040 IJ33
    PP0891 6,188,415 IJ34
    PP0890 6,227,654 IJ35
    PP0873 6,209,989 IJ36
    PP0993 6,247,791 IJ37
    PP0890 09/112,764 IJ38
    PP1398 6,217,153 IJ39
    PP2592 09/112,767 IJ40
    PP2593 6,243,113 IJ41
    PP3991 6,283,581 IJ42
    PP3987 6,247,790 IJ43
    PP3985 6,260,953 IJ44
    PP3983 6,267,469 IJ45
    PO7935 6,224,780 IJM01
    PO7936 6,235,212 IJM02
    PO7937 6,280,643 IJM03
    PO8061 6,284,147 IJM04
    PO8054 6,214,244 IJM05
    PO8065 6,071,750 IJM06
    PO8055 6,267,905 IJM07
    PO8053 6,251,298 IJM08
    PO8078 6,258,285 IJM09
    PO7933 6,225,138 IJM10
    PO7950 6,241,904 IJM11
    PO7949 09/113,129 IJM12
    PO8060 09/113,124 IJM13
    PO8059 6,231,773 IJM14
    PO8073 6,190,931 IJM15
    PO8076 6,248,249 IJM16
    PO8075 09/113,120 IJM17
    PO8079 6,241,906 IJM18
    PO8050 09/113,116 IJM19
    PO8052 6,241,905 IJM20
    PO7948 09/113,117 IJM21
    PO7951 6,231,772 IJM22
    PO8074 6,274,056 IJM23
    PO7941 09/113,110 IJM24
    PO8077 6,248,248 IJM25
    PO8058 09/113,087 IJM26
    PO8051 09/113,074 IJM27
    PO8045 6,110,754 IJM28
    PO7952 09/113,088 IJM29
    PO8046 09/112,771 IJM30
    PO9390 6,264,849 IJM31
    PO9392 6,254,793 IJM32
    PP0889 6,235,211 IJM35
    PP0887 09/112,801 IJM36
    PP0882 6,264,850 IJM37
    PP0874 6,258,284 IJM38
    PP1396 09/113,098 IJM39
    PP3989 6,228,668 IJM40
    PP2591 6,180,427 IJM41
    PP3990 6,171,875 IJM42
    PP3986 6,267,904 IJM43
    PP3984 6,245,247 IJM44
    PP3982 09/112,835 IJM45
    PP0895 6,231,148 IR01
    PP0870 09/113,106 IR02
    PP0869 09/113,105 IR04
    PP0887 09/113,104 IR05
    PP0885 6,238,033 IR06
    PP0884 09/112,776 IR10
    PP0886 6,238,111 IR12
    PP0871 09/113,086 IR13
    PP0876 09/113,094 IR14
    PP0877 09/112,760 IR16
    PP0878 6,196,739 IR17
    PP0879 09/112,774 IR18
    PP0883 6,270,182 IR19
    PP0880 6,152,619 IR20
    PP0881 09/113,092 IR21
    PO8006 6,087,638 MEMS02
    PO8007 09/113,093 MEMS03
    PO8008 09/113,062 MEMS04
    PO8010 6,041,600 MEMS05
    PO8011 09/113,082 MEMS06
    PO7947 6,067,797 MEMS07
    PO7944 09/113,080 MEMS09
    PO7946 6,044,646 MEMS10
    PO9393 09/113,065 MEMS11
    PP0875 09/113,078 MEMS12
    PP0894 09/113,075 MEMS13
  • STATEMENT REGARDING FEDERALLY SPONSORED RESEARCH OR DEVELOPMENT
  • Not applicable.
  • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to a data distribution system and in particular discloses a data distribution mechanism in the form of Dotcards.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Methods for distribution of data for automatic reading by computer systems are well known. For example, barcodes are often utilised in conjunction with an optical scanner for the distribution of corresponding barcode data. Further, magnetic ink scanning systems have particular application on bank cheques which are automatically scanned and the original data determined from the cheque.
  • There is a general need for a print media scanning system that allows for high volumes of computer data to be stored on simple print media, such as a card, and to simultaneously be able to tolerate a high degree of corruption of the data.
  • For example, the form of distribution can suffer a number of data corruption errors when the surface is scanned by a scanning device. The errors can include:
      • 1. Dead pixel errors which are a result of reading the surface of the card with a linear CCD having a faulty pixel reader for a line thereby producing the same value for all points on the line.
      • 2. The system adopted should tolerate writing errors wherein text is written by the owner of the card on the surface. Such text writing errors are ideally tolerated by any scanning system scanning the card.
      • 3. Various data errors on the surface of the card may rise and any scuffs or blotches should be tolerated by any system determining the information stored on the surface of the card.
      • 4. A certain degree of “play” exists in the insertion of the card into a card reader. This play can comprise a degree of rotation of the card when read by a card reader.
      • 5. Further, the card reader is assumed to be driven past a CCD type scanner device by means of an electric motor. The electric motor may experience a degree of fluctuation which will result in fluctuations in the rate of transmission of the data across the surface of the CCD. These motor fluctuation errors should also be tolerated by the data encoding method on the surface of the card.
      • 6. The scanner of the surface of the card may experience various device fluctuations such that the intensity of individual pixels may vary. Reader intensity variations should also be accounted for in any system or method implemented in the data contained on the surface of the card.
  • Many forms of condensed information storage are well known. For example, in the field of computer devices, it is common to utilize magnetic disc drives which can be of a fixed or portable nature. In respect of portable discs, “Floppy Discs”, “Zip Discs”, and other forms of portable magnetic storage media have achieved a large degree of acceptance on the market place.
  • Another form of portable storage is the compact disc “CD” which utilizes a series of elongated pits along a spiral track which is read by a laser beam device. The utilization of Compact Disks provides for an extremely low cost form of storage. However, the technologies involved are quite complex and the use of rewritable CD type devices is extremely limited.
  • Other forms of storage include magnetic cards, often utilized for credit cards or the like. These cards normally have a magnetic strip on the back for recording information which is of relevance to the card user. Recently, the convenience of magnetic cards has been extended in the form of SmartCard technology which includes incorporation of integrated circuit type devices on to the card. Unfortunately, the cost of such devices is often high and the complexity of the technology utilized can also be significant.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • It is an object of the present invention to provide for an improved form data distribution.
  • According to a first aspect of the invention, there is provided a data storage device which comprises
      • a data carrier having at least one planar surface; and
      • an array of detectable items positioned on the planar surface and detectable with a sensing device, the array being configured to represent a two-dimensional code that defines at least executable instructions and redundancy encoding to impart fault tolerant characteristics to the code, the executable instructions including image processing algorithms.
  • The data carrier may be a card such that the array of detectable items are positioned on a first surface of the card and a visual depiction representing the code may be positioned on a second opposite surface of the card.
  • The card may be of a plastics material that is coated with a hydrophilic dye-fixing layer.
  • The detectable items may be in the form of dots printed on the first surface of the card.
  • The redundancy encoding may include reed-solomon fault correction encoding.
  • The array of dots may be printed with a 1600 dpi resolution.
  • The dots may define at least one target which is detectable by the sensor, the target being associated with at least one data area defined by the dots.
  • The targets may be oriented to permit reading of the card in at least two directions.
  • In accordance with a second aspect of the present invention, there is provided an identifying card comprising: a first surface carrying human readable information relevant to an owner of the identifying card; and a second, opposed surface carrying encoded information encoded in a highly fault tolerant manner, said encoded information being adapted for sensing by a sensing device and decoded by a computational processor, so as to provide information relevant to the owner in a human readable form, the encoded information comprising an array of dots applied to said second surface; wherein the encoded information comprises spatially distributed redundancy encoded data such that the information is encoded in a highly fault tolerant manner and can be decoded by said processor despite a localized obliteration of the encoded information on the card.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • Notwithstanding any other forms which may fall within the scope of the present invention, preferred forms of the invention will now be described, by way of example only, with reference to the accompanying drawings in which:
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an Artcam device constructed in accordance with the preferred embodiment;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic block diagram of the main Artcam electronic components;
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a time line of the process of sampling an Artcard;
  • FIG. 4 illustrates the super sampling process;
  • FIG. 5 illustrates the process of reading a rotated Artcard;
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a flow chart of the steps necessary to decode an Artcard;
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an enlargement of the left hand corner of a single Artcard;
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a single target for detection;
  • FIG. 9 illustrates the method utilised to detect targets;
  • FIG. 10 illustrates the method of calculating the distance between two targets;
  • FIG. 11 illustrates the process of centroid drift;
  • FIG. 12 shows one form of centroid lookup table;
  • FIG. 13 illustrates the centroid updating process;
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a delta processing lookup table utilised in the preferred embodiment;
  • FIG. 15 illustrates the process of unscrambling Artcard data;
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a magnified view of a series of dots;
  • FIG. 17 illustrates the data surface of a dot card;
  • FIG. 18 illustrates schematically the layout of a single datablock;
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a single datablock;
  • FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 illustrate magnified views of portions of the datablock of FIG. 19;
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a single target structure;
  • FIG. 23 illustrates the target structure of a datablock;
  • FIG. 24 illustrates the positional relationship of targets relative to border clocking regions of a data region;
  • FIG. 25 illustrates the orientation columns of a datablock;
  • FIG. 26 illustrates the array of dots of a datablock;
  • FIG. 27 illustrates schematically the structure of data for Reed-Solomon encoding;
  • FIG. 28 illustrates an example Reed-Solomon encoding;
  • FIG. 29 illustrates the Reed-Solomon encoding process;
  • FIG. 30 illustrates the layout of encoded data within a datablock;
  • FIG. 31 illustrates the sampling process in sampling an alternative Artcard;
  • FIG. 32 illustrates, in exaggerated form, an example of sampling a rotated alternative Artcard;
  • FIG. 33 illustrates the scanning process;
  • FIG. 34 illustrates the likely scanning distribution of the scanning process;
  • FIG. 35 illustrates the relationship between probability of symbol errors and Reed-Solomon block errors;
  • FIG. 36 illustrates a flow chart of the decoding process;
  • FIG. 37 illustrates a process utilization diagram of the decoding process;
  • FIG. 38 illustrates the dataflow steps in decoding;
  • FIG. 39 illustrates the reading process in more detail;
  • FIG. 40 illustrates the process of detection of the start of an alternative Artcard in more detail;
  • FIG. 41 illustrates the extraction of bit data process in more detail;
  • FIG. 42 illustrates the segmentation process utilized in the decoding process;
  • FIG. 43 illustrates the decoding process of finding targets in more detail;
  • FIG. 44 illustrates the data structures utilized in locating targets;
  • FIG. 45 illustrates the Lancos 3 function structure;
  • FIG. 46 illustrates an enlarged portion of a datablock illustrating the clockmark and border region;
  • FIG. 47 illustrates the processing steps in decoding a bit image;
  • FIG. 48 illustrates the dataflow steps in decoding a bit image;
  • FIG. 49 illustrates the descrambling process of the preferred embodiment;
  • FIG. 50 illustrates the process of generating an 8 bit dot output;
  • FIG. 51 illustrates a perspective view of the card reader;
  • FIG. 52 illustrates an exploded perspective of a card reader;
  • FIG. 53 illustrates a close up view of the Artcard reader;
  • FIG. 54 illustrates a perspective view of the print roll and print head;
  • FIG. 55 illustrates a first exploded perspective view of the print roll;
  • FIG. 56 illustrates a second exploded perspective view of the print roll;
  • FIG. 57 illustrates the print roll authentication chip FIG. 58 illustrates an enlarged view of the print roll authentication chip;
  • DESCRIPTION OF PREFERRED AND OTHER EMBODIMENTS
  • The digital image processing camera system constructed in accordance with the preferred embodiment is as illustrated in FIG. 1. The camera unit 1 includes means for the insertion of an integral print roll (not shown). The camera unit 1 can include an area image sensor 2 which sensors an image 3 for captured by the camera. Optionally, the second area image sensor can be provided to also image the scene 3 and to optionally provide for the production of stereographic output effects.
  • The camera 1 can include an optional color display 5 for the display of the image being sensed by the sensor 2. When a simple image is being displayed on the display 5, the button 6 can be depressed resulting in the printed image 8 being output by the camera unit 1. A series of cards, herein after known as “Artcards” 9 contain, on one surface encoded information and on the other surface, contain an image distorted by the particular effect produced by the Artcard 9. The Artcard 9 is inserted in an Artcard reader 10 in the side of camera 1 and, upon insertion, results in output image 8 being distorted in the same manner as the distortion appearing on the surface of Artcard 9. Hence, by means of this simple user interface a user wishing to produce a particular effect can insert one of many Artcards 9 into the Artcard reader 10 and utilize button 19 to take a picture of the image 3 resulting in a corresponding distorted output image 8.
  • The camera unit 1 can also include a number of other control button 13, 14 in addition to a simple LCD output display 15 for the display of informative information including the number of printouts left on the internal print roll on the camera unit. Additionally, different output formats can be controlled by CHP switch 17.
  • Turning now to FIG. 2, there is illustrated a schematic view of the internal hardware of the camera unit 1. The internal hardware is based around an Artcam central processor unit (ACP) 31.
  • Artcam Central Processor 31
  • The Artcam central processor 31 provides many functions which form the ‘heart’ of the system. The ACP 31 is preferably implemented as a complex, high speed, CMOS system on-a-chip. Utilising standard cell design with some full custom regions is recommended. Fabrication on a 0.25μ CMOS process will provide the density and speed required, along with a reasonably small die area.
  • The functions provided by the ACP 31 include:
      • 1. Control and digitization of the area image sensor 2. A 3D stereoscopic version of the ACP requires two area image sensor interfaces with a second optional image sensor 4 being provided for stereoscopic effects.
      • 2. Area image sensor compensation, reformatting, and image enhancement.
      • 3. Memory interface and management to a memory store 33.
      • 4. Interface, control, and analog to digital conversion of an Artcard reader linear image sensor 34 which is provided for the reading of data from the Artcards 9.
      • 5. Extraction of the raw Artcard data from the digitized and encoded Artcard image.
      • 6. Reed-Solomon error detection and correction of the Artcard encoded data. The encoded surface of the Artcard 9 includes information on how to process an image to produce the effects displayed on the image distorted surface of the Artcard 9. This information is in the form of a script, hereinafter known as a “Vark script”. The Vark script is utilised by an interpreter running within the ACP 31 to produce the desired effect.
      • 7. Interpretation of the Vark script on the Artcard 9.
      • 8. Performing image processing operations as specified by the Vark script.
      • 9. Controlling various motors for the paper transport 36, zoom lens 38, autofocus 39 and Artcard driver 37.
      • 10. Controlling a guillotine actuator 40 for the operation of a guillotine 41 for the cutting of photographs 8 from print roll 42.
      • 11. Half-toning of the image data for printing.
      • 12. Providing the print data to a print-head 44 at the appropriate times.
      • 13. Controlling the print head 44.
      • 14. Controlling the ink pressure feed to print-head 44.
      • 15. Controlling optional flash unit 56.
      • 16. Reading and acting on various sensors in the camera, including camera orientation sensor 46, autofocus 47 and Artcard insertion sensor 49.
      • 17. Reading and acting on the user interface buttons 6, 13, 14.
      • 18. Controlling the status display 15.
      • 19. Providing viewfinder and preview images to the color display 5.
      • 20. Control of the system power consumption, including the ACP power consumption via power management circuit 51.
      • 21. Providing external communications 52 to general purpose computers (using part USB).
      • 22. Reading and storing information in a printing roll authentication chip 53.
      • 23. Reading and storing information in a camera authentication chip 54.
      • 24. Communicating with an optional mini-keyboard 57 for text modification.
        Quartz Crystal 58
  • A quartz crystal 58 is used as a frequency reference for the system clock. As the system clock is very high, the ACP 31 includes a phase locked loop clock circuit to increase the frequency derived from the crystal 58.
  • Artcard 9
  • The Artcard 9 is a program storage medium for the Artcam unit. As noted previously, the programs are in the form of Vark scripts. Vark is a powerful image processing language especially developed for the Artcam unit. Each Artcard 9 contains one Vark script, and thereby defines one image processing style.
  • Preferably, the VARK language is highly image processing specific. By being highly image processing specific, the amount of storage required to store the details on the card are substantially reduced. Further, the ease with which new programs can be created, including enhanced effects, is also substantially increased. Preferably, the language includes facilities for handling many image processing functions including image warping via a warp map, convolution, color lookup tables, posterizing an image, adding noise to an image, image enhancement filters, painting algorithms, brush jittering and manipulation edge detection filters, tiling, illumination via light sources, bump maps, text, face detection and object detection attributes, fonts, including three dimensional fonts, and arbitrary complexity pre-rendered icons. Further details of the operation of the Vark language interpreter are contained hereinafter.
  • Hence, by utilizing the language constructs as defined by the created language, new affects on arbitrary images can be created and constructed for inexpensive storage on Artcard and subsequent distribution to camera owners. Further, on one surface of the card can be provided an example illustrating the effect that a particular VARK script, stored on the other surface of the card, will have on an arbitrary captured image.
  • By utilizing such a system, camera technology can be distributed without a great fear of obsolescence in that, provided a VARK interpreter is incorporated in the camera device, a device independent scenario is provided whereby the underlying technology can be completely varied over time. Further, the VARK scripts can be updated as new filters are created and distributed in an inexpensive manner, such as via simple cards for card reading.
  • The Artcard 9 is a piece of thin white plastic with the same format as a credit card (86 mm long by 54 mm wide). The Artcard is printed on both sides using a high resolution ink jet printer. The inkjet printer technology is assumed to be the same as that used in the Artcam, with 1600 dpi (63 dpmm) resolution. A major feature of the Artcard 9 is low manufacturing cost. Artcards can be manufactured at high speeds as a wide web of plastic film. The plastic web is coated on both sides with a hydrophilic dye fixing layer. The web is printed simultaneously on both sides using a ‘pagewidth’ color ink jet printer. The web is then cut and punched into individual cards. On one face of the card is printed a human readable representation of the effect the Artcard 9 will have on the sensed image. This can be simply a standard image which has been processed using the Vark script stored on the back face of the card.
  • On the back face of the card is printed an array of dots which can be decoded into the Vark script that defines the image processing sequence. The print area is 80 mm×50 mm, giving a total of 15,876,000 dots. This array of dots could represent at least 1.89 Mbytes of data. To achieve high reliability, extensive error detection and correction is incorporated in the array of dots. This allows a substantial portion of the card to be defaced, worn, creased, or dirty with no effect on data integrity. The data coding used is Reed-Solomon coding, with half of the data devoted to error correction. This allows the storage of 967 Kbytes of error corrected data on each Artcard 9.
  • Linear Image Sensor 34
  • The Artcard linear sensor 34 converts the aforementioned Artcard data image to electrical signals. As with the area image sensor 2, 4, the linear image sensor can be fabricated using either CCD or APS CMOS technology. The active length of the image sensor 34 is 50 mm, equal to the width of the data array on the Artcard 9. To satisfy Nyquist's sampling theorem, the resolution of the linear image sensor 34 must be at least twice the highest spatial frequency of the Artcard optical image reaching the image sensor. In practice, data detection is easier if the image sensor resolution is substantially above this. A resolution of 4800 dpi (189 dpmm) is chosen, giving a total of 9,450 pixels. This resolution requires a pixel sensor pitch of 5.3 μm. This can readily be achieved by using four staggered rows of 20 μm pixel sensors.
  • The linear image sensor is mounted in a special package which includes a LED 65 to illuminate the Artcard 9 via a light-pipe (not shown).
  • The Artcard reader light-pipe can be a molded light-pipe which has several function:
      • 1. It diffuses the light from the LED over the width of the card using total internal reflection facets.
      • 2. It focuses the light onto a 16 μm wide strip of the Artcard 9 using an integrated cylindrical lens.
      • 3. It focuses light reflected from the Artcard onto the linear image sensor pixels using a molded array of microlenses.
  • The operation of the Artcard reader is explained further hereinafter.
  • Artcard Reader Motor 37
  • The Artcard reader motor propels the Artcard past the linear image sensor 34 at a relatively constant rate. As it may not be cost effective to include extreme precision mechanical components in the Artcard reader, the motor 37 is a standard miniature motor geared down to an appropriate speed to drive a pair of rollers which move the Artcard 9. The speed variations, rumble, and other vibrations will affect the raw image data as circuitry within the APC 31 includes extensive compensation for these effects to reliably read the Artcard data.
  • The motor 37 is driven in reverse when the Artcard is to be ejected.
  • Artcard Motor Driver 61
  • The Artcard motor driver 61 is a small circuit which amplifies the digital motor control signals from the APC 31 to levels suitable for driving the motor 37.
  • Card Insertion Sensor 49
  • The card insertion sensor 49 is an optical sensor which detects the presence of a card as it is being inserted in the card reader 34. Upon a signal from this sensor 49, the APC 31 initiates the card reading process, including the activation of the Artcard reader motor 37.
  • Card Eject Button 16
  • A card eject button 16 (FIG. 1) is used by the user to eject the current Artcard, so that another Artcard can be inserted. The APC 31 detects the pressing of the button, and reverses the Artcard reader motor 37 to eject the card.
  • Card Status Indicator 66
  • A card status indicator 66 is provided to signal the user as to the status of the Artcard reading process. This can be a standard bi-color (red/green) LED. When the card is successfully read, and data integrity has been verified, the LED lights up green continually. If the card is faulty, then the LED lights up red.
  • If the camera is powered from a 1.5 V instead of 3V battery, then the power supply voltage is less than the forward voltage drop of the greed LED, and the LED will not light. In this case, red LEDs can be used, or the LED can be powered from a voltage pump which also powers other circuits in the Artcam which require higher voltage.
  • 64 Mbit DRAM 33
  • To perform the wide variety of image processing effects, the camera utilizes 8 Mbytes of memory 33. This can be provided by a single 64 Mbit memory chip. Of course, with changing memory technology increased Dram storage sizes may be substituted.
  • High speed access to the memory chip is required. This can be achieved by using a Rambus DRAM (burst access rate of 500 Mbytes per second) or chips using the new open standards such as double data rate (DDR) SDRAM or Synclink DRAM.
  • Inserting an Artcard
  • When a user inserts an Artcard 9, the Artcard Sensor 49 detects it notifying the ACP72. This results in the software inserting an ‘Artcard Inserted’ event into the event queue. When the event is processed several things occur:
  • The current Artcard is marked as invalid (as opposed to ‘none’).
  • The Print Image is marked as invalid.
  • The Artcard motor 37 is started up to load the Artcard.
  • The Artcard Interface 87 is instructed to read the Artcard.
  • The Artcard Interface 87 accepts signals from the Artcard scanner linear CCD 34, detects the bit pattern printed on the card, and corrects errors in the detected bit pattern, producing a valid Artcard data block in DRAM.
  • Reading Data from the Artcard CCD—General Considerations
  • As illustrated in FIG. 3, the Data Card reading process has 4 phases operated while the pixel data is read from the card. The phases are as follows:
      • Phase 1. Detect data area on Artcard
      • Phase 2. Detect bit pattern from Artcard based on CCD pixels, and write as bytes.
      • Phase 3. Descramble and XOR the byte-pattern
      • Phase 4. Decode data (Reed-Solomon decode)
  • As illustrated in FIG. 4, the Artcard 9 must be sampled at least at double the printed resolution to satisfy Nyquist's Theorem. In practice it is better to sample at a higher rate than this. Preferably, the pixels are sampled 230 at 3 times the resolution of a printed dot in each dimension, requiring 9 pixels to define a single dot. Thus if the resolution of the Artcard 9 is 1600 dpi, and the resolution of the sensor 34 is 4800 dpi, then using a 50 mm CCD image sensor results in 9450 pixels per column. Therefore if we require 2 MB of dot data (at 9 pixels per dot) then this requires 2 MB*8*9/9450=15,978 columns=approximately 16,000 columns. Of course if a dot is not exactly aligned with the sampling CCD the worst and most likely case is that a dot will be sensed over a 16 pixel area (4×4) 231.
  • An Artcard 9 may be slightly warped due to heat damage, slightly rotated (up to, say 0 degree) due to differences in insertion into an Artcard reader, and can have slight differences in true data rate due to fluctuations in the speed of the reader motor 37. These changes will cause columns of data from the card not to be read as corresponding columns of pixel data. As illustrated in FIG. 5, a 1 degree rotation in the Artcard 9 can cause the pixels from a column on the card to be read as pixels across 166 columns:
  • Finally, the Artcard 9 should be read in a reasonable amount of time with respect to the human operator. The data on the Artcard covers most of the Artcard surface, so timing concerns can be limited to the Artcard data itself. A reading time of 1.5 seconds is adequate for Artcard reading.
  • The Artcard should be loaded in 1.5 seconds. Therefore all 16,000 columns of pixel data must be read from the CCD 34 in 1.5 second, i.e. 10,667 columns per second. Therefore the time available to read one column is {fraction (1/10667)} seconds, or 93,747 ns. Pixel data can be written to the DRAM one column at a time, completely independently from any processes that are reading the pixel data.
  • The time to write one column of data (9450/2 bytes since the reading can be 4 bits per pixel giving 2×4 bit pixels per byte) to DRAM is reduced by using 8 cache lines. If 4 lines were written out at one time, the 4 banks can be written to independently, and thus overlap latency reduced. Thus the 4725 bytes can be written in 11,840 ns (4725/128*320 ns). Thus the time taken to write a given column's data to DRAM uses just under 13% of the available bandwidth.
  • Decoding an Artcard
  • A simple look at the data sizes shows the impossibility of fitting the process into the 8 MB of memory 33 if the entire Artcard pixel data (140 MB if each bit is read as a 3×3 array) as read by the linear CCD 34 is kept. For this reason, the reading of the linear CCD, decoding of the bitmap, and the un-bitmap process should take place in real-time (while the Artcard 9 is traveling past the linear CCD 34), and these processes must effectively work without having entire data stores available.
  • When an Artcard 9 is inserted, the old stored Print Image and any expanded Photo Image becomes invalid. The new Artcard 9 can contain directions for creating a new image based on the currently captured Photo Image. The old Print Image is invalid, and the area holding expanded Photo Image data and image pyramid is invalid, leaving more than 5 MB that can be used as scratch memory during the read process. Strictly speaking, the 1 MB area where the Artcard raw data is to be written can also be used as scratch data during the Artcard read process as long as by the time the final Reed-Solomon decode is to occur, that 1 MB area is free again. The reading process described here does not make use of the extra 1 MB area (except as a final destination for the data).
  • It should also be noted that the unscrambling process requires two sets of 2 MB areas of memory since unscrambling cannot occur in place. Fortunately the 5 MB scratch area contains enough space for this process.
  • Turning now to FIG. 6, there is shown a flowchart 220 of the steps necessary to decode the Artcard data. These steps include reading in the Artcard 221, decoding the read data to produce corresponding encoded XORed scrambled bitmap data 223. Next a checkerboard XOR is applied to the data to produces encoded scrambled data 224. This data is then unscrambled 227 to produce data 225 before this data is subjected to Reed-Solomon decoding to produce the original raw data 226. Alternatively, unscrambling and XOR process can take place together, not requiring a separate pass of the data. Each of the above steps is discussed in further detail hereinafter. As noted previously with reference to FIG. 6, the Artcard Interface, therefore, has 4 phases, the first 2 of which are time-critical, and must take place while pixel data is being read from the CCD:
      • Phase 1. Detect data area on Artcard
      • Phase 2. Detect bit pattern from Artcard based on CCD pixels, and write as bytes.
      • Phase 3. Descramble and XOR the byte-pattern
      • Phase 4. Decode data (Reed-Solomon decode)
  • The four phases are described in more detail as follows:
  • Phase 1. As the Artcard 9 moves past the CCD 34 the AI must detect the start of the data area by robustly detecting special targets on the Artcard to the left of the data area. If these cannot be detected, the card is marked as invalid. The detection must occur in real-time, while the Artcard 9 is moving past the CCD 34.
  • If necessary, rotation invariance can be provided. In this case, the targets are repeated on the right side of the Artcard, but relative to the bottom right corner instead of the top corner. In this way the targets end up in the correct orientation if the card is inserted the “wrong” way. Phase 3 below can be altered to detect the orientation of the data, and account for the potential rotation.
  • Phase 2. Once the data area has been determined, the main read process begins, placing pixel data from the CCD into an ‘Artcard data window’, detecting bits from this window, assembling the detected bits into bytes, and constructing a byte-image in DRAM. This must all be done while the Artcard is moving past the CCD.
  • Phase 3. Once all the pixels have been read from the Artcard data area, the Artcard motor 37 can be stopped, and the byte image descrambled and XORed. Although not requiring real-time performance, the process should be fast enough not to annoy the human operator. The process must take 2 MB of scrambled bit-image and write the unscrambled/XORed bit-image to a separate 2 MB image.
  • Phase 4. The final phase in the Artcard read process is the Reed-Solomon decoding process, where the 2 MB bit-image is decoded into a 1 MB valid Artcard data area. Again, while not requiring real-time performance it is still necessary to decode quickly with regard to the human operator. If the decode process is valid, the card is marked as valid. If the decode failed, any duplicates of data in the bit-image are attempted to be decoded, a process that is repeated until success or until there are no more duplicate images of the data in the bit image.
  • The four phase process described requires 4.5 MB of DRAM. 2 MB is reserved for Phase 2 output, and 0.5 MB is reserved for scratch data during phases 1 and 2. The remaining 2 MB of space can hold over 440 columns at 4725 byes per column. In practice, the pixel data being read is a few columns ahead of the phase 1 algorithm, and in the worst case, about 180 columns behind phase 2, comfortably inside the 440 column limit.
  • A description of the actual operation of each phase will now be provided in greater detail.
  • Phase 1—Detect Data Area on Artcard
  • This phase is concerned with robustly detecting the left-hand side of the data area on the Artcard 9. Accurate detection of the data area is achieved by accurate detection of special targets printed on the left side of the card. These targets are especially designed to be easy to detect even if rotated up to 1 degree.
  • Turning to FIG. 7, there is shown an enlargement of the left hand side of an Artcard 9. The side of the card is divided into 16 bands, 239 with a target eg. 241 located at the center of each band. The bands are logical in that there is no line drawn to separate bands. Turning to FIG. 8, there is shown a single target 241. The target 241, is a printed black square containing a single white dot. The idea is to detect firstly as many targets 241 as possible, and then to join at least 8 of the detected white-dot locations into a single logical straight line. If this can be done, the start of the data area 243 is a fixed distance from this logical line. If it cannot be done, then the card is rejected as invalid.
  • As shown in FIG. 7, the height of the card 9 is 3150 dots. A target (Target0) 241 is placed a fixed distance of 24 dots away from the top left corner 244 of the data area so that it falls well within the first of 16 equal sized regions 239 of 192 dots (576 pixels) with no target in the final pixel region of the card. The target 241 must be big enough to be easy to detect, yet be small enough not to go outside the height of the region if the card is rotated 0 degree. A suitable size for the target is a 31×31 dot (93×93 sensed pixels) black square 241 with the white dot 242.
  • At the worst rotation of 0 degree, a 0 column shift occurs every 57 pixels. Therefore in a 590 pixel sized band, we cannot place any part of our symbol in the top or bottom 12 pixels or so of the band or they could be detected in the wrong band at CCD read time if the card is worst case rotated.
  • Therefore, if the black part of the rectangle is 57 pixels high (19 dots) we can be sure that at least 9.5 black pixels will be read in the same column by the CCD (worst case is half the pixels are in one column and half in the next). To be sure of reading at least 10 black dots in the same column, we must have a height of 20 dots. To give room for erroneous detection on the edge of the start of the black dots, we increase the number of dots to 31, giving us 15 on either side of the white dot at the target's local coordinate (15, 15). 31 dots is 91 pixels, which at most suffers a 3 pixel shift in column, easily within the 576 pixel band.
  • Thus each target is a block of 31×31 dots (93×93 pixels) each with the composition:
      • 15 columns of 31 black dots each (45 pixel width columns of 93 pixels).
      • 1 column of 15 black dots (45 pixels) followed by 1 white dot (3 pixels) and then a further 15 black dots (45 pixels)
      • 15 columns of 31 black dots each (45 pixel width columns of 93 pixels).
        Detect Targets
  • Targets are detected by reading columns of pixels, one column at a time rather than by detecting dots. It is necessary to look within a given band for a number of columns consisting of large numbers of contiguous black pixels to build up the left side of a target. Next, it is expected to see a white region in the center of further black columns, and finally the black columns to the left of the target center.
  • Eight cache lines are required for good cache performance on the reading of the pixels. Each logical read fills 4 cache lines via 4 sub-reads while the other 4 cache-lines are being used. This effectively uses up 13% of the available DRAM bandwidth.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 9, the detection mechanism FIFO for detecting the targets uses a filter 245, run-length encoder 246, and a FIFO 247 that requires special wiring of the top 3 elements (S1, S2, and S3) for random access.
  • The columns of input pixels are processed one at a time until either all the targets are found, or until a specified number of columns have been processed. To process a column, the pixels are read from DRAM, passed through a filter 245 to detect a 0 or 1, and then run length encoded 246. The bit value and the number of contiguous bits of the same value are placed in FIFO 247. Each entry of the FIFO 249 is in 8 bits, 7 bits 250 to hold the run-length, and 1 bit 249 to hold the value of the bit detected.
  • The run-length encoder 246 only encodes contiguous pixels within a 576 pixel (192 dot) region.
  • The top 3 elements in the FIFO 247 can be accessed 252 in any random order. The run lengths (in pixels) of these entries are filtered into 3 values: short, medium, and long in accordance with the following table:
    Short Used to detect white dot. RunLength < 16
    Medium Used to detect runs of 16 <= RunLength < 48
    black above or below the
    white dot in the center of
    the target.
    Long Used to detect run lengths RunLength >= 48
    of black to the left and
    right of the center dot in
    the target.
  • Looking at the top three entries in the FIFO 247 there are 3 specific cases of interest:
    Case 1 S1 = white long We have detected a black column
    S2 = black long of the target to the left of or
    S3 = white to the right of the white
    medium/long center dot.
    Case 2 S1 = white long If we've been processing a
    S2 = black medium series of columns of Case 1s,
    S3 = white short then we have probably detected
    Previous 8 columns the white dot in this column.
    were Case 1 We know that the next entry
    will be black (or it would have
    been included in the white S3
    entry), but the number of black
    pixels is in question. Need to
    verify by checking after the
    next FIFO advance (see Case 3).
    Case 3 Prev = Case 2 We have detected part of the
    S3 = black med white dot. We expect around 3
    of these, and then some more
    columns of Case 1.
  • Preferably, the following information per region band is kept:
    TargetDetected 1 bit
    BlackDetectCount
    4 bits
    WhiteDetectCount
    3 bits
    PrevColumnStartPixel
    15 bits
    TargetColumn ordinate 16 bits (15:1)
    TargetRow ordinate 16 bits (15:1)
    TOTAL 7 bytes
    (rounded to 8 bytes
    for easy addressing)
  • Given a total of 7 bytes. It makes address generation easier if the total is assumed to be 8 bytes. Thus 16 entries requires 16*8=128 bytes, which fits in 4 cache lines. The address range should be inside the scratch 0.5 MB DRAM area since other phases make use of the remaining 4 MB data area.
  • When beginning to process a given pixel column, the register value S2StartPixel 254 is reset to 0. As entries in the FIFO advance from S2 to S1, they are also added 255 to the existing S2StartPixel value, giving the exact pixel position of the run currently defined in S2. Looking at each of the 3 cases of interest in the FIFO, S2StartPixel can be used to determine the start of the black area of a target (Cases 1 and 2), and also the start of the white dot in the center of the target (Case 3). An algorithm for processing columns can be as follows:
    1 TargetDetected[0-15] := 0
    BlackDetectCount[0-15] := 0
    WhiteDetectCount[0-15] := 0
    TargetRow[0-15] := 0
    TargetColumn[0-15] := 0
    PrevColStartPixel[0-15] := 0
    CurrentColumn := 0
    2 Do ProcessColumn
    3 CurrentColumn++
    4 If (CurrentColumn <= LastValidColumn)
    Goto 2
  • The steps involved in the processing a column (Process Column) are as follows:
    1 S2StartPixel := 0
    FIFO := 0
    BlackDetectCount := 0
    WhiteDetectCount := 0
    ThisColumnDetected := FALSE
    PrevCaseWasCase2 := FALSE
    2 If (! TargetDetected[Target]) & (! ColumnDetected[Target])
    ProcessCases
    EndIf
    3 PrevCaseWasCase2 := Case=2
    4 Advance FIFO
  • The processing for each of the 3 (Process Cases) cases is as follows:
  • Case 1:
    BlackDetectCount[target] < 8 {square root} := ABS(S2StartPixel − PrevColStartPixel[Target])
    OR If (0<={square root} < 2)
    WhiteDetectCount[Target] = 0 BlackDetectCount[Target]++ (max value =8)
    Else
    BlackDetectCount[Target] := 1
    WhiteDetectCount[Target] := 0
    EndIf
    PrevColStartPixel[Target] := S2StartPixel
    ColumnDetected[Target] := TRUE
    BitDetected = 1
    BlackDetectCount[target] >= 8 PrevColStartPixel[Target] := S2StartPixel
    WhiteDetectCount[Target] != 0 ColumnDetected[Target] := TRUE
    BitDetected = 1
    TargetDetected[Target] := TRUE
    TargetColumn[Target] := CurrentColumn − 8 −
    (WhiteDetectCount[Target]/2)

    Case 2:
  • No special processing is recorded except for setting the ‘PrevCaseWasCase2’ flag for identifying Case 3 (see Step 3 of processing a column described above).
  • Case 3:
    PrevCaseWasCase2 = TRUE If (WhiteDetectCount[Target] < 2)
    BlackDetectCount[Target] >= 8 TargetRow[Target] =
    WhiteDetectCount=1 S2StartPixel + (S2RunLength/2)
    EndIf
    {square root} := ABS(S2StartPixel −
    PrevColStartPixel[Target])
    If(0<={square root} < 2)
    WhiteDetectCount[Target]++
    Else
    WhiteDetectCount[Target] := 1
    EndIf
    PrevColStartPixel[Target] :=
    S2StartPixel
    ThisColumnDetected := TRUE
    BitDetected = 0
  • At the end of processing a given column, a comparison is made of the current column to the maximum number of columns for target detection. If the number of columns allowed has been exceeded, then it is necessary to check how many targets have been found. If fewer than 8 have been found, the card is considered invalid.
  • Process Targets
  • After the targets have been detected, they should be processed. All the targets may be available or merely some of them. Some targets may also have been erroneously detected.
  • This phase of processing is to determine a mathematical line that passes through the center of as many targets as possible. The more targets that the line passes through, the more confident the target position has been found. The limit is set to be 8 targets. If a line passes through at least 8 targets, then it is taken to be the right one.
  • It is all right to take a brute-force but straightforward approach since there is the time to do so (see below), and lowering complexity makes testing easier. It is necessary to determine the line between targets 0 and 1 (if both targets are considered valid) and then determine how many targets fall on this line. Then we determine the line between targets 0 and 2, and repeat the process. Eventually we do the same for the line between targets 1 and 2, 1 and 3 etc. and finally for the line between targets 14 and 15. Assuming all the targets have been found, we need to perform 15+14+13+ . . . =90 sets of calculations (with each set of calculations requiring 16 tests=1440 actual calculations), and choose the line which has the maximum number of targets found along the line. The algorithm for target location can be as follows:
    TargetA := 0
    MaxFound := 0
    BestLine := 0
    While (TargetA < 15)
    If (TargetA is Valid)
    TargetB:= TargetA + 1
    While (TargetB<= 15)
    If (TargetB is valid)
    CurrentLine := line between TargetA and TargetB
    TargetC := 0;
    While (TargetC <= 15)
    If (TargetC valid AND TargetC on line AB)
    TargetsHit++
    EndIf
    If (TargetsHit > MaxFound)
    MaxFound := TargetsHit
    BestLine := CurrentLine
    EndIf
    TargetC++
    EndWhile
    EndIf
    TargetB ++
    EndWhile
    EndIf
    TargetA++
    EndWhile
    If (MaxFound < 8)
    Card is Invalid
    Else
    Store expected centroids for rows based on BestLine
    EndIf
  • As illustrated in FIG. 3, in the algorithm above, to determine a CurrentLine 260 from Target A 261 and target B, it is necessary to calculate Δrow (264) & Δcolumn (263) between targets 261, 262, and the location of Target A. It is then possible to move from Target 0 to Target 1 etc. by adding Δrow and Δcolumn. The found (if actually found) location of target N can be compared to the calculated expected position of Target N on the line, and if it falls within the tolerance, then Target N is determined to be on the line.
  • To calculate Δrow & Δcolumn:
    Δrow=(rowTargetA−rowTargetB)/(B−A)
    Δcolumn=(columnTargetA−columnTargetB)/(B−A)
    Then we calculate the position of Target0:
    row=row/TargetA−(A*Δrow)
    column=columnTargetA−(A*Δcolumn)
  • And compare (row, column) against the actual rowTarget0 and columnTargett0. To move from one expected target to the next (e.g. from Target0 to Target1), we simply add Δrow and Δcolumn to row and column respectively. To check if each target is on the line, we must calculate the expected position of Target0, and then perform one add and one comparison for each target ordinate.
  • At the end of comparing all 16 targets against a maximum of 90 lines, the result is the best line through the valid targets. If that line passes through at least 8 targets (i.e. MaxFound>=8), it can be said that enough targets have been found to form a line, and thus the card can be processed. If the best line passes through fewer than 8, then the card is considered invalid.
  • The resulting algorithm takes 180 divides to calculate Δrow and Δcolumn, 180 multiply/adds to calculate target0 position, and then 2880 adds/comparisons. The time we have to perform this processing is the time taken to read 36 columns of pixel data=3,374,892 ns. Not even accounting for the fact that an add takes less time than a divide, it is necessary to perform 3240 mathematical operations in 3,374,892 ns. That gives approximately 1040 ns per operation, or 104 cycles. The CPU can therefore safely perform the entire processing of targets, reducing complexity of design.
  • Update Centroids Based on Data Edge Border and Clockmarks
  • Step 0: Locate the Data Area
  • From Target 0 (241 of FIG. 7) it is a predetermined fixed distance in rows and columns to the top left border 244 of the data area, and then a further 1 dot column to the vertical clock marks 276. So we use TargetA, Δrow and Δcolumn found in the previous stage (Δrow and Δcolumn refer to distances between targets) to calculate the centroid or expected location for Target0 as described previously.
  • Since the fixed pixel offset from Target0 to the data area is related to the distance between targets (192 dots between targets, and 24 dots between Target0 and the data area 243), simply add Δrow/8 to Target0's centroid column coordinate (aspect ratio of dots is 1:1). Thus the top co-ordinate can be defined as:
    (columnDotColumnTop=columnTarget0+(Δrow/8)
    (rowDotColumnTop=rowTarget0+(Δcolumn/8)
  • Next Δrow and Δcolumn are updated to give the number of pixels between dots in a single column (instead of between targets) by dividing them by the number of dots between targets:
    Δrow=Δrow/192
    Δcolumn=Δcolumn/192
  • We also set the currentColumn register (see Phase 2) to be −1 so that after step 2, when phase 2 begins, the currentColumn register will increment from −1 to 0.
  • Step 1: Write Out the Initial Centroid Deltas (A) and Bit History
  • This simply involves writing setup information required for Phase 2.
  • This can be achieved by writing 0s to all the Δrow and Δcolumn entries for each row, and a bit history. The bit history is actually an expected bit history since it is known that to the left of the clock mark column 276 is a border column 277, and before that, a white area. The bit history therefore is 011, 010, 011, 010 etc.
  • Step 2: Update the Centroids Based on Actual Pixels Read.
  • The bit history is set up in Step 1 according to the expected clock marks and data border. The actual centroids for each dot row can now be more accurately set (they were initially 0) by comparing the expected data against the actual pixel values. The centroid updating mechanism is achieved by simply performing step 3 of Phase 2.
  • Phase 2—Detect Bit Pattern from Artcard Based on Pixels Read, and Write as Bytes.
  • Since a dot from the Artcard 9 requires a minimum of 9 sensed pixels over 3 columns to be represented, there is little point in performing dot detection calculations every sensed pixel column. It is better to average the time required for processing over the average dot occurrence, and thus make the most of the available processing time. This allows processing of a column of dots from an Artcard 9 in the time it takes to read 3 columns of data from the Artcard. Although the most likely case is that it takes 4 columns to represent a dot, the 4th column will be the last column of one dot and the first column of a next dot. Processing should therefore be limited to only 3 columns.
  • As the pixels from the CCD are written to the DRAM in 13% of the time available, 83% of the time is available for processing of 1 column of dots i.e. 83% of (93,747*3)=83% of 281,241 ns=233,430 ns.
  • In the available time, it is necessary to detect 3150 dots, and write their bit values into the raw data area of memory. The processing therefore requires the following steps:
  • For each column of dots on the Artcard:
      • Step 0: Advance to the next dot column
      • Step 1: Detect the top and bottom of an Artcard dot column (check clock marks)
      • Step 2: Process the dot column, detecting bits and storing them appropriately
      • Step 3: Update the centroids
  • Since we are processing the Artcard's logical dot columns, and these may shift over 165 pixels, the worst case is that we cannot process the first column until at least 165 columns have been read into DRAM. Phase 2 would therefore finish the same amount of time after the read process had terminated. The worst case time is: 165*93,747 ns=15,468,255 ns or 0.015 seconds.
  • Step 0: Advance to the Next Dot Column
  • In order to advance to the next column of dots we add Δrow and Δcolumn to the dotColumnTop to give us the centroid of the dot at the top of the column. The first time we do this, we are currently at the clock marks column 276 to the left of the bit image data area, and so we advance to the first column of data. Since Δrow and Δcolumn refer to distance between dots within a column, to move between dot columns it is necessary to add Δrow to colunndotColumnTop and Δcolumn to rowdotColumnTop.
  • To keep track of what column number is being processed, the column number is recorded in a register called CurrentColumn. Every time the sensor advances to the next dot column it is necessary to increment the CurrentColumn register. The first time it is incremented, it is incremented from −1 to 0 (see Step 0 Phase 1). The CurrentColumn register determines when to terminate the read process (when reaching maxColumns), and also is used to advance the DataOut Pointer to the next column of byte information once all 8 bits have been written to the byte (once every 8 dot columns). The lower 3 bits determine what bit we're up to within the current byte. It will be the same bit being written for the whole column.
  • Step 1: Detect the Top and Bottom of an Artcard Dot Column.
  • In order to process a dot column from an Artcard, it is necessary to detect the top and bottom of a column. The column should form a straight line between the top and bottom of the column (except for local warping etc.). Initially dotColumnTop points to the clock mark column 276. We simply toggle the expected value, write it out into the bit history, and move on to step 2, whose first task will be to add the Δrow and Δcolumn values to dotColumnTop to arrive at the first data dot of the column.
  • Step 2: Process an Artcard's Dot Column
  • Given the centroids of the top and bottom of a column in pixel coordinates the column should form a straight line between them, with possible minor variances due to warping etc.
  • Assuming the processing is to start at the top of a column (at the top centroid coordinate) and move down to the bottom of the column, subsequent expected dot centroids are given as:
    rownext=row+Δrow
    columnnext=column+Δcolumn
  • This gives us the address of the expected centroid for the next dot of the column. However to account for local warping and error we add another Δrow and Δcolumn based on the last time we found the dot in a given row. In this way we can account for small drifts that accumulate into a maximum drift of some percentage from the straight line joining the top of the column to the bottom.
  • We therefore keep 2 values for each row, but store them in separate tables since the row history is used in step 3 of this phase.
      • Δrow and Δcolumn (2 @ 4 bits each=1 byte)
      • row history (3 bits per row, 2 rows are stored per byte)
  • For each row we need to read a Δrow and Δcolumn to determine the change to the centroid. The read process takes 5% of the bandwidth and 2 cache lines:
    76*(3150/32)+2*3150=13,824 ns=5% of bandwidth
  • Once the centroid has been determined, the pixels around the centroid need to be examined to detect the status of the dot and hence the value of the bit. In the worst case a dot covers a 4×4 pixel area. However, thanks to the fact that we are sampling at 3 times the resolution of the dot, the number of pixels required to detect the status of the dot and hence the bit value is much less than this. We only require access to 3 columns of pixel columns at any one time.
  • In the worst case of pixel drift due to a 1% rotation, centroids will shift 1 column every 57 pixel rows, but since a dot is 3 pixels in diameter, a given column will be valid for 171 pixel rows (3*57). As a byte contains 2 pixels, the number of bytes valid in each buffered read (4 cache lines) will be a worst case of 86 (out of 128 read).
  • Once the bit has been detected it must be written out to DRAM. We store the bits from 8 columns as a set of contiguous bytes to minimize DRAM delay. Since all the bits from a given dot column will correspond to the next bit position in a data byte, we can read the old value for the byte, shift and OR in the new bit, and write the byte back.
  • The read/shift&OR/write process requires 2 cache lines.
  • We need to read and write the bit history for the given row as we update it. We only require 3 bits of history per row, allowing the storage of 2 rows of history in a single byte. The read/shift&OR/write process requires 2 cache lines.
  • The total bandwidth required for the bit detection and storage is summarised in the following table:
    Read centroid Δ  5%
    Read
    3 columns of pixel data 19%
    Read/Write detected bits into byte buffer 10%
    Read/Write bit history  5%
    TOTAL
    39%

    Detecting a Dot
  • The process of detecting the value of a dot (and hence the value of a bit) given a centroid is accomplished by examining 3 pixel values and getting the result from a lookup table. The process is fairly simple and is illustrated in FIG. 11. A dot 290 has a radius of about 1.5 pixels. Therefore the pixel 291 that holds the centroid, regardless of the actual position of the centroid within that pixel, should be 100% of the dot's value. If the centroid is exactly in the center of the pixel 291, then the pixels above 292 & below 293 the centroid's pixel, as well as the pixels to the left 294 & right 295 of the centroid's pixel will contain a majority of the dot's value. The further a centroid is away from the exact center of the pixel 295, the more likely that more than the center pixel will have 100% coverage by the dot.
  • Although FIG. 11 only shows centroids differing to the left and below the center, the same relationship obviously holds for centroids above and to the right of center. center. In Case 1, the centroid is exactly in the center of the middle pixel 295. The center pixel 295 is completely covered by the dot, and the pixels above, below, left, and right are also well covered by the dot. In Case 2, the centroid is to the left of the center of the middle pixel 291. The center pixel is still completely covered by the dot, and the pixel 294 to the left of the center is now completely covered by the dot. The pixels above 292 and below 293 are still well covered. In Case 3, the centroid is below the center of the middle pixel 291. The center pixel 291 is still completely covered by the dot 291, and the pixel below center is now completely covered by the dot. The pixels left 294 and right 295 of center are still well covered. In Case 4, the centroid is left and below the center of the middle pixel. The center pixel 291 is still completely covered by the dot, and both the pixel to the left of center 294 and the pixel below center 293 are completely covered by the dot.
  • The algorithm for updating the centroid uses the distance of the centroid from the center of the middle pixel 291 in order to select 3 representative pixels and thus decide the value of the dot:
      • Pixel 1: the pixel containing the centroid
      • Pixel 2: the pixel to the left of Pixel 1 if the centroid's X coordinate (column value) is <½, otherwise the pixel to the right of Pixel 1.
      • Pixel 3: the pixel above pixel 1 if the centroid's Y coordinate (row value) is <{fraction (1/2)}, otherwise the pixel below Pixel 1.
  • As shown in FIG. 12, the value of each pixel is output to a pre-calculated lookup table 301. The 3 pixels are fed into a 12-bit lookup table, which outputs a single bit indicating the value of the dot—on or off. The lookup table 301 is constructed at chip definition time, and can be compiled into about 500 gates. The lookup table can be a simple threshold table, with the exception that the center pixel (Pixel 1) is weighted more heavily.
  • Step 3: Update the Centroid Δs for Each Row in the Column
  • The idea of the As processing is to use the previous bit history to generate a ‘perfect’ dot at the expected centroid location for each row in a current column. The actual pixels (from the CCD) are compared with the expected ‘perfect’ pixels. If the two match, then the actual centroid location must be exactly in the expected position, so the centroid Δs must be valid and not need updating. Otherwise a process of changing the centroid Δs needs to occur in order to best fit the expected centroid location to the actual data. The new centroid Δs will be used for processing the dot in the next column.
  • Updating the centroid Δs is done as a subsequent process from Step 2 for the following reasons:
      • to reduce complexity in design, so that it can be performed as Step 2 of Phase 1 there is enough bandwidth remaining to allow it to allow reuse of DRAM buffers, and to ensure that all the data required for centroid updating is available at the start of the process without special pipelining.
  • The centroid Δ are processed as Δcolumn Δrow respectively to reduce complexity.
  • Although a given dot is 3 pixels in diameter, it is likely to occur in a 4×4 pixel area. However the edge of one dot will as a result be in the same pixel as the edge of the next dot. For this reason, centroid updating requires more than simply the information about a given single dot.
  • FIG. 13 shows a single dot 310 from the previous column with a given centroid 311. In this example, the dot 310 extend Δ over 4 pixel columns 312-315 and in fact, part of the previous dot column's dot (coordinate=(Prevcolumn, Current Row)) has entered the current column for the dot on the current row. If the dot in the current row and column was white, we would expect the rightmost pixel column 314 from the previous dot column to be a low value, since there is only the dot information from the previous column's dot (the current column's dot is white). From this we can see that the higher the pixel value is in this pixel column 315, the more the centroid should be to the right Of course, if the dot to the right was also black, we cannot adjust the centroid Δs we cannot get information sub-pixel. The same can be said for the dots to the left, above and below the dot at dot coordinates (PrevColumn, CurrentRow).
  • From this we can say that a maximum of 5 pixel columns and rows are required. It is possible to simplify the situation by taking the cases of row and column centroid Δs separately, treating them as the same problem, only rotated 90 degrees.
  • Taking the horizontal case first, it is necessary to change the column centroid Δs if the expected pixels don't match the detected pixels. From the bit history, the value of the bits found for the Current Row in the current dot column, the previous dot column, and the (previous-1)th dot column are known. The expected centroid location is also known. Using these two pieces of information, it is possible to generate a 20 bit expected bit pattern should the read be ‘perfect’. The 20 bit bit-pattern represents the expected Δ values for each of the 5 pixels across the horizontal dimension. The first nibble would represent the rightmost pixel of the leftmost dot. The next 3 nibbles represent the 3 pixels across the center of the dot 310 from the previous column, and the last nibble would be the leftmost pixel 317 of the rightmost dot (from the current column).
  • If the expected centroid is in the center of the pixel, we would expect a 20 bit pattern based on the following table:
    Bit Expected
    history pixels
    000 00000
    001 0000D
    010 0DFD0
    011 0DFDD
    100 D0000
    101 D000D
    110 DDFD0
    111 DDFDD
  • The pixels to the left and right of the center dot are either 0 or D depending on whether the bit was a 0 or 1 respectively. The center three pixels are either 000 or DFD depending on whether the bit was a 0 or 1 respectively. These values are based on the physical area taken by a dot for a given pixel. Depending on the distance of the centroid from the exact center of the pixel, we would expect data shifted slightly, which really only affects the pixels either side of the center pixel. Since there are 16 possibilities, it is possible to divide the distance from the center by 16 and use that amount to shift the expected pixels.
  • Once the 20 bit 5 pixel expected value has been determined it can be compared against the actual pixels read. This can proceed by subtracting the expected pixels from the actual pixels read on a pixel by pixel basis, and finally adding the differences together to obtain a distance from the expected Δ values.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates one form of implementation of the above algorithm which includes a look up table 320 which receives the bit history 322 and central fractional component 323 and outputs 324 the corresponding 20 bit number which is subtracted 321 from the central pixel input 326 to produce a pixel difference 327.
  • This process is carried out for the expected centroid and once for a shift of the centroid left and right by 1 amount in Δcolumn. The centroid with the smallest difference from the actual pixels is considered to be the ‘winner’ and the Δcolumn updated accordingly (which hopefully is ‘no change’). As a result, a Δcolumn cannot change by more than 1 each dot column.
  • The process is repeated for the vertical pixels, and Δrow is consequentially updated.
  • There is a large amount of scope here for parallelism. Depending on the rate of the clock chosen for the ACP unit 31 these units can be placed in series (and thus the testing of 3 different Δ could occur in consecutive clock cycles), or in parallel where all 3 can be tested simultaneously. If the clock rate is fast enough, there is less need for parallelism.
  • Bandwidth Utilization
  • It is necessary to read the old Δ of the Δs, and to write them out again. This takes 10% of the bandwidth:
    2*(76(3150/32)+2*3150)=27,648 ns=10% of bandwidth
  • It is necessary to read the bit history for the given row as we update its Δs. Each byte contains 2 row's bit histories, thus taking 2.5% of the bandwidth:
    76((3150/2)/32)+2*(3150/2)=4,085 ns=2.5% of bandwidth
  • In the worst case of pixel drift due to a 1% rotation, centroids will shift 1 column every 57 pixel rows, but since a dot is 3 pixels in diameter, a given pixel column will be valid for 171 pixel rows (3*57). As a byte contains 2 pixels, the number of bytes valid in cached reads will be a worst case of 86 (out of 128 read). The worst case timing for 5 columns is therefore 31% bandwidth.
    5 *(((9450/(128*2))*320)*128/86)=0.88, 112 ns=31% of bandwidth.
  • The total bandwidth required for the updating the centroid Δ is summarised in the following table:
    Read/Write centroid Δ 10%
    Read bit history 2.5% 
    Read
    5 columns of pixel data 31%
    TOTAL 43.5%  

    Memory Usage for Phase 2:
  • The 2 MB bit-image DRAM area is read from and written to during Phase 2 processing. The 2 MB pixel-data DRAM area is read.
  • The 0.5 MB scratch DRAM area is used for storing row data, namely:
    Centroid array 24 bits (16:8) * 2 * 3150 = 18,900 byes
    Bit History array 3 bits * 3150 entries (2 per byte) = 1575 bytes

    Phase 3-Unscramble and XOR the Raw Data
  • Returning to FIG. 6, the next step in decoding is to unscramble and XOR the raw data. The 2 MB byte image, as taken from the Artcard, is in a scrambled XORed form. It must be unscrambled and re-XORed to retrieve the bit image necessary for the Reed Solomon decoder in phase 4.
  • Turning to FIG. 15, the unscrambling process 330 takes a 2 MB scrambled byte image 331 and writes an unscrambled 2 MB image 332. The process cannot reasonably be performed in-place, so 2 sets of 2 MB areas are utilised. The scrambled data 331 is in symbol block order arranged in a 16×16 array, with symbol block 0 (334) having all the symbol 0's from all the code words in random order. Symbol block 1 has all the symbol 1's from all the code words in random order etc. Since there are only 255 symbols, the 256% symbol block is currently unused.
  • A linear feedback shift register is used to determine the relationship between the position within a symbol block eg. 334 and what code word eg. 355 it came from. This works as long as the same seed is used when generating the original Artcard images. The XOR of bytes from alternative source lines with 0xAA and 0x55 respectively is effectively free (in time) since the bottleneck of time is waiting for the DRAM to be ready to read/write to non-sequential addresses.
  • The timing of the unscrambling XOR process is effectively 2 MB of random byte-reads, and 2 MB of random byte-writes i.e. 2*(2 MB*76 ns+2 MB*2 ns)=327,155,712 ns or approximately 0.33 seconds. This timing assumes no caching.
  • Phase 4—Reed Solomon Decode
  • This phase is a loop, iterating through copies of the data in the bit image, passing them to the Reed-Solomon decode module until either a successful decode is made or until there are no more copies to attempt decode from.
  • The Reed-Solomon decoder used can be the VLIW processor, suitably programmed or, alternatively, a separate hardwired core such as LSI Logic's L64712. The L64712 has a throughput of 50 Mbits per second (around 6.25 MB per second), so the time may be bound by the speed of the Reed-Solomon decoder rather than the 2 MB read and 1 MB write memory access time (500 MB/sec for sequential accesses). The time taken in the worst case is thus 2/6.25s=approximately 0.32 seconds.
  • Phase 5 Running the Vark Script
  • The overall time taken to read the Artcard 9 and decode it is therefore approximately 2.15 seconds. The apparent delay to the user is actually only 0.65 seconds (the total of Phases 3 and 4), since the Artcard stops moving after 1.5 seconds.
  • Once the Artcard is loaded, the Artvark script must be interpreted, Rather than run the script immediately, the script is only run upon the pressing of the ‘Print’ button 13 (FIG. 1). The time taken to run the script will vary depending on the complexity of the script, and must be taken into account for the perceived delay between pressing the print button and the actual print button and the actual printing.
  • Alternative Artcard Format
  • Of course, other artcard formats are possible. There will now be described one such alternative artcard format with a number of preferable feature. Described hereinafter will be the alternative Artcard data format, a mechanism for mapping user data onto dots on an alternative Artcard, and a fast alternative Artcard reading algorithm for use in embedded systems where resources are scarce.
  • Alternative Artcard Overview
  • The Alternative Artcards can be used in both embedded and PC type applications, providing a user-friendly interface to large amounts of data or configuration information.
  • While the back side of an alternative Artcard has the same visual appearance regardless of the application (since it stores the data), the front of an alternative Artcard can be application dependent. It must make sense to the user in the context of the application.
  • Alternative Artcard technology can also be independent of the printing resolution. The notion of storing data as dots on a card simply means that if it is possible put more dots in the same space (by increasing resolution), then those dots can represent more data. The preferred embodiment assumes utilisation of 1600 dpi printing on a 86 mm×55 mm card as the sample Artcard, but it is simple to determine alternative equivalent layouts and data sizes for other card sizes and/or other print resolutions. Regardless of the print resolution, the reading technique remain the same. After all decoding and other overhead has been taken into account, alternative Artcards are capable of storing up to 1 Megabyte of data at print resolutions up to 1600 dpi. Alternative Artcards can store megabytes of data at print resolutions greater than 1600 dpi. The following two tables summarize the effective alternative Artcard data storage capacity for certain print resolutions:
  • Format of an Alternative Artcard
  • The structure of data on the alternative Artcard is therefore specifically designed to aid the recovery of data. This section describes the format of the data (back) side of an alternative Artcard.
  • Dots
  • The dots on the data side of an alternative Artcard can be monochrome. For example, black dots printed on a white background at a predetermined desired print resolution. Consequently a “black dot” is physically different from a “white dot”. FIG. 16 illustrates various examples of magnified views of black and white dots. The monochromatic scheme of black dots on a white background is preferably chosen to maximize dynamic range in blurry reading environments. Although the black dots are printed at a particular pitch (eg. 1600 dpi), the dots themselves are slightly larger in order to create continuous lines when dots are printed contiguously. In the example images of FIG. 16, the dots are not as merged as they may be in reality as a result of bleeding. There would be more smoothing out of the black indentations. Although the alternative Artcard system described in the preferred embodiment allows for flexibly different dot sizes, exact dot sizes and ink/printing behaviour for a particular printing technology should be studied in more detail in order to obtain best results.
  • In describing this artcard embodiment, the term dot refers to a physical printed dot (ink, thermal, electro-photographic, silver-halide etc) on an alternative Artcard. When an alternative Artcard reader scans an alternative Artcard, the dots must be sampled at least double the printed resolution to satisfy Nyquist's Theorem. The term pixel refers to a sample value from an alternative Artcard reader device. For example, when 1600 dpi dots are scanned at 4800 dpi there are 3 pixels in each dimension of a dot, or 9 pixels per dot. The sampling process will be further explained hereinafter.
  • Turning to FIG. 17, there is shown the data surface 1101 a sample of alternative Artcard. Each alternative Artcard consists of an “active” region 1102 surrounded by a white border region 1103. The white border 1103 contains no data information, but can be used by an alternative Artcard reader to calibrate white levels. The active region is an array of data blocks eg. 1104, with each data block separated from the next by a gap of 8 white dots eg. 1106. Depending on the print resolution, the number of data blocks on an alternative Artcard will vary. On a 1600 dpi alternative Artcard, the array can be 8×8. Each data block 1104 has dimensions of 627×394 dots. With an inter-block gap 1106 of 8 white dots, the active area of an alternative Artcard is therefore 5072×3208 dots (8.1 mm×5.1 mm at 1600 dpi).
  • Data Blocks
  • Turning now to FIG. 18, there is shown a single data block 1107. The active region of an alternative Artcard consists of an array of identically structured data blocks 1107. Each of the data blocks has the following structure: a data region 1108 surrounded by clock-marks 1109, borders 1110, and targets 1111. The data region holds the encoded data proper, while the clock-marks, borders and targets are present specifically to help locate the data region and ensure accurate recovery of data from within the region.
  • Each data block 1107 has dimensions of 627×394 dots. Of this, the central area of 595×384 dots is the data region 1108. The surrounding dots are used to hold the clock-marks, borders, and targets.
  • Borders and Clockmarks
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a data block with FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 illustrating magnified edge portions thereof. As illustrated in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, there are two 5 dot high border and clockmark regions 1170, 1177 in each data block: one above and one below the data region. For example, The top 5 dot high region consists of an outer black dot border line 1112 (which stretches the length of the data block), a white dot separator line 1113 (to ensure the border line is independent), and a 3 dot high set of clock marks 1114. The clock marks alternate between a white and black row, starting with a black clock mark at the 8th column from either end of the data block. There is no separation between clockmark dots and dots in the data region.
  • The clock marks are symmetric in that if the alternative Artcard is inserted rotated 180 degrees, the same relative border/clockmark regions will be encountered. The border 1112, 1113 is intended for use by an alternative Artcard reader to keep vertical tracking as data is read from the data region. The clockmarks 1114 are intended to keep horizontal tracking as data is read from the data region. The separation between the border and clockmarks by a white line of dots is desirable as a result of blurring occurring during reading. The border thus becomes a black line with white on either side, making for a good frequency response on reading. The clockmarks alternating between white and black have a similar result, except in the horizontal rather than the vertical dimension. Any alternative Artcard reader must locate the clockmarks and border if it intends to use them for tracking. The next section deals with targets, which are designed to point the way to the clockmarks, border and data.
  • Targets in the Target Region
  • As shown in FIG. 23, there are two 15-dot wide target regions 1116, 1117 in each data block: one to the left and one to the right of the data region. The target regions are separated from the data region by a single column of dots used for orientation. The purpose of the Target Regions 1116, 1117 is to point the way to the clockmarks, border and data regions. Each Target Region contains 6 targets eg. 1118 that are designed to be easy to find by an alternative Artcard reader. Turning now to FIG. 22 there is shown the structure of a single target 1120. Each target 1120 is a 15×15 dot black square with a center structure 1121 and a run-length encoded target number 1122. The center structure 1121 is a simple white cross, and the target number component 1122 is simply two columns of white dots, each being 2 dots long for each part of the target number. Thus target number I's target id 1122 is 2 dots long, target number 2's target id 1122 is 4 dots wide etc.
  • As shown in FIG. 23, the targets are arranged so that they are rotation invariant with regards to card insertion. This means that the left targets and right targets are the same, except rotated 180 degrees. In the left Target Region 1116, the targets are arranged such that targets 1 to 6 are located top to bottom respectively. In the right Target Region, the targets are arranged so that target numbers 1 to 6 are located bottom to top. The target number id is always in the half closest to the data region. The magnified view portions of FIG. 23 reveals clearly the how the right targets are simply the same as the left targets, except rotated 180 degrees.
  • As shown in FIG. 24, the targets 1124, 1125 are specifically placed within the Target Region with centers 55 dots apart. In addition, there is a distance of 55 dots from the center of target 1 (1124) to the first clockmark dot 1126 in the upper clockmark region, and a distance of 55 dots from the center of the target to the first clockmark dot in the lower clockmark region (not shown). The first black clockmark in both regions begins directly in line with the target center (the 8th dot position is the center of the 15 dot-wide target).
  • The simplified schematic illustrations of FIG. 24 illustrates the distances between target centers as well as the distance from Target 1 (1124) to the first dot of the first black clockmark (1126) in the upper border/clockmark region. Since there is a distance of 55 dots to the clockmarks from both the upper and lower targets, and both sides of the alternative Artcard are symmetrical (rotated through 180 degrees), the card can be read left-to-right or right-to-left. Regardless of reading direction, the orientation does need to be determined in order to extract the data from the data region.
  • Orientation Columns
  • As illustrated in FIG. 25, there are two 1 dot wide Orientation Columns 1127, 1128 in each data block: one directly to the left and one directly to the right of the data region. The Orientation Columns are present to give orientation information to an alternative Artcard reader: On the left side of the data region (to the right of the Left Targets) is a single column of white dots 1127. On the right side of the data region (to the left of the Right Targets) is a single column of black dots 1128. Since the targets are rotation invariant, these two columns of dots allow an alternative Artcard reader to determine the orientation of the alternative Artcard—has the card been inserted the right way, or back to front. From the alternative Artcard reader's point of view, assuming no degradation to the dots, there are two possibilities:
      • If the column of dots to the left of the data region is white, and the column to the right of the data region is black, then the reader will know that the card has been inserted the same way as it was written.
      • If the column of dots to the left of the data region is black, and the column to the right of the data region is white, then the reader will know that the card has been inserted backwards, and the data region is appropriately rotated. The reader must take appropriate action to correctly recover the information from the alternative Artcard.
        Data Region
  • As shown in FIG. 26, the data region of a data block consists of 595 columns of 384 dots each, for a total of 228,480 dots. These dots must be interpreted and decoded to yield the original data. Each dot represents a single bit, so the 228,480 dots represent 228,480 bits, or 28,560 bytes. The interpretation of each dot can be as follows:
    Black 1
    White 0
  • The actual interpretation of the bits derived from the dots, however, requires understanding of the mapping from the original data to the dots in the data regions of the alternative Artcard.
  • Mapping Original Data to Data Region Dots
  • There will now be described the process of taking an original data file of maximum size 910,082 bytes and mapping it to the dots in the data regions of the 64 data blocks on a 1600 dpi alternative Artcard. An alternative Artcard reader would reverse the process in order to extract the original data from the dots on an alternative Artcard. At first glance it seems trivial to map data onto dots: binary data is comprised of 1s and 0s, so it would be possible to simply write black and white dots onto the card. This scheme however, does not allow for the fact that ink can fade, parts of a card may be damaged with dirt, grime, or even scratches. Without error-detection encoding, there is no way to detect if the data retrieved from the card is correct. And without redundancy encoding, there is no way to correct the detected errors. The aim of the mapping process then, is to make the data recovery highly robust, and also give the alternative Artcard reader the ability to know it read the data correctly.
  • There are three basic steps involved in mapping an original data file to data region dots:
      • Redundancy encode the original data
      • Shuffle the encoded data in a deterministic way to reduce the effect of localized alternative Artcard damage
      • Write out the shuffled, encoded data as dots to the data blocks on the alternative Artcard
  • Each of these steps is examined in detail in the following sections.
  • Redundancy Encode Using Reed-Solomon Encoding
  • The mapping of data to alternative Artcard dots relies heavily on the method of redundancy encoding employed. Reed-Solomon encoding is preferably chosen for its ability to deal with burst errors and effectively detect and correct errors using a minimum of redundancy. Reed Solomon encoding is adequately discussed in the standard texts such as Wicker, S., and Bhargava, V., 1994, Reed-Solomon Codes and their Applications, IEEE Press. Rorabaugh, C, 1996, Error Coding Cookbook, McGraw-Hill. Lyppens, H., 1997, Reed-Solomon Error Correction, Dr. Dobb's Journal, January 1997 (Volume 22, Issue 1).
  • A variety of different parameters for Reed-Solomon encoding can be used, including different symbol sizes and different levels of redundancy. Preferably, the following encoding parameters are used:
      • m=8
      • t=64
  • Having m=8 means that the symbol size is 8 bits (I byte). It also means that each Reed-Solomon encoded block size n is 255 bytes (28−1 symbols). In order to allow correction of up to t symbols, 2t symbols in the final block size must be taken up with redundancy symbols. Having t-64 means that 64 bytes (symbols) can be corrected per block if they are in error. Each 255 byte block therefore has 128 (2×64) redundancy bytes, and the remaining 127 bytes (k=127) are used to hold original data. Thus:
      • n=255
      • k=127
  • The practical result is that 127 bytes of original data are encoded to become a 255-byte block of Reed-Solomon encoded data. The encoded 255-byte blocks are stored on the alternative Artcard and later decoded back to the original 127 bytes again by the alternative Artcard reader. The 384 dots in a single column of a data block's data region can hold 48 bytes (384/8). 595 of these columns can hold 28,560 bytes. This amounts to 112 Reed-Solomon blocks (each block having 255 bytes). The 64 data blocks of a complete alternative Artcard can hold a total of 7168 Reed-Solomon blocks (1,827,840 bytes, at 255 bytes per Reed-Solomon block). Two of the 7,168 Reed-Solomon blocks are reserved for control information, but the remaining 7166 are used to store data. Since each Reed-Solomon block holds 127 bytes of actual data, the total amount of data that can be stored on an alternative Artcard is 910,082 bytes (7166×127). If the original data is less than this amount, the data can be encoded to fit an exact number of Reed-Solomon blocks, and then the encoded blocks can be replicated until all 7,166 are used. FIG. 27 illustrates the overall form of encoding utilised.
  • Each of the 2 Control blocks 1132, 1133 contain the same encoded information required for decoding the remaining 7,166 Reed-Solomon blocks:
  • The number of Reed-Solomon blocks in a full message (16 bits stored lo/hi), and
  • The number of data bytes in the last Reed-Solomon block of the message (8 bits).
  • These two numbers are repeated 32 times (consuming. 96 bytes) with the remaining 31 bytes reserved and set to 0. Each control block is then Reed-Solomon encoded, turning the 127 bytes of control information into 255 bytes of Reed-Solomon encoded data.
  • The Control Block is stored twice to give greater chance of it surviving. In addition, the repetition of the data within the Control Block has particular significance when using Reed-Solomon encoding. In an uncorrupted Reed-Solomon encoded block, the first 127 bytes of data are exactly the original data, and can be looked at in an attempt to recover the original message if the Control Block fails decoding (more than 64 symbols are corrupted). Thus, if a Control Block fails decoding, it is possible to examine sets of 3 bytes in an effort to determine the most likely values for the 2 decoding parameters. It is not guaranteed to be recoverable, but it has a better chance through redundancy. Say the last 159 bytes of the Control Block are destroyed, and the first 96 bytes are perfectly ok. Looking at the first 96 bytes will show a repeating set of numbers. These numbers can be sensibly used to decode the remainder of the message in the remaining 7,166 Reed-Solomon blocks.
  • By way of example, assume a data file containing exactly 9,967 bytes of data. The number of Reed-Solomon blocks required is 79. The first 78 Reed-Solomon blocks are completely utilized, consuming 9,906 bytes (78×127). The 79th block has only 61 bytes of data (with the remaining 66 bytes all 0s).
  • The alternative Artcard would consist of 7,168 Reed-Solomon blocks. The first 2 blocks would be Control Blocks, the next 79 would be the encoded data, the next 79 would be a duplicate of the encoded data, the next 79 would be another duplicate of the encoded data, and so on. After storing the 79 Reed-Solomon blocks 90 times, the remaining 56 Reed-Solomon blocks would be another duplicate of the first 56 blocks from the 79 blocks of encoded data (the final 23 blocks of encoded data would not be stored again as there is not enough room on the alternative Artcard). A hex representation of the 127 bytes in each Control Block data before being Reed-Solomon encoded would be as illustrated in FIG. 28.
  • Scramble the Encoded Data
  • Assuming all the encoded blocks have been stored contiguously in memory, a maximum 1,827,840 bytes of data can be stored on the alternative Artcard (2 Control Blocks and 7,166 information blocks, totalling 7,168 Reed-Solomon encoded blocks). Preferably, the data is not directly stored onto the alternative Artcard at this stage however, or all 255 bytes of one Reed-Solomon block will be physically together on the card. Any dirt, grime, or stain that causes physical damage to the card has the potential of damaging more than 64 bytes in a single Reed-Solomon block, which would make that block unrecoverable. If there are no duplicates of that Reed-Solomon block, then the entire alternative Artcard cannot be decoded.
  • The solution is to take advantage of the fact that there are a large number of bytes on the alternative Artcard, and that the alternative Artcard has a reasonable physical size. The data can therefore be scrambled to ensure that symbols from a single Reed-Solomon block are not in close proximity to one another. Of course pathological cases of card degradation can cause Reed-Solomon blocks to be unrecoverable, but on average, the scrambling of data makes the card much more robust. The scrambling scheme chosen is simple and is illustrated schematically in FIG. 29. All the Byte 0s from each Reed-Solomon block are placed together 1136, then all the Byte Is etc. There will therefore be 7,168 byte 0's, then 7,168 Byte I's etc. Each data block on the alternative Artcard can store 28,560 bytes. Consequently there are approximately 4 bytes from each Reed-Solomon block in each of the 64 data blocks on the alternative Artcard.
  • Under this scrambling scheme, complete damage to 16 entire data blocks on the alternative Artcard will result in 64 symbol errors per Reed-Solomon block. This means that if there is no other damage to the alternative Artcard, the entire data is completely recoverable, even if there is no data duplication.
  • Write the Scrambled Encoded Data to the Alternative Artcard
  • Once the original data has been Reed-Solomon encoded, duplicated, and scrambled, there are 1,827,840 bytes of data to be stored on the alternative Artcard. Each of the 64 data blocks on the alternative Artcard stores 28,560 bytes.
  • The data is simply written out to the alternative Artcard data blocks so that the first data block contains the first 28,560 bytes of the scrambled data, the second data block contains the next 28,560 bytes etc.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 30, within a data block, the data is written out column-wise left to right. Thus the left-most column within a data block contains the first 48 bytes of the 28,560 bytes of scrambled data, and the last column contains the last 48 bytes of the 28,560 bytes of scrambled data. Within a column, bytes are written out top to bottom, one bit at a time, starting from bit 7 and finishing with bit 0. If the bit is set (1), a black dot is placed on the alternative Artcard, if the bit is clear (0), no dot is placed, leaving it the white background color of the card.
  • For example, a set of 1,827,840 bytes of data can be created by scrambling 7,168 Reed-Solomon encoded blocks to be stored onto an alternative Artcard. The first 28,560 bytes of data are written to the first data block. The first 48 bytes of the first 28,560 bytes are written to the first column of the data block, the next 48 bytes to the next column and so on. Suppose the first two bytes of the 28,560 bytes are hex D3 5F. Those first two bytes will be stored in column 0 of the data block. Bit 7 of byte 0 will be stored first, then bit 6 and so on. Then Bit 7 of byte 1 will be stored through to bit 0 of byte 1. Since each “1” is stored as a black dot, and each “0” as a white dot, these two bytes will be represented on the alternative Artcard as the following set of dots:
      • D3 (1101 0011) becomes: black, black, white, black, white, white, black black
      • 5F (0101 1111) becomes: white, black, white, black, black, black, black, black
        Decoding an Alternative Artcard
  • This section deals with extracting the original data from an alternative Artcard in an accurate and robust manner. Specifically, it assumes the alternative Artcard format as described in the previous chapter, and describes a method of extracting the original pre-encoded data from the alternative Artcard.
  • There are a number of general considerations that are part of the assumptions for decoding an alternative Artcard.
  • User
  • The purpose of an alternative Artcard is to store data for use in different applications. A user inserts an alternative Artcard into an alternative Artcard reader, and expects the data to be loaded in a “reasonable time”. From the user's perspective, a motor transport moves the alternative Artcard into an alternative Artcard reader. This is not perceived as a problematic delay, since the alternative Artcard is in motion. Any time after the alternative Artcard has stopped is perceived as a delay, and should be minimized in any alternative Artcard reading scheme. Ideally, the entire alternative Artcard would be read while in motion, and thus there would be no perceived delay after the card had stopped moving.
  • For the purpose of the preferred embodiment, a reasonable time for an alternative Artcard to be physically loaded is defined to be 1.5 seconds. There should be a minimization of time for additional decoding after the alternative Artcard has stopped moving. Since the Active region of an alternative Artcard covers most of the alternative Artcard surface we can limit our timing concerns to that region.
  • Sampling Dots
  • The dots on an alternative Artcard must be sampled by a CCD reader or the like at least at double the printed resolution to satisfy Nyquist's Theorem. In practice it is better to sample at a higher rate than this. In the alternative Artcard reader environment, dots are preferably sampled at 3 times their printed resolution in each dimension, requiring 9 pixels to define a single dot. If the resolution of the alternative Artcard dots is 1600 dpi, the alternative Artcard reader's image sensor must scan pixels at 4800 dpi. Of course if a dot is not exactly aligned with the sampling sensor, the worst and most likely case as illustrated in FIG. 31, is that a dot will be sensed over a 4×4 pixel area.
  • Each sampled pixel is 1 byte (8 bits). The lowest 2 bits of each pixel can contain significant noise. Decoding algorithms must therefore be noise tolerant.
  • Alignment/Rotation
  • It is extremely unlikely that a user will insert an alternative Artcard into an alternative Artcard reader perfectly aligned with no rotation. Certain physical constraints at a reader entrance and motor transport grips will help ensure that once inserted, an alternative Artcard will stay at the original angle of insertion relative to the CCD. Preferably this angle of rotation, as illustrated in FIG. 32 is a maximum of 1 degree. There can be some slight aberrations in angle due to jitter and motor rumble during the reading process, but these are assumed to essentially stay within the 1-degree limit.
  • The physical dimensions of an alternative Artcard are 86 mm×55 mm. A 1 degree rotation adds 1.5 mm to the effective height of the card as 86 mm passes under the CCD (86 sin 1°), which will affect the required CCD length.
  • The effect of a 1 degree rotation on alternative Artcard reading is that a single scanline from the CCD will include a number of different columns of dots from the alternative Artcard. This is illustrated in an exaggerated form in FIG. 32 which shows the drift of dots across the columns of pixels. Although exaggerated in this diagram, the actual drift will be a maximum 1 pixel column shift every 57 pixels.
  • When an alternative Artcard is not rotated, a single column of dots can be read over 3 pixel scanlines. The more an alternative Artcard is rotated, the greater the local effect. The more dots being read, the longer the rotation effect is applied. As either of these factors increase, the larger the number of pixel scanlines that are needed to be read to yield a given set of dots from a single column on an alternative Artcard. The following table shows how many pixel scanlines are required for a single column of dots in a particular alternative Artcard structure.
    Region Height rotation 1° rotation
    Active region 3208 dots 3 pixel columns 168 pixel columns
    Data block 394 dots 3 pixel columns 21 pixel columns
  • To read an entire alternative Artcard, we need to read 87 mm (86 mm+1 mm due to 1° rotation). At 4800 dpi this implies 16,252 pixel columns.
  • CCD (or Other Linear Image Sensor) Length
  • The length of the CCD itself must accommodate:
      • the physical height of the alternative Artcard (55 mm),
      • vertical slop on physical alternative Artcard insertion (1 mm)
      • insertion rotation of up to 1 degree (86 sin 1°=1.5 mm)
  • These factors combine to form a total length of 57.5 mm.
  • When the alternative Artcard Image sensor CCD in an alternative Artcard reader scans at 4800 dpi, a single scanline is 10,866 pixels. For simplicity, this figure has been rounded up to 11,000 pixels. The Active Region of an alternative Artcard has a height of 3208 dots, which implies 9,624 pixels. A Data Region has a height of 384 dots, which implies 1,152 pixels.
  • DRAM Size
  • The amount of memory required for alternative Artcard reading and decoding is ideally minimized. The typical placement of an alternative Artcard reader is an embedded system where memory resources are precious. This is made more problematic by the effects of rotation. As described above, the more an alternative Artcard is rotated, the more scanlines are required to effectively recover original dots.
  • There is a trade-off between algorithmic complexity, user perceived delays, robustness, and memory usage. One of the simplest reader algorithms would be to simply scan the whole alternative Artcard, and then to process the whole data without real-time constraints. Not only would this require huge reserves of memory, it would take longer than a reader algorithm that occurred concurrently with the alternative Artcard reading process.
  • The actual amount of memory required for reading and decoding an alternative Artcard is twice the amount of space required to hold the encoded data, together with a small amount of scratch space (1-2 KB). For the 1600 dpi alternative Artcard, this implies a 4 MB memory requirement. The actual usage of the memory is detailed in the following algorithm description.
  • Transfer Rate
  • DRAM bandwidth assumptions need to be made for timing considerations and to a certain extent affect algorithmic design, especially since alternative Artcard readers are typically part of an embedded system.
  • A standard Rambus Direct RDRAM architecture is assumed, as defined in Rambus Inc, October 1997, Direct Rambus Technology Disclosure, with a peak data transfer rate of 1.6 GB/sec. Assuming 75% efficiency (easily achieved), we have an average of 1.2 GB/sec data transfer rate. The average time to access a block of 16 bytes is therefore 12 ns.
  • Dirty Data
  • Physically damaged alternative Artcards can be inserted into a reader. Alternative Artcards may be scratched, or be stained with grime or dirt. A alternative Artcard reader can't assume to read everything perfectly. The effect of dirty data is made worse by blurring, as the dirty data affects the surrounding clean dots.
  • Blurry Environment
  • There are two ways that blurring is introduced into the alternative Artcard reading environment:
      • Natural blurring due to nature of the CCD's distance from the alternative Artcard.
      • Warping of alternative Artcard
  • Natural blurring of an alternative Artcard image occurs when there is overlap of sensed data from the CCD. Blurring can be useful, as the overlap ensures there are no high frequencies in the sensed data, and that there is no data missed by the CCD. However if the area covered by a CCD pixel is too large, there will be too much blurring and the sampling required to recover the data will not be met. FIG. 33 is a schematic illustration of the overlapping of sensed data.
  • Another form of blurring occurs when an alternative Artcard is slightly warped due to heat damage. When the warping is in the vertical dimension, the distance between the alternative Artcard and the CCD will not be constant, and the level of blurring will vary across those areas.
  • Black and white dots were chosen for alternative Artcards to give the best dynamic range in blurry reading environments. Blurring can cause problems in attempting to determine whether a given dot is black or white.
  • As the blurring increases, the more a given dot is influenced by the surrounding dots. Consequently the dynamic range for a particular dot decreases. Consider a white dot and a black dot, each surrounded by all possible sets of dots. The 9 dots are blurred, and the center dot sampled. FIG. 34 shows the distribution of resultant center dot values for black and white dots.
  • The diagram is intended to be a representative blurring. The curve 1140 from 0 to around 180 shows the range of black dots. The curve 1141 from 75 to 250 shows the range of white dots. However the greater the blurring, the more the two curves shift towards the center of the range and therefore the greater the intersection area, which means the more difficult it is to determine whether a given dot is black or white. A pixel value at the center point of intersection is ambiguous—the dot is equally likely to be a black or a white.
  • As the blurring increases, the likelihood of a read bit error increases. Fortunately, the Reed-Solomon decoding algorithm can cope with these gracefully up to t symbol errors. FIG. 34 is a graph of number predicted number of alternative Artcard Reed-Solomon blocks that cannot be recovered given a particular symbol error rate. Notice how the Reed-Solomon decoding scheme performs well and then substantially degrades. If there is no Reed-Solomon block duplication, then only 1 block needs to be in error for the data to be unrecoverable. Of course, with block duplication the chance of an alternative Artcard decoding increases.
  • FIG. 35 only illustrates the symbol (byte) errors corresponding to the number of Reed-Solomon blocks in error. There is a trade-off between the amount of blurring that can be coped with, compared to the amount of damage that has been done to a card. Since all error detection and correction is performed by a Reed-Solomon decoder, there is a finite number of errors per Reed-Solomon data block that can be coped with. The more errors introduced through blurring, the fewer the number of errors that can be coped with due to alternative Artcard damage.
  • Overview of Alternative Artcard Decoding
  • As noted previously, when the user inserts an alternative Artcard into an alternative Artcard reading unit, a motor transport ideally carries the alternative Artcard past a monochrome linear CCD image sensor. The card is sampled in each dimension at three times the printed resolution. Alternative Artcard reading hardware and software compensate for rotation up to 1 degree, jitter and vibration due to the motor transport, and blurring due to variations in alternative Artcard to CCD distance. A digital bit image of the data is extracted from the sampled image by a complex method described here. Reed-Solomon decoding corrects arbitrarily distributed data corruption of up to 25% of the raw data on the alternative Artcard. Approximately 1 MB of corrected data is extracted from a 1600 dpi card.
  • The steps involved in decoding are so as indicated in FIG. 36.
  • The decoding process requires the following steps:
      • Scan 1144 the alternative Artcard at three times printed resolution (eg scan 1600 dpi alternative Artcard at 4800 dpi)
      • Extract 1145 the data bitmap from the scanned dots on the card.
      • Reverse 1146 the bitmap if the alternative Artcard was inserted backwards.
      • Unscramble 1147 the encoded data
      • Reed-Solomon 1148 decode the data from the bitmap
        Algorithmic Overview
        Phase 1—Real Time Bit Image Extraction
  • A simple comparison between the available memory (4 MB) and the memory required to hold all the scanned pixels for a 1600 dpi alternative Artcard (172.5 MB) shows that unless the card is read multiple times (not a realistic option), the extraction of the bitmap from the pixel data must be done on the fly, in real time, while the alternative Artcard is moving past the CCD. Two tasks must be accomplished in this phase:
      • Scan the alternative Artcard at 4800 dpi
      • Extract the data bitmap from the scanned dots on the card
  • The rotation and unscrambling of the bit image cannot occur until the whole bit image has been extracted. It is therefore necessary to assign a memory region to hold the extracted bit image. The bit image fits easily within 2 MB, leaving 2 MB for use in the extraction process.
  • Rather than extracting the bit image while looking only at the current scanline of pixels from the CCD, it is possible to allocate a buffer to act as a window onto the alternative Artcard, storing the last N scanlines read. Memory requirements do not allow the entire alternative Artcard to be stored this way (172.5 MB would be required), but allocating 2 MB to store 190 pixel columns (each scanline takes less than 11,000 bytes) makes the bit image extraction process simpler.
  • The 4 MB memory is therefore used as follows:
      • 2 MB for the extracted bit image
      • ˜2 MB for the scanned pixels
      • 1.5 KB for Phase I scratch data (as required by algorithm)
  • The time taken for Phase I is 1.5 seconds, since this is the time taken for the alternative Artcard to travel past the CCD and physically load.
  • Phase 2—Data Extraction from Bit Image
  • Once the bit image has been extracted, it must be unscrambled and potentially rotated 180°. It must then be decoded. Phase 2 has no real-time requirements, in that the alternative Artcard has stopped moving, and we are only concerned with the user's perception of elapsed time. Phase 2 therefore involves the remaining tasks of decoding an alternative Artcard:
      • Re-organize the bit image, reversing it if the alternative Artcard was inserted backwards
      • Unscramble the encoded data
      • Reed-Solomon decode the data from the bit image
  • The input to Phase 2 is the 2 MB bit image buffer. Unscrambling and rotating cannot be performed in situ, so a second 2 MB buffer is required. The 2 MB buffer used to hold scanned pixels in Phase I is no longer required and can be used to store the rotated unscrambled data.
  • The Reed-Solomon decoding task takes the unscrambled bit image and decodes it to 910,082 bytes. The decoding can be performed in situ, or to a specified location elsewhere. The decoding process does not require any additional memory buffers.
  • The 4 MB memory is therefore used as follows:
  • 2 MB for the extracted bit image (from Phase 1)
      • ˜2 MB for the unscrambled, potentially rotated bit image
      • <1 KB for Phase 2 scratch data (as required by algorithm)
  • The time taken for Phase 2 is hardware dependent and is bound by the time taken for Reed-Solomon decoding. Using a dedicated core such as LSI Logic's L64712, or an equivalent CPU/DSP combination, it is estimated that Phase 2 would take 0.32 seconds.
  • Phase 1—Extract Bit Image
  • This is the realtime phase of the algorithm, and is concerned with extracting the bit image from the alternative Artcard as scanned by the CCD.
  • As shown in FIG. 37 Phase 1 can be divided into 2 asynchronous process streams. The first of these streams is simply the real-time reader of alternative Artcard pixels from the CCD, writing the pixels to DRAM. The second stream involves looking at the pixels, and extracting the bits. The second process stream is itself divided into 2 processes. The first process is a global process, concerned with locating the start of the alternative Artcard. The second process is the bit image extraction proper.
  • FIG. 38 illustrates the data flow from a data/process perspective.
  • Timing
  • For an entire 1600 dpi alternative Artcard, it is necessary to read a maximum of 16,252 pixel-columns. Given a total time of 1.5 seconds for the whole alternative Artcard, this implies a maximum time of 92,296 ns per pixel column during the course of the various processes.
  • Process 1 —Read Pixels from CCD
  • The CCD scans the alternative Artcard at 4800 dpi, and generates 11,000 1-byte pixel samples per column. This process simply takes the data from the CCD and writes it to DRAM, completely independently of any other process that is reading the pixel data from DRAM. FIG. 39 illustrates the steps involved.
  • The pixels are written contiguously to a 2 MB buffer that can hold 190 full columns of pixels. The buffer always holds the 190 columns most recently read. Consequently, any process that wants to read the pixel data (such as Processes 2 and 3) must firstly know where to look for a given column, and secondly, be fast enough to ensure that the data required is actually in the buffer.
  • Process 1 makes the current scanline number (CurrentScanLine) available to other processes so they can ensure they are not attempting to access pixels from scanlines that have not been read yet.
  • The time taken to write out a single column of data (11,000 bytes) to DRAM is: 11,000/16*12=8,256 ns.
  • Process 1 therefore uses just under 9% of the available DRAM bandwidth (8256/92296).
  • Process 2—Detect Start of Alternative Artcard
  • This process is concerned with locating the Active Area on a scanned alternative Artcard. The input to this stage is the pixel data from DRAM (placed there by Process 1). The output is a set of bounds for the first 8 data blocks on the alternative Artcard, required as input to Process 3. A high level overview of the process can be seen in FIG. 40.
  • An alternative Artcard can have vertical slop of 1 mm upon insertion. With a rotation of 1 degree there is further vertical slop of 1.5 mm (86 sin 1°). Consequently there is a total vertical slop of 2.5 mm. At 1600 dpi, this equates to a slop of approximately 160 dots. Since a single data block is only 394 dots high, the slop is just under half a data block. To get a better estimate of where the data blocks are located the alternative Artcard itself needs to be detected.
  • Process 2 therefore consists of two parts:
      • Locate the start of the alternative Artcard, and if found,
      • Calculate the bounds of the first 8 data blocks based on the start of the alternative Artcard.
        Locate the Start of the Alternative Artcard
  • The scanned pixels outside the alternative Artcard area are black (the surface can be black plastic or some other non-reflective surface). The border of the alternative Artcard area is white. If we process the pixel columns one by one, and filter the pixels to either black or white, the transition point from black to white will mark the start of the alternative Artcard. The highest level process is as follows:
    for (Column=0; Column < MAX_COLUMN; Column++)
    {
    Pixel = ProcessColumn(Column)
    if (Pixel)
    return (Pixel, Column) // success!
    }

    return failure//no alternative Artcard found.
  • The ProcessColumn function is simple. Pixels from two areas of the scanned column are passed through a threshold filter to determine if they are black or white. It is possible to then wait for a certain number of white pixels and announce the start of the alternative Artcard once the given number has been detected. The logic of processing a pixel column is shown in the following pseudocode. 0 is returned if the alternative Artcard has not been detected during the column. Otherwise the pixel number of the detected location is returned.
    // Try upper region first
    count = 0
    for (i=0; i<UPPER_REGION_BOUND; i++)
    {
    if (GetPixel(column, i) < THRESHOLD)
    {
    count = 0 // pixel is black
    }
    else
    {
    count++ // pixel is white
    if (count > WHITE_ALTERNATIVE ARTCARD)
    return i
    }
    }
    // Try lower region next. Process pixels in reverse
    count = 0
    for (i=MAX_PIXEL_BOUND; i>LOWER_REGION_BOUND; i−−)
    {
    if (GetPixel(column, i) < THRESHOLD)
    {
    count = 0 // pixel is black
    }
    else
    {
    count++ // pixel is white
    if (count > WHITE_ALTERNATIVE ARTCARD)
    return i
    }
    }
    //Not in upper bound or in lower bound. Return failure
    return
    0

    Calculate Data Block Bounds
  • At this stage, the alternative Artcard has been detected. Depending on the rotation of the alternative Artcard, either the top of the alternative Artcard has been detected or the lower part of the alternative Artcard has been detected. The second step of Process 2 determines which was detected and sets the data block bounds for Phase 3 appropriately.
  • A look at Phase 3 reveals that it works on data block segment bounds: each data block has a StartPixel and an EndPixel to determine where to look for targets in order to locate the data block's data region.
  • If the pixel value is in the upper half of the card, it is possible to simply use that as the first StartPixel bounds. If the pixel value is in the lower half of the card, it is possible to move back so that the pixel value is the last segment's EndPixel bounds. We step forwards or backwards by the alternative Artcard data size, and thus set up each segment with appropriate bounds. We are now ready to begin extracting data from the alternative Artcard.
    // Adjust to become first pixel if is lower pixel
    if (pixel > LOWER_REGION_BOUND)
    {
    pixel −= 6 * 1152
    if (pixel < 0)
    pixel = 0
    }
    for (i=0; i<6; i++)
    {
    endPixel = pixel + 1152
    segment[i].MaxPixel = MAX_PIXEL_BOUND
    segment[i].SetBounds(pixel, endPixel)
    pixel = endPixel
    }
  • The MaxPixel value is defined in Process 3, and the SetBounds function simply sets StartPixel and EndPixel clipping with respect to 0 and MaxPixel.
  • Process 3—Extract Bit Data from Pixels
  • This is the heart of the alternative Artcard Reader algorithm. This process is concerned with extracting the bit data from the CCD pixel data. The process essentially creates a bit-image from the pixel data, based on scratch information created by Process 2, and maintained by Process 3. A high level overview of the process can be seen in FIG. 41.
  • Rather than simply read an alternative Artcard's pixel column and determine what pixels belong to what data block, Process 3 works the other way around. It knows where to look for the pixels of a given data block. It does this by dividing a logical alternative Artcard into 8 segments, each containing 8 data blocks as shown in FIG. 42.
  • The segments as shown match the logical alternative Artcard. Physically, the alternative Artcard is likely to be rotated by some amount. The segments remain locked to the logical alternative Artcard structure, and hence are rotation-independent. A given segment can have one of two states:
      • LookingForTargets: where the exact data block position for this segment has not yet been determined.
  • Targets are being located by scanning pixel column data in the bounds indicated by the segment bounds. Once the data block has been located via the targets, and bounds set for black & white, the state changes to ExtractingBitImage.
      • ExtractingBitImage: where the data block has been accurately located, and bit data is being extracted one dot column at a time and written to the alternative Artcard bit image. The following of data block clockmarks gives accurate dot recovery regardless of rotation, and thus the segment bounds are ignored. Once the entire data block has been extracted, new segment bounds are calculated for the next data block based on the current position. The state changes to LookingForTargets.
  • The process is complete when all 64 data blocks have been extracted, 8 from each region.
  • Each data block consists of 595 columns of data, each with 48 bytes. Preferably, the 2 orientation columns for the data block are each extracted at 48 bytes each, giving a total of 28,656 bytes extracted per data block. For simplicity, it is possible to divide the 2 MB of memory into 64×32k chunks. The nth data block for a given segment is stored at the location:
    StartBuffer+(256k*n)
    Data Structure for Segments
  • Each of the 8 segments has an associated data structure. The data structure defining each segment is stored in the scratch data area. The structure can be as set out in the following table:
    DataName Comment
    CurrentState Defines the current state of the segment.
    Can be one of:
    LookingForTargets
    ExtractingBitImage
    Initial value is LookingForTargets
    Used during LookingForTargets:
    StartPixel Upper pixel bound of segment. Initially
    set by Process 2.
    EndPixel Lower pixel bound of segment. Initially
    set by Process 2
    MaxPixel The maximum pixel number for any scanline.
    It is set to the same value for each
    segment: 10,866.
    CurrentColumn Pixel column we're up to while looking
    for targets.
    FinalColumn Defines the last pixel column to look in
    for targets.
    LocatedTargets Points to a list of located Targets.
    PossibleTargets Points to a set of pointers to Target
    structures that represent currently
    investigated pixel shapes that may
    be targets
    AvailableTargets Points to a set of pointers to Target
    structures that are currently unused.
    TargetsFound The number of Targets found so far in
    this data block.
    PossibleTargetCount The number of elements in the
    PossibleTargets list
    AvailabletargetCount The number of elements in the
    AvailableTargets list
    Used during ExtractingBitImage:
    BitImage The start of the Bit Image data area in
    DRAM where to store the next data block:
    Segment 1 = X, Segment 2 = X + 32k etc
    Advances by 256k each time the state
    changes from ExtractingBitImageData to
    Looking ForTargets
    CurrentByte Offset within BitImage where to store
    next extracted byte
    CurrentDotColumn Holds current clockmark/dot column number.
    Set to −8 when transitioning from
    state LookingForTarget to
    ExtractingBitImage.
    UpperClock Coordinate (column/pixel) of current
    upper clockmark/border
    LowerClock Coordinate (column/pixel) of current
    lower clockmark/border
    CurrentDot The center of the current data dot for
    the current dot column. Initially set to
    the center of the first (topmost) dot of
    the data column.
    DataDelta What to add (column/pixel) to CurrentDot
    to advance to the center of the next dot.
    BlackMax Pixel value above which a dot is
    definitely white
    WhiteMin Pixel value below which a dot is
    definitely black
    MidRange The pixel value that has equal likelihood
    of coming from black or white. When all
    smarts have not determined the dot, this
    value is used to determine it. Pixels
    below this value are black, and above it
    are white.

    High Level of Process 3
  • Process 3 simply iterates through each of the segments, performing a single line of processing depending on the segment's current state. The pseudocode is straightforward:
    blockCount = 0
    while (blockCount < 64)
    for (i=0; i<8; i++)
    {
    finishedBlock = segment[i].ProcessState( )
    if (finishedBlock)
    blockCount++
    }
  • Process 3 must be halted by an external controlling process if it has not terminated after a specified amount of time. This will only be the case if the data cannot be extracted. A simple mechanism is to start a countdown after Process 1 has finished reading the alternative Artcard. If Process 3 has not finished by that time, the data from the alternative Artcard cannot be recovered.
  • CurrentState=LookingForTargets
  • Targets are detected by reading columns of pixels, one pixel-column at a time rather than by detecting dots within a given band of pixels (between StartPixel and EndPixel) certain patterns of pixels are detected. The pixel columns are processed one at a time until either all the targets are found, or until a specified number of columns have been processed. At that time the targets can be processed and the data area located via clockmarks. The state is changed to ExtractingBitImage to signify that the data is now to be extracted. If enough valid targets are not located, then the data block is ignored, skipping to a column definitely within the missed data block, and then beginning again the process of looking for the targets in the next data block. This can be seen in the following pseudocode:
    finishedBlock = FALSE
    if(CurrentColumn < Process1.CurrentScanLine)
    {
    ProcessPixelColumn( )
    CurrentColumn++
    }
    if ((TargetsFound == 6) ∥ (CurrentColumn > LastColumn))
    {
    if (TargetsFound >= 2)
    ProcessTargets( )
    if (TargetsFound >= 2)
    {
    BuildClockmarkEstimates( )
    SetBlackAndWhiteBounds( )
    CurrentState = ExtractingBitImage
    CurrentDotColumn = −8
    }
    else
    {
    // data block cannot be recovered. Look for
    // next instead. Must adjust pixel bounds to
    // take account of possible 1 degree rotation.
    finishedBlock = TRUE
    SetBounds(StartPixel−12, EndPixel+12)
    BitImage += 256KB
    CurrentByte = 0
    LastColumn += 1024
    TargetsFound = 0
    }
    }
    return finishedBlock
    ProcessPixelColumn
  • Each pixel column is processed within the specified bounds (between StartPixel and EndPixel) to search for certain patterns of pixels which will identify the targets. The structure of a single target (target number 2) is as previously shown in FIG. 23:
  • From a pixel point of view, a target can be identified by:
      • Left black region, which is a number of pixel columns consisting of large numbers of contiguous black pixels to build up the first part of the target.
      • Target center, which is a white region in the center of further black columns
      • Second black region, which is the 2 black dot columns after the target center
      • Target number, which is a black-surrounded white region that defines the target number by its length
      • Third black region, which is the 2 black columns after the target number
  • An overview of the required process is as shown in FIG. 43.
  • Since identification only relies on black or white pixels, the pixels 1150 from each column are passed through a filter 1151 to detect black or white, and then run length encoded 1152. The run-lengths are then passed to a state machine 1153 that has access to the last 3 run lengths and the 4th last color. Based on these values, possible targets pass through each of the identification stages.
  • The GatherMin&Max process 1155 simply keeps the minimum & maximum pixel values encountered during the processing of the segment. These are used once the targets have been located to set BlackMax, WhiteMin, and MidRange values.
  • Each segment keeps a set of target structures in its search for targets. While the target structures themselves don't move around in memory, several segment variables point to lists of pointers to these target structures. The three pointer lists are repeated here:
    LocatedTargets Points to a set of Target structures that represent
    located targets.
    PossibleTargets Points to a set of pointers to Target structures
    that represent currently investigated pixel
    shapes that may be targets.
    AvailableTargets Points to a set of pointers to Target structures
    that are currently unused.
  • There are counters associated with each of these list pointers: TargetsFound, PossibleTargetCount, and AvailableTargetCount respectively.
  • Before the alternative Artcard is loaded, TargetsFound and PossibleTargetCount are set to 0, and AvailableTargetCount is set to 28 (the maximum number of target structures possible to have under investigation since the minimum size of a target border is 40 pixels, and the data area is approximately 1152 pixels). An example of the target pointer layout is as illustrated in FIG. 44.
  • As potential new targets are found, they are taken from the AvailableTargets list 1157, the target data structure is updated, and the pointer to the structure is added to the PossibleTargets list 1158. When a target is completely verified, it is added to the LocatedTargets list 1159. If a possible target is found not to be a target after all, it is placed back onto the AvailableTargets list 1157. Consequently there are always 28 target pointers in circulation at any time, moving between the lists.
  • The Target data structure 1160 can have the following form:
    DataName Comment
    CurrentState The current state of the target search
    DetectCount Counts how long a target has been in a given state
    StartPixel Where does the target start? All the lines of
    pixels in this target should start within a
    tolerance of this pixel value.
    TargetNumber Which target number is this (according to
    what was read)
    Column Best estimate of the target's center column ordinate
    Pixel Best estimate of the target's center pixel ordinate
  • The ProcessPixelColumn function within the find targets module 1162 (FIG. 43) then, goes through all the run lengths one by one, comparing the runs against existing possible targets (via StartPixel), or creating new possible targets if a potential target is found where none was previously known. In all cases, the comparison is only made if S0.color is white and S1.color is black.
  • The pseudocode for the ProcessPixelColumn set out hereinafter. When the first target is positively identified, the last column to be checked for targets can be determined as being within a maximum distance from it. For 10 rotation, the maximum distance is 18 pixel columns.
    pixel = StartPixel
    t = 0
    target=PossibleTarget[t]
    while ((pixel < EndPixel) && (TargetsFound < 6))
    {
    if ((S0.Color == white) && (S1.Color == black))
    {
    do
    {
    keepTrying = FALSE
    if
    (
    (target != NULL)
    &&
    (target−>AddToTarget(Column, pixel, S1, S2, S3))
    )
    {
    if (target−>CurrentState == IsATarget)
    {
    Remove target from PossibleTargets List
    Add target to LocatedTargets List
    TargetsFound++
    if (TargetsFound == 1)
    FinalColumn = Column + MAX_TARGET_DELTA}
    }
    else if (target−>CurrentState == NotATarget)
    {
    Remove target from PossibleTargets List
    Add target to AvailableTargets List
    keepTrying = TRUE
    }
    else
    {
    t++ // advance to next target
    }
    target = PossibleTarget[t]
    }
    else
    {
    tmp = AvailableTargets[0]
    if (tmp−>AddToTarget(Column,pixel,S1,S2,S3)
    {
    Remove tmp from AvailableTargets list
    Add tmp to PossibleTargets list
    t++ // target t has been shifted right
    }
    }
    } while (keepTrying)
    }
    pixel += S1.RunLength
    Advance S0/S1/S2/S3
    }
  • AddToTarget is a function within the find targets module that determines whether it is possible or not to add the specific run to the given target:
      • If the run is within the tolerance of target's starting position, the run is directly related to the current target, and can therefore be applied to it.
      • If the run starts before the target, we assume that the existing target is still ok, but not relevant to the run. The target is therefore left unchanged, and a return value of FALSE tells the caller that the run was not applied. The caller can subsequently check the run to see if it starts a whole new target of its own.
      • If the run starts after the target, we assume the target is no longer a possible target. The state is changed to be NotATarget, and a return value of TRUE is returned.
  • If the run is to be applied to the target, a specific action is performed based on the current state and set of runs in S1, S2, and S3. The AddToTarget pseudocode is as follows:
    MAX_TARGET_DELTA = 1
    if (CurrentState != NothingKnown)
    {
    if (pixel > StartPixel) // run starts after target
    {
    diff = pixel − StartPixel
    if (diff> MAX_TARGET_DELTA)
    {
    Currentstate = NotATarget
    return TRUE
    }
    }
    else
    {
    diff = StartPixel − pixel
    if (diff> MAX_TARGET_DELTA)
    return FALSE
    }
    }
    runType = DetermineRunType(S1, S2, S3)
    EvaluateState(runType)
    StartPixel = currentPixel
    return TRUE
  • Types of pixel runs are identified in DetermineRunType is as follows:
    Types of Pixel Runs
    Type How identified (S1 is always black)
    TargetBorder S1 = 40 < RunLength < 50
    S2 = white run
    TargetCenter S1 = 15 < RunLength < 26
    S2 = white run with [RunLength < 12]
    S3 = black run with [15 < RunLength < 26]
    TargetNumber S2 = white run with [RunLength <= 40]
  • The EvaluateState procedure takes action depending on the current state and the run type.
  • The actions are shown as follows in tabular form:
    Type of
    CurrentState Pixel Run Action
    NothingKnown TargetBorder DetectCount = 1
    CurrentState = LeftOfCenter
    LeftOfCenter TargetBorder DetectCount++
    if (DetectCount > 24)
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    TargetCenter DetectCount = 1
    CurrentState = InCenter
    Column = currentColumn
    Pixel = currentPixel +
    S1.RunLength
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    InCenter TargetCenter DetectCount++
    tmp = currentPixel +
    S1.RunLength
    if (tmp < Pixel)
    Pixel = tmp
    if (DetectCount > 13)
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    TargetBorder DetectCount = 1
    CurrentState = RightOfCenter
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    RightOfCenter TargetBorder DetectCount++
    if (DetectCount >= 12)
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    TargetNumber DetectCount = 1
    CurrentState = InTargetNumber
    TargetNumber =
    (S2.RunLength+ 2)/6
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    InTargetNumber TargetNumber tmp = (S2.RunLength+ 2)/6
    if (tmp > TargetNumber)
    TargetNumber = tmp
    DetectCount++
    if (DetectCount >= 12)
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    TargetBorder if (DetectCount >= 3)
    CurrentState = IsATarget
    else
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    CurrentState = NotATarget
    IsATarget or
    NotATarget

    Processing Targets
  • The located targets (in the LocatedTargets list) are stored in the order they were located. Depending on alternative Artcard rotation these targets will be in ascending pixel order or descending pixel order. In addition, the target numbers recovered from the targets may be in error. We may have also have recovered a false target. Before the clockmark estimates can be obtained, the targets need to be processed to ensure that invalid targets are discarded, and valid targets have target numbers fixed if in error (e.g. a damaged target number due to dirt). Two main steps are involved:
      • Sort targets into ascending pixel order
      • Locate and fix erroneous target numbers
  • The first step is simple. The nature of the target retrieval means that the data should already be sorted in either ascending pixel or descending pixel. A simple swap sort ensures that if the 6 targets are already sorted correctly a maximum of 14 comparisons is made with no swaps. If the data is not sorted, 14 comparisons are made, with 3 swaps. The following pseudocode shows the sorting process:
    for (i = 0; i < TargetsFound−1; i++)
    {
    oldTarget = LocatedTargets[i]
    bestPixel = oldTarget−>Pixel
    best = i
    j = i+1
    while (j<TargetsFound)
    {
    if (LocatedTargets[j]−> Pixel < bestPixel)
    best = j
    j++
    }
    if (best != i) // move only if necessary
    LocatedTargets[i] = LocatedTargets[best]
    LocatedTargets[best] = oldTarget
    }
    }
  • Locating and fixing erroneous target numbers is only slightly more complex. One by one, each of the N targets found is assumed to be correct. The other targets are compared to this “correct” target and the number of targets that require change should target N be correct is counted. If the number of changes is 0, then all the targets must already be correct. Otherwise the target that requires the fewest changes to the others is used as the base for change. A change is registered if a given target's target number and pixel position do not correlate when compared to the “correct” target's pixel position and target number. The change may mean updating a target's target number, or it may mean elimination of the target. It is possible to assume that ascending targets have pixels in ascending order (since they have already been sorted).
    kPixelFactor = 1/(55 * 3)
    bestTarget = 0
    bestChanges = TargetsFound + 1
    for (i=0; i< TotalTargetsFound; i++)
    {
    numberOfChanges = 0;
    fromPixel = (LocatedTargets[i])−>Pixel
    fromTargetNumber = LocatedTargets[i].TargetNumber
    for (j=1; j< TotalTargetsFound; j++)
    {
    toPixel = LocatedTargets[j]−>Pixel
    deltaPixel = toPixel − fromPixel
    if (deltaPixel >= 0)
    deltaPixel +=
    PIXELS_BETWEEN_TARGET_CENTRES/2
    else
    deltaPixel −=
    PIXELS_BETWEEN_TARGET_CENTRES/2
    targetNumber =deltaPixel * kPixelFactor
    targetNumber += fromTargetNumber
    if
    (
    (targetNumber < 1)∥(targetNumber > 6)
    (targetNumber != LocatedTargets[j]−>
    TargetNumber)
    )
    numberOfChanges++
    }
    if (numberOfChanges < bestChanges)
    {
    bestTarget = i
    bestChanges = numberOfChanges
    }
    if (bestChanges < 2)
    break;
    }
  • In most cases this function will terminate with bestchanges=0, which means no changes are required. Otherwise the changes need to be applied. The functionality of applying the changes is identical to counting the changes (in the pseudocode above) until the comparison with targetNumber. The change application is:
    if ((targetNumber < 1)∥(targetNumber > TARGETS_PER_BLOCK))
    {
    LocatedTargets[j] = NULL
    TargetsFound−−
    }
    else
    {
    LocatedTargets[j]−> TargetNumber = targetNumber
    }
  • At the end of the change loop, the LocatedTargets list needs to be compacted and all NULL targets removed.
  • At the end of this procedure, there may be fewer targets. Whatever targets remain may now be used (at least 2 targets are required) to locate the clockmarks and the data region.
  • Building Clockmark Estimates from Targets
  • As shown previously in FIG. 24, the upper region's first clockmark dot 1126 is 55 dots away from the center of the first target 1124 (which is the same as the distance between target centers). The center of the clockmark dots is a further 1 dot away, and the black border line 1123 is a further 4 dots away from the first clockmark dot. The lower region's first clockmark dot is exactly 7 targets-distance away (7×55 dots) from the upper region's first clockmark dot 1126.
  • It cannot be assumed that Targets 1 and 6 have been located, so it is necessary to use the upper-most and lower-most targets, and use the target numbers to determine which targets are being used. It is necessary at least 2 targets at this point. In addition, the target centers are only estimates of the actual target centers. It is to locate the target center more accurately. The center of a target is white, surrounded by black. We therefore want to find the local maximum in both pixel & column dimensions. This involves reconstructing the continuous image since the maximum is unlikely to be aligned exactly on an integer boundary (our estimate).
  • Before the continuous image can be constructed around the target's center, it is necessary to create a better estimate of the 2 target centers. The existing target centers actually are the top left coordinate of the bounding box of the target center. It is a simple process to go through each of the pixels for the area defining the center of the target, and find the pixel with the highest value. There may be more than one pixel with the same maximum pixel value, but the estimate of the center value only requires one pixel.
  • The pseudocode is straightforward, and is performed for each of the 2 targets:
    CENTER_WIDTH = CENTER_HEIGHT = 12
    maxPixel = 0x00
    for (i=0; i<CENTER_WIDTH; i++)
    for (j=0; j<CENTER_HEIGHT; j++)
    {
    p = GetPixel(column+i, pixel+j)
    if (p > maxPixel)
    {
    maxPixel = p
    centerColumn = column + i
    centerPixel = pixel + j
    }
    }
    Target.Column = centerColumn
    Target.Pixel = centerPixel
  • At the end of this process the target center coordinates point to the whitest pixel of the target, which should be within one pixel of the actual center. The process of building a more accurate position for the target center involves reconstructing the continuous signal for 7 scanline slices of the target, 3 to either side of the estimated target center. The 7 maximum values found (one for each of these pixel dimension slices) are then used to reconstruct a continuous signal in the column dimension and thus to locate the maximum value in that dimension.
    // Given estimates column and pixel, determine a
    // betterColumn and betterPixel as the center of
    // the target
    for (y=0; y<7; y++)
    {
    for (x=0; x<7; x++)
    samples[x] = GetPixel(column−3+y, pixel−3+x)
    FindMax(samples, pos, maxVal)
    reSamples[y] = maxVal
    if(y == 3)
    betterPixel = pos + pixel
    }
    FindMax(reSamples, pos, maxVal)
    betterColumn = pos + column
  • FindMax is a function that reconstructs the original 1 dimensional signal based sample points and returns the position of the maximum as well as the maximum value found. The method of signal reconstruction/resampling used is the Lanczos3 windowed sinc function as shown in FIG. 45.
  • The Lanczos3 windowed sinc function takes 7 (pixel) samples from the dimension being reconstructed, centered around the estimated position X, i.e. at X−3, X−2, X−1, X, X+1, X+2, X+3. We reconstruct points from X−1 to X+1, each at an interval of 0.1, and determine which point is the maximum. The position that is the maximum value becomes the new center. Due to the nature of the kernel, only 6 entries are required in the convolution kernel for points between X and X+1. We use 6 points for X−1 to X, and 6 points for X to X+1, requiring 7 points overall in order to get pixel values from X−1 to X+1 since some of the pixels required are the same.
  • Given accurate estimates for the upper-most target from and lower-most target to, it is possible to calculate the position of the first clockmark dot for the upper and lower regions as follows:
    TARGETS_PER_BLOCK = 6
    numTargetsDiff = to.TargetNum − from.TargetNum
    deltaPixel = (to.Pixel − from.Pixel) / numTargetsDiff
    deltaColumn = (to.Column − from.Column) / numTargetsDiff
    UpperClock.pixel = from.Pixel − (from.TargetNum*deltaPixel)
    UpperClock.column = from.Column−(from.TargetNum*deltaColumn)
    // Given the first dot of the upper clockmark, the
    // first dot of the lower clockmark is straightforward.
    LowerClock.pixel = UpperClock.pixel +
    ((TARGETS_PER_BLOCK+1) * deltaPixel)
    LowerClock.column = UpperClock.column +
    ((TARGETS_PER_BLOCK+1) * deltaColumn)
  • This gets us to the first clockmark dot. It is necessary move the column position a further 1 dot away from the data area to reach the center of the clockmark. It is necessary to also move the pixel position a further 4 dots away to reach the center of the border line. The pseudocode values for deltΔcolumn and deltaPixel are based on a 55 dot distance (the distance between targets), so these deltas must be scaled by 1/55 and 4/55 respectively before being applied to the clockmark coordinates. This is represented as:
    • kDeltaDotFactor=1/DOTS_BETWEEN_TARGET_CENTRES
    • deltΔcolumn*=kDeltaDotFactor
    • deltaPixel*=4 *kDeltaDotFactor
    • UpperClock.pixel−=deltaPixel
    • UpperClock.column−=deltaColumn
    • LowerClock.pixel+=deltaPixel
    • LowerClock.column+=deltaColumn
  • UpperClock and LowerClock are now valid clockmark estimates for the first clockmarks directly in line with the centers of the targets.
  • Setting Black and White Pixel/Dot Ranges
  • Before the data can be extracted from the data area, the pixel ranges for black and white dots needs to be ascertained. The minimum and maximum pixels encountered during the search for targets were stored in WhiteMin and BlackMax respectively, but these do not represent valid values for these variables with respect to data extraction. They are merely used for storage convenience. The following pseudocode shows the method of obtaining good values for WhiteMin and BlackMax based on the min & max pixels encountered:
    • MinPixel=WhiteMin
    • MaxPixel=BlackMax
    • MidRange=(MinPixel+MaxPixel)/2
    • WhiteMin=MaxPixel−105
    • BlackMax=MinPixel+84
      CurrentState=ExtractingBitImage
  • The ExtractingBitImage state is one where the data block has already been accurately located via the targets, and bit data is currently being extracted one dot column at a time and written to the alternative Artcard bit image. The following of data block clockmarks/borders gives accurate dot recovery regardless of rotation, and thus the segment bounds are ignored. Once the entire data block has been extracted (597 columns of 48 bytes each; 595 columns of data+2 orientation columns), new segment bounds are calculated for the next data block based on the current position. The state is changed to LookingForTargets.
  • Processing a given dot column involves two tasks:
      • The first task is to locate the specific dot column of data via the clockmarks.
      • The second task is to run down the dot column gathering the bit values, one bit per dot.
  • These two tasks can only be undertaken if the data for the column has been read off the alternative Artcard and transferred to DRAM. This can be determined by checking what scanline Process 1 is up to, and comparing it to the clockmark columns. If the dot data is in DRAM we can update the clockmarks and then extract the data from the column before advancing the clockmarks to the estimated value for the next dot column. The process overview is given in the following pseudocode, with specific functions explained hereinafter:
    finishedBlock = FALSE
    if((UpperClock.column < Process1.CurrentScanLine)
    &&
    (LowerClock.column < Process1.CurrentScanLine))
    {
    DetermineAccurateClockMarks( )
    DetermineDataInfo( )
    if (CurrentDotColumn >= 0)
    ExtractDataFromColumn( )
    AdvanceClockMarks( )
    if (CurrentDotColumn == FINAL_COLUMN)
    {
    finishedBlock = TRUE
    currentState = LookingForTargets
    SetBounds(UpperClock.pixel, LowerClock.pixel)
    BitImage += 256KB
    CurrentByte = 0
    TargetsFound = 0
    }
    }
    return finishedBlock
  • Locating the Dot Column
  • A given dot column needs to be located before the dots can be read and the data extracted. This is accomplished by following the clockmarks/borderline along the upper and lower boundaries of the data block. A software equivalent of a phase-locked-loop is used to ensure that even if the clockmarks have been damaged, good estimations of clockmark positions will be made. FIG. 46 illustrates an example data block's top left which corner reveals that there are clockmarks 3 dots high 1166 extending out to the target area, a white row, and then a black border line.
  • Initially, an estimation of the center of the first black clockmark position is provided (based on the target positions). We use the black border 1168 to achieve an accurate vertical position (pixel), and the clockmark eg. 1166 to get an accurate horizontal position (column). These are reflected in the UpperClock and LowerClock positions.
  • The clockmark estimate is taken and by looking at the pixel data in its vicinity, the continuous signal is reconstructed and the exact center is determined. Since we have broken out the two dimensions into a clockmark and border, this is a simple one-dimensional process that needs to be performed twice. However, this is only done every second dot column, when there is a black clockmark to register against. For the white clockmarks we simply use the estimate and leave it at that. Alternatively, we could update the pixel coordinate based on the border each dot column (since it is always present). In practice it is sufficient to update both ordinates every other column (with the black clockmarks) since the resolution being worked at is so fine. The process therefore becomes:
    // Turn the estimates of the clockmarks into accurate
    // positions only when there is a black clockmark
    // (ie every 2nd dot column, starting from −8)
    if (Bit0(CurrentDotColumn) == 0) // even column
    {
    DetermineAccurateUpperDotCenter( )
    DetermineAccurateLowerDotCenter( )
    }
  • If there is a deviation by more than a given tolerance (MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION), the found signal is ignored and only deviation from the estimate by the maximum tolerance is allowed. In this respect the functionality is similar to that of a phase-locked loop. Thus DetermineAccurateUpperDotCenter is implemented via the following pseudocode:
    // Use the estimated pixel position of
    // the border to determine where to look for
    // a more accurate clockmark center. The clockmark
    // is 3 dots high so even if the estimated position
    // of the border is wrong, it won't affect the
    // fixing of the clockmark position.
    MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION = 0.5
    diff = GetAccurateColumn(UpperClock.column,
     UpperClock.pixel+(3*PIXELS_PER_DOT))
    diff −= UpperClock.column
    if (diff > MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION)
    diff = MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION
    else
    if (diff < −MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION)
    diff = −MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION
    UpperClock.column += diff
    // Use the newly obtained clockmark center to
    // determine a more accurate border position.
    diff = GetAccuratePixel(UpperClock.column, UpperClock.pixel)
    diff −= UpperClock.pixel
    if (diff > MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION)
    diff = MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION
    else
    if (diff < −MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION)
    diff = −MAX_CLOCKMARK_DEVIATION
    UpperClock.pixel += diff
  • DetermineAccurateLowerDotCenter is the same, except that the direction from the border to the clockmark is in the negative direction (−3 dots rather than +3 dots).
  • GetAccuratePixel and GetAccurateColumn are functions that determine an accurate dot center given a coordinate, but only from the perspective of a single dimension. Determining accurate dot centers is a process of signal reconstruction and then finding the location where the minimum signal value is found (this is different to locating a target center, which is locating the maximum value of the signal since the target center is white, not black). The method chosen for signal reconstruction/resampling for this application is the Lanczos3 windowed sinc function as previously discussed with reference to FIG. 45.
  • It may be that the clockmark or border has been damaged in some way—perhaps it has been scratched. If the new center value retrieved by the resampling differs from the estimate by more than a tolerance amount, the center value is only moved by the maximum tolerance. If it is an invalid position, it should be close enough to use for data retrieval, and future clockmarks will resynchronize the position.
  • Determining the Center of the First Data Dot and the Deltas to Subsequent Dots
  • Once an accurate UpperClock and LowerClock position has been determined, it is possible to calculate the center of the first data dot (CurrentDot), and the delta amounts to be added to that center position in order to advance to subsequent dots in the column (DataDelta).
  • The first thing to do is calculate the deltas for the dot column. This is achieved simply by subtracting the UpperClock from the LowerClock, and then dividing by the number of dots between the two points. It is possible to actually multiply by the inverse of the number of dots since it is constant for an alternative Artcard, and multiplying is faster. It is possible to use different constants for obtaining the deltas in pixel and column dimensions. The delta in pixels is the distance between the two borders, while the delta in columns is between the centers of the two clockmarks. Thus the function DetermineDatalnfo is two parts. The first is given by the pseudocode:
    • kDeltaColumnFactor=1/(DOTS_PER_DATA_COLUMN+2+2−1)
    • kDeltaPixelFactor=1/(DOTS_PER_DATA_COLUMN+5+5−1)
    • delta=LowerClock.column−UpperClock.column
    • DataDelta.column=delta*kDeltaColumnFactor
    • delta=LowerClock.pixel−UpperClock.pixel
    • DataDelta.pixel=delta−kDeltaPixelFactor
  • It is now possible to determine the center of the first data dot of the column. There is a distance of 2 dots from the center of the clockmark to the center of the first data dot, and 5 dots from the center of the border to the center of the first data dot. Thus the second part of the function is given by the pseudocode:
    • CurrentDot.column=UpperClock.column+(2*DataDelta.column)
    • CurrentDot.pixel=UpperClock.pixel+(5*DataDelta.pixel)
      Running Down a Dot Column
  • Since the dot column has been located from the phase-locked loop tracking the clockmarks, all that remains is to sample the dot column at the center of each dot down that column. The variable CurrentDot points is determined to the center of the first dot of the current column. We can get to the next dot of the column by simply adding DataDelta (2 additions: 1 for the column ordinate, the other for the pixel ordinate). A sample of the dot at the given coordinate (bi-linear interpolation) is taken, and a pixel value representing the center of the dot is determined. The pixel value is then used to determine the bit value for that dot. However it is possible to use the pixel value in context with the center value for the two surrounding dots on the same dot line to make a better bit judgement.
  • We can be assured that all the pixels for the dots in the dot column being extracted are currently loaded in DRAM, for if the two ends of the line (clockmarks) are in DRAM, then the dots between those two clockmarks must also be in DRAM. Additionally, the data block height is short enough (only 384 dots high) to ensure that simple deltas are enough to traverse the length of the line. One of the reasons the card is divided into 8 data blocks high is that we cannot make the same rigid guarantee across the entire height of the card that we can about a single data block.
  • The high level process of extracting a single line of data (48 bytes) can be seen in the following pseudocode. The dataBuffer pointer increments as each byte is stored, ensuring that consecutive bytes and columns of data are stored consecutively.
    bitCount = 8
    curr = 0x00 // definitely black
    next = GetPixel(CurrentDot)
    for (i=0; i < DOTS_PER_DATA_COLUMN; i++)
    {
    CurrentDot += DataDelta
    prev = curr
    curr = next
    next = GetPixel(CurrentDot)
    bit = DetermineCenterDot(prev, curr, next)
    byte = (byte << 1) | bit
    bitCount−−
    if (bitCount == 0)
    {
    *(BitImage | CurrentByte) = byte
    CurrentByte++
    bitCount = 8
    }
    }
  • The GetPixel function takes a dot coordinate (fixed point) and samples 4 CCD pixels to arrive at a center pixel value via bilinear interpolation.
  • The DetermineCenterDot function takes the pixel values representing the dot centers to either side of the dot whose bit value is being determined, and attempts to intelligently guess the value of that center dot's bit value. From the generalized blurring curve of FIG. 33 there are three common cases to consider:
      • The dot's center pixel value is lower than WhiteMin, and is therefore definitely a black dot. The bit value is therefore definitely 1.
      • The dot's center pixel value is higher than BlackMax, and is therefore definitely a white dot. The bit value is therefore definitely 0.
      • The dot's center pixel value is somewhere between BlackMax and WhiteMin. The dot may be black, and it may be white. The value for the bit is therefore in question. A number of schemes can be devised to make a reasonable guess as to the value of the bit. These schemes must balance complexity against accuracy, and also take into account the fact that in some cases, there is no guaranteed solution. In those cases where we make a wrong bit decision, the bit's Reed-Solomon symbol will be in error, and must be corrected by the Reed-Solomon decoding stage in Phase 2.
  • The scheme used to determine a dot's value if the pixel value is between BlackMax and WhiteMin is not too complex, but gives good results. It uses the pixel values of the dot centers to the left and right of the dot in question, using their values to help determine a more likely value for the center dot:
      • If the two dots to either side are on the white side of MidRange (an average dot value), then we can guess that if the center dot were white, it would likely be a “definite” white. The fact that it is in the not-sure region would indicate that the dot was black, and had been affected by the surrounding white dots to make the value less sure. The dot value is therefore assumed to be black, and hence the bit value is 1.
      • If the two dots to either side are on the black side of MidRange, then we can guess that if the center dot were black, it would likely be a “definite” black. The fact that it is in the not-sure region would indicate that the dot was white, and had been affected by the surrounding black dots to make the value less sure. The dot value is therefore assumed to be white, and hence the bit value is 0.
      • If one dot is on the black side of MidRange, and the other dot is on the white side of MidRange, we simply use the center dot value to decide. If the center dot is on the black side of MidRange, we choose black (bit value 1). Otherwise we choose white (bit value 0).
  • The logic is represented by the following:
    if (pixel < WhiteMin) //definitely black
    bit = 0x01
    else
    if (pixel > BlackMax) //definitely white
    bit = 0x00
    else
    if ((prev > MidRange) && (next> MidRange)) //prob black
    bit = 0x01
    else
    if ((prev < MidRange) && (next < MidRange))//prob white
    bit = 0x00
    else
    if (pixel < MidRange)
    bit = 0x01
    else
    bit = 0x00
  • From this one can see that using surrounding pixel values can give a good indication of the value of the center dot's state. The scheme described here only uses the dots from the same row, but using a single dot line history (the previous dot line) would also be straightforward as would be alternative arrangements.
  • Updating Clockmarks for the Next Column
  • Once the center of the first data dot for the column has been determined, the clockmark values are no longer needed. They are conveniently updated in readiness for the next column after the data has been retrieved for the column. Since the clockmark direction is perpendicular to the traversal of dots down the dot column, it is possible to use the pixel delta to update the column, and subtract the column delta to update the pixel for both clocks:
    • UpperClock.column+=DataDelta.pixel
    • LowerClock.column+=DataDelta.pixel
    • UpperClock.pixel−=DataDelta.column
    • LowerClock.pixel−=DataDelta.column
  • These are now the estimates for the next dot column.
  • Timing
  • The timing requirement will be met as long as DRAM utilization does not exceed 100%, and the addition of parallel algorithm timing multiplied by the algorithm DRAM utilization does not exceed 100%. DRAM utilization is specified relative to Process 1, which writes each pixel once in a consecutive manner, consuming 9% of the DRAM bandwidth.
  • The timing as described in this section, shows that the DRAM is easily able to cope with the demands of the alternative Artcard Reader algorithm. The timing bottleneck will therefore be the implementation of the algorithm in terms of logic speed, not DRAM access. The algorithms have been designed however, with simple architectures in mind, requiring a minimum number of logical operations for every memory cycle. From this point of view, as long as the implementation state machine or equivalent CPU/DSP architecture is able to perform as described in the following sub-sections, the target speed will be met.
  • Locating the Targets
  • Targets are located by reading pixels within the bounds of a pixel column. Each pixel is read once at most. Assuming a run-length encoder that operates fast enough, the bounds on the location of targets is memory access. The accesses will therefore be no worse than the timing for Process 1, which means a 9% utilization of the DRAM bandwidth.
  • The total utilization of DRAM during target location (including Process 1) is therefore 18%, meaning that the target locator will always be catching up to the alternative Artcard image sensor pixel reader.
  • Processing the Targets
  • The timing for sorting and checking the target numbers is trivial. The finding of better estimates for each of the two target centers involves 12 sets of 12 pixel reads, taking a total of 144 reads. However the fixing of accurate target centers is not trivial, requiring 2 sets of evaluations. Adjusting each target center requires 8 sets of 20 different 6-entry convolution kernels. Thus this totals 8×20×6 multiply-accumulates=960. In addition, there are 7 sets of 7 pixels to be retrieved, requiring 49 memory accesses. The total number per target is therefore 144+960+49=1153, which is approximately the same number of pixels in a column of pixels (1152). Thus each target evaluation consumes the time taken by otherwise processing a row of pixels. For two targets we effectively consume the time for 2 columns of pixels.
  • A target is positively identified on the first pixel column after the target number. Since there are 2 dot columns before the orientation column, there are 6 pixel columns. The Target Location process effectively uses up the first of the pixel columns, but the remaining 5 pixel columns are not processed at all. Therefore the data area can be located in ⅖ of the time available without impinging on any other process time.
  • The remaining ⅗ of the time available is ample for the trivial task of assigning the ranges for black and white pixels, a task that may take a couple of machine cycles at most.
  • Extracting Data
  • There are two parts to consider in terms of timing:
      • Getting accurate clockmarks and border values
      • Extracting dot values
  • Clockmarks and border values are only gathered every second dot column. However each time a clockmark estimate is updated to become more accurate, 20 different 6-entry convolution kernels must be evaluated. On average there are 2 of these per dot column (there are 4 every 2 dot-columns). Updating the pixel ordinate based on the border only requires 7 pixels from the same pixel scanline. Updating the column ordinate however, requires 7 pixels from different columns, hence different scanlines. Assuming worst case scenario of a cache miss for each scanline entry and 2 cache misses for the pixels in the same scanline, this totals 8 cache misses.
  • Extracting the dot information involves only 4 pixel reads per dot (rather than the average 9 that define the dot). Considering the data area of 1152 pixels (384 dots), at best this will save 72 cache reads by only reading 4 pixel dots instead of 9. The worst case is a rotation of 10 which is a single pixel translation every 57 pixels, which gives only slightly worse savings.
  • It can then be safely said that, at worst, we will be reading fewer cache lines less than that consumed by the pixels in the data area. The accesses will therefore be no worse than the timing for Process 1, which implies a 9% utilization of the DRAM bandwidth.
  • The total utilization of DRAM during data extraction (including Process 1) is therefore 18%, meaning that the data extractor will always be catching up to the alternative Artcard image sensor pixel reader. This has implications for the Process Targets process in that the processing of targets can be performed by a relatively inefficient method if necessary, yet still catch up quickly during the extracting data process.
  • Phase 2—Decode Bit Image
  • Phase 2 is the non-real-time phase of alternative Artcard data recovery algorithm. At the start of Phase 2 a bit image has been extracted from the alternative Artcard. It represents the bits read from the data regions of the alternative Artcard. Some of the bits will be in error, and perhaps the entire data is rotated 180° because the alternative Artcard was rotated when inserted. Phase 2 is concerned with reliably extracting the original data from this encoded bit image. There are basically 3 steps to be carried out as illustrated in FIG. 48:
      • Reorganize the bit image, reversing it if the alternative Artcard was inserted backwards
      • Unscramble the encoded data
      • Reed-Solomon decode the data from the bit image
  • Each of the 3 steps is defined as a separate process, and performed consecutively, since the output of one is required as the input to the next. It is straightforward to combine the first two steps into a single process, but for the purposes of clarity, they are treated separately here.
  • From a data/process perspective, Phase 2 has the structure as illustrated in FIG. 49.
  • The timing of Processes 1 and 2 are likely to be negligible, consuming less than {fraction (1/1000)}th of a second between them. Process 3 (Reed Solomon decode) consumes approximately 0.32 seconds, making this the total time required for Phase 2.
  • Reorganize the bit image, reversing it if necessary The bit map in DRAM now represents the retrieved data from the alternative Artcard. However the bit image is not contiguous. It is broken into 64 32 k chunks, one chunk for each data block. Each 32 k chunk contains only 28,656 useful bytes:
    • 48 bytes from the leftmost Orientation Column
    • 28560 bytes from the data region proper
    • 48 bytes from the rightmost Orientation Column
    • 4112 unused bytes
  • The 2 MB buffer used for pixel data (stored by Process 1 of Phase 1) can be used to hold the reorganized bit image, since pixel data is not required during Phase 2. At the end of the reorganization, a correctly oriented contiguous bit image will be in the 2 MB pixel buffer, ready for Reed-Solomon decoding.
  • If the card is correctly oriented, the leftmost Orientation Column will be white and the rightmost Orientation Column will be black. If the card has been rotated 180°, then the leftmost Orientation Column will be black and the rightmost Orientation Column will be white.
  • A simple method of determining whether the card is correctly oriented or not, is to go through each data block, checking the first and last 48 bytes of data until a block is found with an overwhelming ratio of black to white bits. The following pseudocode demonstrates this, returning TRUE if the card is correctly oriented, and FALSE if it is not:
    totalCountL = 0
    totalCountR = 0
    for (i=0; i<64; i++)
    {
    blackCountL = 0
    blackCountR = 0
    currBuff = dataBuffer
    for (j=0; j<48; j++)
    {
    blackCountL += CountBits(*currBuff)
    currBuff++
    }
    currBuff += 28560
    for (j=0; j<48; j++)
    {
    blackCountR += CountBits(*currBuff)
    currBuff++
    }
    dataBuffer += 32k
    if (blackCountR > (blackCountL * 4))
    return TRUE
    if (blackCountL > (blackCountR * 4))
    return FALSE
    totalCountL += blackCountL
    totalCountR += blackCountR
    }
    return (totalCountR > totalCountL)
  • The data must now be reorganized, based on whether the card was oriented correctly or not. The simplest case is that the card is correctly oriented. In this case the data only needs to be moved around a little to remove the orientation columns and to make the entire data contiguous. This is achieved very simply in situ, as described by the following pseudocode:
    DATA_BYTES_PER_DATA_BLOCK = 28560
    to = dataBuffer
    from = dataBuffer + 48) // left orientation column
    for (i=0; i<64; i++)
    {
    BlockMove(from, to, DATA_BYTES_PER_DATA_BLOCK)
    from += 32k
    to += DATA_BYTES_PER_DATA_BLOCK
    }
  • The other case is that the data actually needs to be reversed. The algorithm to reverse the data is quite simple, but for simplicity, requires a 256-byte table Reverse where the value of Reverse[N] is a bit-reversed N.
    DATA_BYTES_PER_DATA_BLOCK = 28560
    to = outBuffer
    for (i=0; i<64; i++)
    {
    from = dataBuffer + (i * 32k)
    from += 48 // skip orientation column
    from += DATA_BYTES_PER_DATA_BLOCK − 1 // end of block
    for (j=0; j < DATA_BYTES_PER_DATA_BLOCK; j++)
    {
    *to++ = Reverse[*from]
    from− −
    }
    }
  • The timing for either process is negligible, consuming less than {fraction (1/1000)}th of a second:
      • 2 MB contiguous reads (2048/16×12 ns=1,536 ns)
      • 2 MB effectively contiguous byte writes (2048/16×12 ns=1,536 ns)
        Unscramble the Encoded Image
  • The bit image is now 1,827,840 contiguous, correctly oriented, but scrambled bytes. The bytes must be unscrambled to create the 7,168 Reed-Solomon blocks, each 255 bytes long. The unscrambling process is quite straightforward, but requires a separate output buffer since the unscrambling cannot be performed in situ. FIG. 49 illustrates the unscrambling process conducted memory.
  • The following pseudocode defines how to perform the unscrambling process:
    • groupSize=255
    • numBytes=1827840;
    • in Buffer=scrambledBuffer;
    • outBuffer=unscrambledBuffer;
    • for (i=0; i<groupSize; i++)
      • for (j=i; j<numBytes; j+=groupSize)
        • outBuffer[j]=*inBuffer++
  • The timing for this process is negligible, consuming less than {fraction (1/1000)}th of a second:
      • 2 MB contiguous reads (2048/16×12 ns=1,536 ns)
      • 2 MB non-contiguous byte writes (2048×12 ns=24,576 ns)
  • At the end of this process the unscrambled data is ready for Reed-Solomon decoding.
  • Reed Solomon Decode
  • The final part of reading an alternative Artcard is the Reed-Solomon decode process, where approximately 2 MB of unscrambled data is decoded into approximately 1 MB of valid alternative Artcard data.
  • The algorithm performs the decoding one Reed-Solomon block at a time, and can (if desired) be performed in situ, since the encoded block is larger than the decoded block, and the redundancy bytes are stored after the data bytes.
  • The first 2 Reed-Solomon blocks are control blocks, containing information about the size of the data to be extracted from the bit image. This meta-information must be decoded first, and the resultant information used to decode the data proper. The decoding of the data proper is simply a case of decoding the data blocks one at a time. Duplicate data blocks can be used if a particular block fails to decode.
  • The highest level of the Reed-Solomon decode is set out in pseudocode:
    // Constants for Reed Solomon decode
    sourceBlockLength = 255;
    destBlockLength = 127;
    numControlBlocks = 2;
    // Decode the control information
    if (! GetControlData(source, destBlocks, lastBlock))
    return error
    destBytes = ((destBlocks−1) * destBlockLength) + lastBlock
    offsetToNextDuplicate = destBlocks * sourceBlockLength
    // Skip the control blocks and position at data
    source += numControlBlocks * sourceBlockLength
    // Decode each of the data blocks, trying
    // duplicates as necessary
    blocksInError = 0;
    for (i=0; i<destBlocks; i++)
    {
    found = DecodeBlock(source, dest);
    if (! found)
    {
    duplicate = source + offsetToNextDuplicate
    while ((! found) && (duplicate<sourceEnd))
    {
    found = DecodeBlock(duplicate, dest)
    duplicate += offsetToNextDuplicate
    }
    }
    if (! found)
    blocksInError++
    source += sourceBlockLength
    dest += destBlockLength
    }
    return destBytes and blocksInError
  • DecodeBlock is a standard Reed Solomon block decoder using m=8 and t=64.
  • The GetControlData function is straightforward as long as there are no decoding errors. The function simply calls DecodeBlock to decode one control block at a time until successful. The control parameters can then be extracted from the first 3 bytes of the decoded data (destBlocks is stored in the bytes 0 and 1, and lastblock is stored in byte 2). If there are decoding errors the function must traverse the 32 sets of 3 bytes and decide which is the most likely set value to be correct. One simple method is to find 2 consecutive equal copies of the 3 bytes, and to declare those values the correct ones. An alternative method is to count occurrences of the different sets of 3 bytes, and announce the most common occurrence to be the correct one.
  • The time taken to Reed-Solomon decode depends on the implementation. While it is possible to use a dedicated core to perform the Reed-Solomon decoding process (such as LSI Logic's L64712), it is preferable to select a CPU/DSP combination that can be more generally used throughout the embedded system (usually to do something with the decoded data) depending on the application. Of course decoding time must be fast enough with the CPU/DSP combination.
  • The L64712 has a throughput of 50 Mbits per second (around 6.25 MB per second), so the time is bound by the speed of the Reed-Solomon decoder rather than the maximum 2 MB read and 1 MB write memory access time. The time taken in the worst case (all 2 MB requires decoding) is thus {fraction (2/6)}.25s=approximately 0.32 seconds. Of course, many further refinements are possible including the following:
  • The blurrier the reading environment, the more a given dot is influenced by the surrounding dots. The current reading algorithm of the preferred embodiment has the ability to use the surrounding dots in the same column in order to make a better decision about a dot's value. Since the previous column's dots have already been decoded, a previous column dot history could be useful in determining the value of those dots whose pixel values are in the not-sure range.
  • A different possibility with regard to the initial stage is to remove it entirely, make the initial bounds of the data blocks larger than necessary and place greater intelligence into the ProcessingTargets functions. This may reduce overall complexity. Care must be taken to maintain data block independence.
  • Further the control block mechanism can be made more robust:
      • The control block could be the first and last blocks rather than make them contiguous (as is the case now). This may give greater protection against certain pathological damage scenarios.
      • The second refinement is to place an additional level of redundancy/error detection into the control block structure to be used if the Reed-Solomon decode step fails. Something as simple as parity might improve the likelihood of control information if the Reed-Solomon stage fails.
        Data Card Reader
  • FIG. 51, there is illustrated one form of card reader 500 which allows for the insertion of Artcards 9 for reading. FIG. 50 shows an exploded perspective of the reader of FIG. 51. Cardreader is interconnected to a computer system and includes a CCD reading mechanism 35. The cardreader includes pinch rollers 506, 507 for pinching an inserted Artcard 9. One of the roller e.g. 506 is driven by an Artcard motor 37 for the advancement of the card 9 between the two rollers 506 and 507 at a uniformed speed. The Artcard 9 is passed over a series of LED lights 512 which are encased within a clear plastic mould 514 having a semi circular cross section. The cross section focuses the light from the LEDs eg 512 onto the surface of the card 9 as it passes by the LEDs 512. From the surface it is reflected to a high resolution linear CCD 34 which is constructed to a resolution of approximately 480 dpi. The surface of the Artcard 9 is encoded to the level of approximately 1600 dpi hence, the linear CCD 34 supersamples the Artcard surface with an approximately three times multiplier. The Artcard 9 is further driven at a speed such that the linear CCD 34 is able to supersample in the direction of Artcard movement at a rate of approximately 4800 readings per inch. The scanned Artcard CCD data is forwarded from the Artcard reader to ACP 31 for processing. A sensor 49, which can comprise a light sensor acts to detect of the presence of the card 13.
  • The CCD reader includes a bottom substrate 516, a top substrate 514 which comprises a transparent molded plastic. In between the two substrates is inserted the linear CCD array 34 which comprises a thin long linear CCD array constructed by means of semi-conductor manufacturing processes.
  • Turning to FIG. 52, there is illustrated a side perspective view, partly in section, of an example construction of the CCD reader unit. The series of LEDs eg. 512 are operated to emit light when a card 9 is passing across the surface of the CCD reader 34. The emitted light is transmitted through a portion of the top substrate 523. The substrate includes a portion eg. 529 having a curved circumference so as to focus light emitted from LED 512 to a point eg. 532 on the surface of the card 9. The focused light is reflected from the point 532 towards the CCD array 34. A series of microlenses eg. 534, shown in exaggerated form, are formed on the surface of the top substrate 523. The microlenses 523 act to focus light received across the surface to the focused down to a point 536 which corresponds to point on the surface of the CCD reader 34 for sensing of light falling on the light sensing portion of the CCD array 34.
  • A number of refinements of the above arrangement are possible. For example, the sensing devices on the linear CCD 34 may be staggered. The corresponding microlenses 34 can also be correspondingly formed as to focus light into a staggered series of spots so as to correspond to the staggered CCD sensors.
  • To assist reading, the data surface area of the Artcard 9 is modulated with a checkerboard pattern as previously discussed with reference to FIG. 5. Other forms of high frequency modulation may be possible however.
  • It will be evident that an Artcard printer can be provided as for the printing out of data on storage Artcard. Hence, the Artcard system can be utilized as a general form of information distribution outside of the Artcam device. An Artcard printer can prints out Artcards on high quality print surfaces and multiple Artcards can be printed on same sheets and later separated. On a second surface of the Artcard 9 can be printed information relating to the files etc. stored on the Artcard 9 for subsequent storage.
  • Hence, the Artcard system allows for a simplified form of storage which is suitable for use in place of other forms of storage such as CD ROMs, magnetic disks etc. The Artcards 9 can also be mass produced and thereby produced in a substantially inexpensive form for redistribution.
  • Print Rolls
  • Turning to FIG. 54, there is illustrated the print roll 42 and print-head portions of the Artcam. The paper/film 611 is fed in a continuous “web-like” process to a printing mechanism 15 which includes further pinch rollers 616-619 and a print head 44.
  • The pinch roller 613 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) and upon rotation of the print roller 613, “paper” in the form of film 611 is forced through the printing mechanism 615 and out of the picture output slot 6. A rotary guillotine mechanism (not shown) is utilised to cut the roll of paper 611 at required photo sizes.
  • It is therefore evident that the printer roll 42 is responsible for supplying “paper” 611 to the print mechanism 615 for printing of photographically imaged pictures.
  • In FIG. 55, there is shown an exploded perspective of the print roll 42. The printer roll 42 includes output printer paper 611 which is output under the operation of pinching rollers 612, 613.
  • Referring now to FIG. 56, there is illustrated a more fully exploded perspective view, of the print roll 42 of FIG. 55 without the “paper” film roll. The print roll 42 includes three main parts comprising ink reservoir section 620, paper roll sections 622, 623 and outer casing sections 626, 627.
  • Turning first to the ink reservoir section 620, which includes the ink reservoir or ink supply sections 633. The ink for printing is contained within three bladder type containers 630-632. The printer roll 42 is assumed to provide full color output inks. Hence, a first ink reservoir or bladder container 630 contains cyan colored ink. A second reservoir 631 contains magenta colored ink and a third reservoir 632 contains yellow ink. Each of the reservoirs 630-632, although having different volumetric dimensions, are designed to have substantially the same volumetric size.
  • The ink reservoir sections 621, 633, in addition to cover 624 can be made of plastic sections and are designed to be mated together by means of heat sealing, ultra violet radiation, etc. Each of the equally sized ink reservoirs 630-632 is connected to a corresponding ink channel 639-641 for allowing the flow of ink from the reservoir 630-632 to a corresponding ink output port 635-637. The ink reservoir 632 having ink channel 641, and output port 637, the ink reservoir 631 having ink channel 640 and output port 636, and the ink reservoir 630 having ink channel 639 and output port 637.
  • In operation, the ink reservoirs 630-632 can be filled with corresponding ink and the section 633 joined to the section 621. The ink reservoir sections 630-632, being collapsible bladders, allow for ink to traverse ink channels 639-641 and therefore be in fluid communication with the ink output ports 635-637. Further, if required, an air inlet port can also be provided to allow the pressure associated with ink channel reservoirs 630-632 to be maintained as required.
  • The cap 624 can be joined to the ink reservoir section 620 so as to form a pressurized cavity, accessible by the air pressure inlet port.
  • The ink reservoir sections 621, 633 and 624 are designed to be connected together as an integral unit and to be inserted inside printer roll sections 622, 623. The printer roll sections 622, 623 are designed to mate together by means of a snap fit by means of male portions 645-647 mating with corresponding female portions (not shown). Similarly, female portions 654-656 are designed to mate with corresponding male portions 660-662. The paper roll sections 622, 623 are therefore designed to be snapped together. One end of the film within the role is pinched between the two sections 622, 623 when they are joined together. The print film can then be rolled on the print roll sections 622, 625 as required.
  • As noted previously, the ink reservoir sections 620, 621, 633, 624 are designed to be inserted inside the paper roll sections 622, 623. The printer roll sections 622, 623 are able to be rotatable around stationery ink reservoir sections 621, 633 and 624 to dispense film on demand.
  • The outer casing sections 626 and 627 are further designed to be coupled around the print roller sections 622, 623. In addition to each end of pinch rollers eg 612, 613 is designed to clip in to a corresponding cavity eg 670 in cover 626, 627 with roller 613 being driven externally (not shown) to feed the print film and out of the print roll.
  • Finally, a cavity 677 can be provided in the ink reservoir sections 620, 621 for the insertion and gluing of an silicon chip integrated circuit type device 53 for the storage of information associated with the print roll 42.
  • As shown in FIG. 56, the print roll 42 is designed to be inserted into the Arteam camera device so as to couple with a coupling unit 680 which includes connector pads 681 for providing a connection with the silicon chip 53. Further, the connector 680 includes end connectors of four connecting with ink supply ports 635-637. The ink supply ports are in turn to connect to ink supply lines eg 682 which are in turn interconnected to printheads supply ports eg. 687 for the flow of ink to print-head 44 in accordance with requirements.
  • The “media” 611 utilised to form the roll can comprise many different materials on which it is designed to print suitable images. For example, opaque rollable plastic material may be utilized, transparencies may be used by using transparent plastic sheets, metallic printing can take place via utilization of a metallic sheet film. Further, fabrics could be utilised within the printer roll 42 for printing images on fabric, although care must be taken that only fabrics having a suitable stiffness or suitable backing material are utilised.
  • When the print media is plastic, it can be coated with a layer which fixes and absorbs the ink. Further, several types of print media may be used, for example, opaque white matte, opaque white gloss, transparent film, frosted transparent film, lenticular array film for stereoscopic 3D prints, metallised film, film with the embossed optical variable devices such as gratings or holograms, media which is pre-printed on the reverse side, and media which includes a magnetic recording layer. When utilising a metallic foil, the metallic foil can have a polymer base, coated with a thin (several micron) evaporated layer of aluminum or other metal and then coated with a clear protective layer adapted to receive the ink via the ink printer mechanism.
  • In use the print roll 42 is obviously designed to be inserted inside a camera device so as to provide ink and paper for the printing of images on demand. The ink output ports 635-637 meet with corresponding ports within the camera device and the pinch rollers 672, 673 are operated to allow the supply of paper to the camera device under the control of the camera device.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 56, a mounted silicon chip 53 is insert in one end of the print roll 42. In FIG. 57 the authentication chip 53 is shown in more detail and includes four communications leads 680-683 for communicating details from the chip 53 to the corresponding camera to which it is inserted.
  • Turning to FIG. 57, the chip can be separately created by means of encasing a small integrated circuit 687 in epoxy and running bonding leads eg. 688 to the external communications leads 680-683. The integrated chip 687 being approximately 400 microns square with a 100 micron scribe boundary. Subsequently, the chip can be glued to an appropriate surface of the cavity of the print roll 42. In FIG. 58, there is illustrated the integrated circuit 687 interconnected to bonding pads 681, 682 in an exploded view of the arrangement of FIG. 57.
  • Artcards can, of course, be used in many other environments. For example ArtCards can be used in both embedded and personal computer (PC) applications, providing a user-friendly interface to large amounts of data or configuration information.
  • This leads to a large number of possible applications. For example, a ArtCards reader can be attached to a PC. The applications for PCs are many and varied. The simplest application is as a low cost read-only distribution medium. Since ArtCards are printed, they provide an audit trail if used for data distribution within a company.
  • Further, many times a PC is used as the basis for a closed system, yet a number of configuration options may exist. Rather than rely on a complex operating system interface for users, the simple insertion of a ArtCards into the ArtCards reader can provide all the configuration requirements.
  • While the back side of a ArtCards has the same visual appearance regardless of the application (since it stores the data), the front of a ArtCards is application dependent. It must make sense to the user in the context of the application.
  • It can therefore be seen that the arrangement of FIG. 59 provides for an efficient distribution of information in the forms of books, newspapers, magazines, technical manuals, etc.
  • In a further application, as illustrated in FIG. 60, the front side of a ArtCards 80 can show an image that includes an artistic effect to be applied to a sampled image. A camera system 81 can be provided which includes a cardreader 82 for reading the programmed data on the back of the card 80 and applying the algorithmic data to a sampled image 83 so as to produce an output image 84. The camera unit 81 including an on board inkjet printer and sufficient processing means for processing the sampled image data. A further application of the ArtCards concept, hereinafter called “BizCard” is to store company information on business cards. BizCard is a new concept in company information. The front side of a bizCard as illustrated in FIG. 61 and looks and functions exactly as today's normal business card. It includes a photograph and contact information, with as many varied card styles as there are business cards. However, the back of each bizcard contains a printed array of black and white dots that holds 1-2 megabytes of data about the company. The result is similar to having the storage of a 3.5″ disk attached to each business card.
  • The information could be company information, specific product sheets, web-site pointers, e-mail addresses, a resume . . . in short, whatever the bizCard holder wants it to. BizCards can be read by any ArtCards reader such as an attached PC card reader, which can be connected to a standard PC by a USB port. BizCards can also be displayed as documents on specific embedded devices. In the case of a PC, a user simply inserts the bizCard into their reader. The bizcard is then preferably navigated just like a web-site using a regular web browser.
  • Simply by containing the owner's photograph and digital signature as well as a pointer to the company's public key, each bizcard can be used to electronically verify that the person is in fact who they claim to be and does actually work for the specified company. In addition by pointing to the company's public key, a bizCard permits simple initiation of secure communications.
  • A further application, hereinafter known as “TourCard” is an application of the ArtCards which contains information for tourists and visitors to a city. When a tourCard is inserted into the ArtCards book reader, information can be in the form of:
      • Maps
      • Public Transport Timetables
      • Places of Interest
      • Local history
      • Events and Exhibitions
      • Restaurant locations
      • Shopping Centres
  • TourCard is a low cost alternative to tourist brochures, guide books and street directories. With a manufacturing cost of just one cent per card, tourCards could be distributed at tourist information centres, hotels and tourist attractions, at a minimum cost, or free if sponsored by advertising. The portability of the bookreader makes it the perfect solution for tourists. TourCards can also be used at information kiosk's, where a computer equipped with the ArtCards reader can decode the information encoded into the tourCard on any web browser.
  • It is interactivity of the bookreader that makes the tourCard so versatile. For example, Hypertext links contained on the map can be selected to show historical narratives of the feature buildings. In this way the tourist can embark on a guided tour of the city, with relevant transportation routes and timetables available at any time. The tourCard eliminates the need for separate maps, guide books, timetables and restaurant guides and creates a simple solution for the independent traveller. Of course, many other utilizations of the data cards are possible. For example, newspapers, study guides, pop group cards, baseball cards, timetables, music data files, product parts, advertising, TV guides, movie guides, trade show information, tear off cards in magazines, recipes, classified ads, medical information, programmes and software, horse racing form guides, electronic forms, annual reports, restaurant, hotel and vacation guides, translation programmes, golf course information, news broadcast, comics, weather details etc.
  • For example, the ArtCards could include a book's contents or a newspaper's contents. An example of such a system is as illustrated in FIG. 59 wherein the ArtCards 70 includes a book title on one surface with the second surface having the encoded contents of the book printed thereon. The card 70 is inserted in the reader 72 which can include a flexible display 73 which allows for the folding up of card reader 72. The card reader 72 can include display controls 74 which allow for paging forward and back and other controls of the card reader 72.

Claims (8)

1. A data storage device which comprises
a data carrier having at least one planar surface; and
an array of detectable items positioned on the planar surface and detectable with a sensing device, the array being configured to represent a two-dimensional code that defines at least executable instructions and redundancy encoding to impart fault tolerant characteristics to the code, the executable instructions including image processing algorithms.
2. A data storage device as claimed in claim 1, in which the data carrier is a card such that the array of detectable items are positioned on a first surface of the card and a visual depiction representing the code is positioned on a second opposite surface of the card.
3. A data storage device as claimed in claim 2, in which the card is of a plastics material that is coated with a hydrophilic dye-fixing layer.
4. A data storage device as claimed in claim 2, in which the detectable items are in the form of dots printed on the first surface of the card.
5. A data storage device as claimed in claim 4, in which the redundancy encoding includes reed-solomon fault correction encoding.
6. A data storage device as claimed in claim 4 in which the array of dots are printed with a 1600 dpi resolution.
7. A data storage device as claimed in claim 4, in which the dots define at least one target which is detectable by the sensor, the target being associated with at least one data area defined by the dots.
8. A data storage device as claimed in claim 7, in which the targets are oriented to permit reading of the card in at least two directions.
US11/039,850 1997-03-16 2005-01-24 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code Abandoned US20050127191A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/039,850 US20050127191A1 (en) 1997-03-16 2005-01-24 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AUPP2370 1997-03-16
AUPP237097 1997-03-16
AUPO7991A AUPO799197A0 (en) 1997-07-15 1997-07-15 Image processing method and apparatus (ART01)
AUPO7991 1997-07-15
US09/112,781 US6786420B1 (en) 1997-07-15 1998-07-10 Data distribution mechanism in the form of ink dots on cards
US10/269,998 US6827282B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2002-10-15 Identifying card
US10/962,404 US20050150963A1 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-10-13 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code
US11/039,850 US20050127191A1 (en) 1997-03-16 2005-01-24 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/962,404 Continuation US20050150963A1 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-10-13 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20050127191A1 true US20050127191A1 (en) 2005-06-16

Family

ID=3802281

Family Applications (27)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/113,223 Expired - Lifetime US6442525B1 (en) 1997-07-15 1998-07-10 System for authenticating physical objects
US09/112,737 Expired - Lifetime US6331946B1 (en) 1997-07-15 1998-07-10 Method for protecting on-chip memory (flash and RAM) against attacks
US09/517,380 Expired - Lifetime US6334190B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2000-03-02 System for the manipulation of secure data
US09/516,869 Expired - Lifetime US6374354B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2000-03-02 Consumable authentication protocol and system
US10/269,998 Expired - Lifetime US6827282B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2002-10-15 Identifying card
US10/302,604 Expired - Fee Related US6787051B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2002-11-23 Method of manufacturing a micro-electromechanical fluid ejecting device
US10/780,624 Expired - Fee Related US7454617B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-02-19 Apparatus for validating the presence of an authorized accessory
US10/882,772 Expired - Fee Related US6938990B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-07-02 Fluid ejecting actuator for multiple nozzles of a printhead
US10/884,886 Abandoned US20050092849A1 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-07-06 Information card with fault tolerant printing of encoded information
US10/962,404 Abandoned US20050150963A1 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-10-13 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code
US10/963,542 Expired - Fee Related US7093762B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-10-14 Image processing and printing apparatus
US11/001,144 Expired - Fee Related US7234645B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-12-02 Document having an encoded data structure
US11/039,850 Abandoned US20050127191A1 (en) 1997-03-16 2005-01-24 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code
US11/107,792 Expired - Fee Related US7222799B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2005-04-18 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code
US11/144,799 Expired - Fee Related US7416282B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2005-06-06 Printhead having common actuator for inkjet nozzles
US11/584,619 Expired - Fee Related US7278711B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2006-10-23 Nozzle arrangement incorporating a lever based ink displacement mechanism
US11/672,878 Abandoned US20070126880A1 (en) 1997-07-15 2007-02-08 Handheld device with image sensor and printer
US11/739,071 Expired - Fee Related US7703910B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2007-04-23 Print roll unit incorporating pinch rollers
US11/744,214 Expired - Fee Related US7373083B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2007-05-03 Camera incorporating a releasable print roll unit
US11/744,218 Expired - Fee Related US7362971B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2007-05-04 Camera unit incorporating a lidded printhead unit
US11/860,420 Expired - Fee Related US7506965B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2007-09-24 Inkjet printhead integrated circuit with work transmitting structures
US12/056,228 Expired - Fee Related US7654626B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-03-26 Camera device incorporating a color printer with ink validation apparatus
US12/056,217 Expired - Fee Related US7631966B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-03-26 Print roll for a camera having an internal printer
US12/143,821 Expired - Fee Related US7773113B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-06-22 Card based image manipulation method for camera
US12/170,399 Expired - Fee Related US7845764B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-07-09 Inkjet printhead having nozzle arrangements with actuator pivot anchors
US12/368,993 Expired - Fee Related US7866797B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2009-02-10 Inkjet printhead integrated circuit
US12/941,793 Expired - Fee Related US7980670B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2010-11-08 Inkjet printhead having selectively actuable nozzles arranged in nozzle pairs

Family Applications Before (12)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/113,223 Expired - Lifetime US6442525B1 (en) 1997-07-15 1998-07-10 System for authenticating physical objects
US09/112,737 Expired - Lifetime US6331946B1 (en) 1997-07-15 1998-07-10 Method for protecting on-chip memory (flash and RAM) against attacks
US09/517,380 Expired - Lifetime US6334190B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2000-03-02 System for the manipulation of secure data
US09/516,869 Expired - Lifetime US6374354B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2000-03-02 Consumable authentication protocol and system
US10/269,998 Expired - Lifetime US6827282B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2002-10-15 Identifying card
US10/302,604 Expired - Fee Related US6787051B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2002-11-23 Method of manufacturing a micro-electromechanical fluid ejecting device
US10/780,624 Expired - Fee Related US7454617B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-02-19 Apparatus for validating the presence of an authorized accessory
US10/882,772 Expired - Fee Related US6938990B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-07-02 Fluid ejecting actuator for multiple nozzles of a printhead
US10/884,886 Abandoned US20050092849A1 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-07-06 Information card with fault tolerant printing of encoded information
US10/962,404 Abandoned US20050150963A1 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-10-13 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code
US10/963,542 Expired - Fee Related US7093762B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-10-14 Image processing and printing apparatus
US11/001,144 Expired - Fee Related US7234645B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2004-12-02 Document having an encoded data structure

Family Applications After (14)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/107,792 Expired - Fee Related US7222799B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2005-04-18 Data storage device incorporating a two-dimensional code
US11/144,799 Expired - Fee Related US7416282B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2005-06-06 Printhead having common actuator for inkjet nozzles
US11/584,619 Expired - Fee Related US7278711B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2006-10-23 Nozzle arrangement incorporating a lever based ink displacement mechanism
US11/672,878 Abandoned US20070126880A1 (en) 1997-07-15 2007-02-08 Handheld device with image sensor and printer
US11/739,071 Expired - Fee Related US7703910B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2007-04-23 Print roll unit incorporating pinch rollers
US11/744,214 Expired - Fee Related US7373083B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2007-05-03 Camera incorporating a releasable print roll unit
US11/744,218 Expired - Fee Related US7362971B2 (en) 1997-03-16 2007-05-04 Camera unit incorporating a lidded printhead unit
US11/860,420 Expired - Fee Related US7506965B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2007-09-24 Inkjet printhead integrated circuit with work transmitting structures
US12/056,228 Expired - Fee Related US7654626B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-03-26 Camera device incorporating a color printer with ink validation apparatus
US12/056,217 Expired - Fee Related US7631966B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-03-26 Print roll for a camera having an internal printer
US12/143,821 Expired - Fee Related US7773113B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-06-22 Card based image manipulation method for camera
US12/170,399 Expired - Fee Related US7845764B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-07-09 Inkjet printhead having nozzle arrangements with actuator pivot anchors
US12/368,993 Expired - Fee Related US7866797B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2009-02-10 Inkjet printhead integrated circuit
US12/941,793 Expired - Fee Related US7980670B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2010-11-08 Inkjet printhead having selectively actuable nozzles arranged in nozzle pairs

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (27) US6442525B1 (en)
AU (1) AUPO799197A0 (en)

Families Citing this family (417)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8352400B2 (en) 1991-12-23 2013-01-08 Hoffberg Steven M Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore
US7343357B1 (en) * 1995-10-11 2008-03-11 Stamps.Com Inc. System and method for printing multiple postage indicia
US6676127B2 (en) 1997-03-13 2004-01-13 Shuffle Master, Inc. Collating and sorting apparatus
AUPO799197A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image processing method and apparatus (ART01)
US6786420B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-09-07 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Data distribution mechanism in the form of ink dots on cards
US6702417B2 (en) * 1997-07-12 2004-03-09 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printing cartridge with capacitive sensor identification
US6547364B2 (en) * 1997-07-12 2003-04-15 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printing cartridge with an integrated circuit device
US6803989B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2004-10-12 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image printing apparatus including a microcontroller
US6618117B2 (en) 1997-07-12 2003-09-09 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image sensing apparatus including a microcontroller
US7468139B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-12-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method of depositing heater material over a photoresist scaffold
US20110228008A1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2011-09-22 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printhead having relatively sized fluid ducts and nozzles
US7578582B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2009-08-25 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet nozzle chamber holding two fluids
AUPO850597A0 (en) 1997-08-11 1997-09-04 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image processing method and apparatus (art01a)
US6513908B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2003-02-04 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Pusher actuation in a printhead chip for an inkjet printhead
AUPO850097A0 (en) * 1997-08-11 1997-09-04 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image processing method and apparatus (art31)
US7401900B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2008-07-22 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet nozzle with long ink supply channel
US7249109B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2007-07-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Shielding manipulations of secret data
AUPP653998A0 (en) * 1998-10-16 1998-11-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Micromechanical device and method (ij46B)
US6648453B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2003-11-18 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet printhead chip with predetermined micro-electromechanical systems height
US7551201B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2009-06-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image capture and processing device for a print on demand digital camera system
US7249108B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2007-07-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Validation protocol and system
US6624848B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2003-09-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Cascading image modification using multiple digital cameras incorporating image processing
US7716098B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2010-05-11 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd. Method and apparatus for reducing optical emissions in an integrated circuit
US7011390B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2006-03-14 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printing mechanism having wide format printing zone
US20040130599A1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2004-07-08 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet printhead with amorphous ceramic chamber
AUPP398798A0 (en) * 1998-06-09 1998-07-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (ij43)
US6879341B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2005-04-12 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Digital camera system containing a VLIW vector processor
US6682174B2 (en) 1998-03-25 2004-01-27 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet nozzle arrangement configuration
US6188415B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2001-02-13 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet printer having a thermal actuator comprising an external coil spring
AUPO798697A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Data processing method and apparatus (ART51)
AUPO797897A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Media device (ART18)
US7346586B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-03-18 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Validation protocol and system
US6712453B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-03-30 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd. Ink jet nozzle rim
US6690419B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-02-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Utilising eye detection methods for image processing in a digital image camera
US7702926B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2010-04-20 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Decoy device in an integrated circuit
US7246098B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2007-07-17 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Consumable authentication protocol and system
US6557977B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2003-05-06 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Shape memory alloy ink jet printing mechanism
US7401884B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2008-07-22 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printhead with integral nozzle plate
US6582059B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2003-06-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Discrete air and nozzle chambers in a printhead chip for an inkjet printhead
US7527357B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2009-05-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet nozzle array with individual feed channel for each nozzle
US7724282B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2010-05-25 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method of processing digital image to correct for flash effects
US7628468B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2009-12-08 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Nozzle with reciprocating plunger
US20100277531A1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2010-11-04 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer having processor for high volume printing
US7465030B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-12-16 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Nozzle arrangement with a magnetic field generator
US7044589B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2006-05-16 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Printing cartridge with barcode identification
US7284843B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2007-10-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink distribution assembly for an ink jet printhead
US6935724B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2005-08-30 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet nozzle having actuator with anchor positioned between nozzle chamber and actuator connection point
AUPO802797A0 (en) 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image processing method and apparatus (ART54)
US6727948B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2004-04-27 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Utilizing autofocus information for image processing in a digital camera
US6985207B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2006-01-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Photographic prints having magnetically recordable media
US7743262B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2010-06-22 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Integrated circuit incorporating protection from power supply attacks
US7195339B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2007-03-27 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet nozzle assembly with a thermal bend actuator
AUPO801997A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Media processing method and apparatus (ART21)
US7337532B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-03-04 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method of manufacturing micro-electromechanical device having motion-transmitting structure
US7110024B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2006-09-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Digital camera system having motion deblurring means
US6820968B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2004-11-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Fluid-dispensing chip
US7050143B1 (en) * 1998-07-10 2006-05-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Camera system with computer language interpreter
US7556356B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2009-07-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printhead integrated circuit with ink spread prevention
US6918654B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2005-07-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink distribution assembly for an ink jet printhead
DE69834431T3 (en) * 1998-01-02 2009-09-10 Cryptography Research Inc., San Francisco LIQUID RESISTANT CRYPTOGRAPHIC PROCESS AND DEVICE
US7587044B2 (en) 1998-01-02 2009-09-08 Cryptography Research, Inc. Differential power analysis method and apparatus
US6254096B1 (en) 1998-04-15 2001-07-03 Shuffle Master, Inc. Device and method for continuously shuffling cards
US6655684B2 (en) 1998-04-15 2003-12-02 Shuffle Master, Inc. Device and method for forming and delivering hands from randomly arranged decks of playing cards
CA2333095C (en) 1998-06-03 2005-05-10 Cryptography Research, Inc. Improved des and other cryptographic processes with leak minimization for smartcards and other cryptosystems
US7460534B1 (en) * 1998-06-03 2008-12-02 3Com Corporation Method for statistical switching
ATE360866T1 (en) 1998-07-02 2007-05-15 Cryptography Res Inc LEAK-RESISTANT UPDATING OF AN INDEXED CRYPTOGRAPHIC KEY
US6816968B1 (en) * 1998-07-10 2004-11-09 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Consumable authentication protocol and system
US6760997B1 (en) * 1998-08-04 2004-07-13 Allen Dean Mammel No-tie fishing system and method
US7346580B2 (en) * 1998-08-13 2008-03-18 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system of preventing unauthorized rerecording of multimedia content
AUPP702098A0 (en) 1998-11-09 1998-12-03 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (ART73)
DE19901277A1 (en) * 1999-01-15 2000-07-20 Bayerische Motoren Werke Ag Method of authenticating a replacement key for using a vehicle
US7904187B2 (en) 1999-02-01 2011-03-08 Hoffberg Steven M Internet appliance system and method
US7319759B1 (en) * 1999-03-27 2008-01-15 Microsoft Corporation Producing a new black box for a digital rights management (DRM) system
US6829708B1 (en) * 1999-03-27 2004-12-07 Microsoft Corporation Specifying security for an element by assigning a scaled value representative of the relative security thereof
EE04859B1 (en) * 1999-05-06 2007-06-15 Assa Abloy Ab Locking device consisting of a key and a lock
AUPQ056099A0 (en) 1999-05-25 1999-06-17 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd A method and apparatus (pprint01)
FR2794592B1 (en) * 1999-06-04 2001-08-24 France Telecom BIT GENERATOR FOR ESTABLISHING A SECRET ENCRYPTION KEY AND CORRESPONDING METHOD
US6529487B1 (en) * 1999-07-09 2003-03-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for securely transmitting distributed RAND for use in mobile station authentication
DE19958941B4 (en) * 1999-11-26 2006-11-09 Francotyp-Postalia Gmbh Method for protecting a device from being operated with improper consumables
US9727916B1 (en) 1999-12-30 2017-08-08 Chicago Board Options Exchange, Incorporated Automated trading exchange system having integrated quote risk monitoring and integrated quote modification services
US7356498B2 (en) * 1999-12-30 2008-04-08 Chicago Board Options Exchange, Incorporated Automated trading exchange system having integrated quote risk monitoring and integrated quote modification services
US6631482B1 (en) * 2000-01-11 2003-10-07 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for providing data output for analysis
AU2000269232A1 (en) * 2000-01-14 2001-07-24 Microsoft Corporation Specifying security for an element by assigning a scaled value representative ofthe relative security thereof
US6510992B2 (en) * 2000-02-02 2003-01-28 Thomas R. Wells In-line verification, reporting and tracking apparatus and method for mail pieces
US7104383B1 (en) * 2000-02-14 2006-09-12 Leon Saltsov Validator with removable flash memory
US6757832B1 (en) * 2000-02-15 2004-06-29 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Unauthorized modification of values in flash memory
US7685423B1 (en) 2000-02-15 2010-03-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Validation protocol and system
EP1260053B1 (en) * 2000-02-15 2006-05-31 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Consumable authentication protocol and system
US8590896B2 (en) 2000-04-12 2013-11-26 Shuffle Master Gmbh & Co Kg Card-handling devices and systems
US7177421B2 (en) * 2000-04-13 2007-02-13 Broadcom Corporation Authentication engine architecture and method
JP4443088B2 (en) * 2000-05-01 2010-03-31 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション Improved DES hardware throughput for short operations
DE10026326B4 (en) * 2000-05-26 2016-02-04 Ipcom Gmbh & Co. Kg A method of cryptographically verifying a physical entity in an open wireless telecommunications network
KR100377172B1 (en) * 2000-06-13 2003-03-26 주식회사 하이닉스반도체 Key Scheduller of encryption device using data encryption standard algorithm
JP4409056B2 (en) * 2000-06-30 2010-02-03 富士通株式会社 LSI, LSI mounted electronic device, debugging method, LSI debugging device
US6980964B1 (en) * 2000-07-27 2005-12-27 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Virtual print market place
US6941284B2 (en) * 2000-11-30 2005-09-06 Pitney Bowes Inc. Method for dynamically using cryptographic keys in a postage meter
US6986764B2 (en) * 2000-12-15 2006-01-17 Laserscope Method and system for photoselective vaporization of the prostate, and other tissue
DE60213762T2 (en) * 2001-01-12 2007-10-04 Broadcom Corp., Irvine Implementation of the SHA1 algorithm
FR2823398B1 (en) * 2001-04-04 2003-08-15 St Microelectronics Sa EXTRACTION OF PRIVATE DATA FOR AUTHENTICATION OF AN INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
WO2002082218A2 (en) * 2001-04-07 2002-10-17 Telehublink Coporation Methods and systems for securing information communicated between communication devices
US7110858B2 (en) * 2001-04-09 2006-09-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Object identification uses prediction of data in distributed network
FR2825873A1 (en) * 2001-06-11 2002-12-13 St Microelectronics Sa PROTECTED STORAGE OF DATA IN AN INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
DE10128305A1 (en) * 2001-06-12 2002-12-19 Giesecke & Devrient Gmbh Control unit for appliances and machines, e.g. motor vehicles, has monitoring unit for verifying write- and read-access to programmable store
US8326851B2 (en) * 2001-06-29 2012-12-04 Grune Guerry L Simultaneous intellectual property search and valuation system and methodology (SIPS-VSM)
US20030035646A1 (en) * 2001-08-20 2003-02-20 Vat 19, Llc Digital video device having a verification code thereon and method of generating a verification code
US7197142B2 (en) * 2001-08-24 2007-03-27 Alten Alexander I System and methods for a vernam stream cipher
JP4787434B2 (en) * 2001-08-24 2011-10-05 富士通コンポーネント株式会社 ENCRYPTION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DATA INPUT DEVICE
US7409562B2 (en) * 2001-09-21 2008-08-05 The Directv Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for encrypting media programs for later purchase and viewing
US20030061488A1 (en) * 2001-09-25 2003-03-27 Michael Huebler Cloning protection for electronic equipment
US8011661B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2011-09-06 Shuffle Master, Inc. Shuffler with shuffling completion indicator
US8616552B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2013-12-31 Shfl Entertainment, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for an automatic card handling device and communication networks including same
US7677565B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2010-03-16 Shuffle Master, Inc Card shuffler with card rank and value reading capability
US8337296B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2012-12-25 SHFL entertaiment, Inc. Method and apparatus for using upstream communication in a card shuffler
US7753373B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2010-07-13 Shuffle Master, Inc. Multiple mode card shuffler and card reading device
US6993393B2 (en) * 2001-12-19 2006-01-31 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Telemetry duty cycle management system for an implantable medical device
US7728048B2 (en) 2002-12-20 2010-06-01 L-1 Secure Credentialing, Inc. Increasing thermal conductivity of host polymer used with laser engraving methods and compositions
US7257630B2 (en) 2002-01-15 2007-08-14 Mcafee, Inc. System and method for network vulnerability detection and reporting
US7243148B2 (en) 2002-01-15 2007-07-10 Mcafee, Inc. System and method for network vulnerability detection and reporting
US7543056B2 (en) 2002-01-15 2009-06-02 Mcafee, Inc. System and method for network vulnerability detection and reporting
US7076059B1 (en) * 2002-01-17 2006-07-11 Cavium Networks Method and apparatus to implement the data encryption standard algorithm
US6985773B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2006-01-10 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for implantable medical device telemetry power management
US6886829B2 (en) 2002-02-08 2005-05-03 Vendingdata Corporation Image capturing card shuffler
US6988204B2 (en) * 2002-04-16 2006-01-17 Nokia Corporation System and method for key distribution and network connectivity
US6718536B2 (en) * 2002-06-21 2004-04-06 Atmel Corporation Computer-implemented method for fast generation and testing of probable prime numbers for cryptographic applications
US7430003B2 (en) * 2002-08-23 2008-09-30 Candid Color Systems, Inc. Digital camera/computer synchronization method
US7752115B2 (en) * 2002-10-02 2010-07-06 Trading Technologies International, Inc. Method and apparatus for a fair exchange
AU2003285891A1 (en) * 2002-10-15 2004-05-04 Digimarc Corporation Identification document and related methods
US7076666B2 (en) * 2002-10-17 2006-07-11 Sony Corporation Hard disk drive authentication for personal video recorder
US7133563B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-11-07 Microsoft Corporation Passive embedded interaction code
US7599976B1 (en) * 2002-11-13 2009-10-06 Metrowerks Corporation System and method for cryptographic key generation
US7818519B2 (en) * 2002-12-02 2010-10-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Timeslot arbitration scheme
US7188359B2 (en) 2002-12-18 2007-03-06 America Online, Inc. Optimizing authentication service availability and responsiveness via client-side routing
US7044574B2 (en) * 2002-12-30 2006-05-16 Lexmark International, Inc. Method and apparatus for generating and assigning a cartridge identification number to an imaging cartridge
JP2004226605A (en) * 2003-01-22 2004-08-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image forming device
US6984261B2 (en) 2003-02-05 2006-01-10 3M Innovative Properties Company Use of ceramics in dental and orthodontic applications
US7627891B2 (en) 2003-02-14 2009-12-01 Preventsys, Inc. Network audit and policy assurance system
US8091117B2 (en) 2003-02-14 2012-01-03 Preventsys, Inc. System and method for interfacing with heterogeneous network data gathering tools
US7370212B2 (en) 2003-02-25 2008-05-06 Microsoft Corporation Issuing a publisher use license off-line in a digital rights management (DRM) system
US20090267747A1 (en) * 2003-03-31 2009-10-29 Rivest Ronald L Security and Data Collision Systems and Related Techniques for Use With Radio Frequency Identification Systems
DE602004030434D1 (en) 2003-04-16 2011-01-20 L 1 Secure Credentialing Inc THREE-DIMENSIONAL DATA STORAGE
US6880752B2 (en) * 2003-04-16 2005-04-19 George V. Tarnovsky System for testing, verifying legitimacy of smart card in-situ and for storing data therein
US7134341B2 (en) * 2003-04-28 2006-11-14 Zuli Holdings Ltd Methods and devices for determining the resonance frequency of passive mechanical resonators
US7240995B2 (en) * 2003-05-06 2007-07-10 Lexmark International, Inc. Method of authenticating a consumable
TWI227328B (en) * 2003-06-19 2005-02-01 Yan-Fu Liou Method and system for accelerating inspection speed of semiconductor products
US7155290B2 (en) * 2003-06-23 2006-12-26 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Secure long-range telemetry for implantable medical device
US7469107B2 (en) * 2003-07-23 2008-12-23 Lexmark International, Inc. Method for providing imaging substance for use in an imaging device via a virtual replenishment
US11037151B1 (en) 2003-08-19 2021-06-15 Stamps.Com Inc. System and method for dynamically partitioning a postage evidencing system
US7415883B2 (en) * 2004-06-28 2008-08-26 Zuli Holdings Ltd Method for protecting resonating sensors and open protected resonating sensors
US8162839B2 (en) * 2003-08-27 2012-04-24 Microtech Medical Technologies Ltd. Protected passive resonating sensors
US7934494B1 (en) * 2003-10-10 2011-05-03 Donna Gail Schneider Collapsible heating apparatus
US7822689B2 (en) * 2003-10-17 2010-10-26 International Business Machines Corporation Maintaining privacy for transactions performable by a user device having a security module
US8165297B2 (en) * 2003-11-21 2012-04-24 Finisar Corporation Transceiver with controller for authentication
JP4150923B2 (en) * 2003-12-09 2008-09-17 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Data output system and method
US7340496B2 (en) * 2003-12-17 2008-03-04 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for determining the Nth state of linear feedback shift registers
DE102004001212A1 (en) * 2004-01-06 2005-07-28 Deutsche Thomson-Brandt Gmbh Process and facility employs two search steps in order to shorten the search time when searching a database
US7707039B2 (en) 2004-02-15 2010-04-27 Exbiblio B.V. Automatic modification of web pages
US8442331B2 (en) 2004-02-15 2013-05-14 Google Inc. Capturing text from rendered documents using supplemental information
JP3937341B2 (en) * 2004-01-30 2007-06-27 日本電気株式会社 Transaction profile generation system for computer system performance measurement analysis, its generation method and program
US10635723B2 (en) 2004-02-15 2020-04-28 Google Llc Search engines and systems with handheld document data capture devices
US20060041484A1 (en) 2004-04-01 2006-02-23 King Martin T Methods and systems for initiating application processes by data capture from rendered documents
US7812860B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2010-10-12 Exbiblio B.V. Handheld device for capturing text from both a document printed on paper and a document displayed on a dynamic display device
US8799303B2 (en) 2004-02-15 2014-08-05 Google Inc. Establishing an interactive environment for rendered documents
JP2005250376A (en) * 2004-03-08 2005-09-15 Seiko Epson Corp Optical modulator and method of manufacturing optical modulator
US20050203843A1 (en) * 2004-03-12 2005-09-15 Wood George L. Internet debit system
US7228182B2 (en) * 2004-03-15 2007-06-05 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Cryptographic authentication for telemetry with an implantable medical device
US8127137B2 (en) 2004-03-18 2012-02-28 Digimarc Corporation Watermark payload encryption for media including multiple watermarks
US8201257B1 (en) 2004-03-31 2012-06-12 Mcafee, Inc. System and method of managing network security risks
US8146156B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2012-03-27 Google Inc. Archive of text captures from rendered documents
US7894670B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2011-02-22 Exbiblio B.V. Triggering actions in response to optically or acoustically capturing keywords from a rendered document
US7990556B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2011-08-02 Google Inc. Association of a portable scanner with input/output and storage devices
US20070300142A1 (en) 2005-04-01 2007-12-27 King Martin T Contextual dynamic advertising based upon captured rendered text
US8621349B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2013-12-31 Google Inc. Publishing techniques for adding value to a rendered document
US9143638B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2015-09-22 Google Inc. Data capture from rendered documents using handheld device
US8793162B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2014-07-29 Google Inc. Adding information or functionality to a rendered document via association with an electronic counterpart
US20080313172A1 (en) 2004-12-03 2008-12-18 King Martin T Determining actions involving captured information and electronic content associated with rendered documents
US9116890B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2015-08-25 Google Inc. Triggering actions in response to optically or acoustically capturing keywords from a rendered document
US8081849B2 (en) * 2004-12-03 2011-12-20 Google Inc. Portable scanning and memory device
US20060098900A1 (en) 2004-09-27 2006-05-11 King Martin T Secure data gathering from rendered documents
US20060081714A1 (en) 2004-08-23 2006-04-20 King Martin T Portable scanning device
EP1732645B1 (en) 2004-04-07 2012-06-13 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Rf wake-up of implantable medical device
US7519954B1 (en) 2004-04-08 2009-04-14 Mcafee, Inc. System and method of operating system identification
US8713418B2 (en) 2004-04-12 2014-04-29 Google Inc. Adding value to a rendered document
GB0408328D0 (en) * 2004-04-14 2004-05-19 Imp College Innovations Ltd Method of processing image data
US9460346B2 (en) 2004-04-19 2016-10-04 Google Inc. Handheld device for capturing text from both a document printed on paper and a document displayed on a dynamic display device
US8489624B2 (en) 2004-05-17 2013-07-16 Google, Inc. Processing techniques for text capture from a rendered document
US8620083B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2013-12-31 Google Inc. Method and system for character recognition
US8874504B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2014-10-28 Google Inc. Processing techniques for visual capture data from a rendered document
US7551752B2 (en) * 2004-04-26 2009-06-23 Graphic Security Systems Corporation Systems and methods for authenticating objects using multiple-level image encoding and decoding
US20050243118A1 (en) * 2004-04-29 2005-11-03 Ward Jefferson P Consumable cartridge theft deterrence apparatus and methods
US7609407B2 (en) * 2004-06-14 2009-10-27 Chinwala Mukhtar A Thermal printing system and method
US8099791B1 (en) * 2004-06-25 2012-01-17 Lexmark International, Inc. Method of authenticating a consumable in an imaging device
US8346620B2 (en) 2004-07-19 2013-01-01 Google Inc. Automatic modification of web pages
US7243842B1 (en) 2004-07-27 2007-07-17 Stamps.Com Inc. Computer-based value-bearing item customization security
US7933845B1 (en) 2004-07-27 2011-04-26 Stamps.Com Inc. Image-customization of computer-based value-bearing items
US8065239B1 (en) 2004-07-27 2011-11-22 Stamps.Com Inc. Customized computer-based value-bearing item quality assurance
US7979358B1 (en) 2004-07-27 2011-07-12 Stamps.Com Inc. Quality assurance of image-customization of computer-based value-bearing items
US8805745B1 (en) 2004-07-27 2014-08-12 Stamps.Com Inc. Printing of computer-based value-bearing items
US7890180B2 (en) 2004-08-09 2011-02-15 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Secure remote access for an implantable medical device
US7343496B1 (en) 2004-08-13 2008-03-11 Zilog, Inc. Secure transaction microcontroller with secure boot loader
US20060066048A1 (en) 2004-09-14 2006-03-30 Shuffle Master, Inc. Magnetic jam detection in a card shuffler
EP1643710A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-05 Nagravision S.A. Method of updating a lookup table of addresses and identification numbers
US8117452B2 (en) * 2004-11-03 2012-02-14 Cisco Technology, Inc. System and method for establishing a secure association between a dedicated appliance and a computing platform
US20060098818A1 (en) * 2004-11-10 2006-05-11 International Business Machines (Ibm) Corporation Encryption technique for asynchronous control commands and data
US20060117004A1 (en) * 2004-11-30 2006-06-01 Hunt Charles L System and method for contextually understanding and analyzing system use and misuse
US8155306B2 (en) * 2004-12-09 2012-04-10 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for increasing the speed of cryptographic processing
DE202005009860U1 (en) * 2004-12-17 2006-04-20 Alfit Ag Closing and opening device for drawers
JP4266939B2 (en) * 2005-02-10 2009-05-27 株式会社ソニー・コンピュータエンタテインメント Drawing processing apparatus and drawing data compression method
US7278163B2 (en) * 2005-02-22 2007-10-02 Mcafee, Inc. Security risk analysis system and method
US7826074B1 (en) 2005-02-25 2010-11-02 Microsoft Corporation Fast embedded interaction code printing with custom postscript commands
US20060203106A1 (en) * 2005-03-14 2006-09-14 Lawrence Joseph P Methods and apparatus for retrieving data captured by a media device
US8666900B1 (en) * 2005-03-30 2014-03-04 Intuit Inc. Secure product enablement over channels with narrow bandwidth
US7788490B2 (en) * 2005-04-01 2010-08-31 Lexmark International, Inc. Methods for authenticating an identity of an article in electrical communication with a verifier system
US8725646B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2014-05-13 Microsoft Corporation Output protection levels
US7421439B2 (en) * 2005-04-22 2008-09-02 Microsoft Corporation Global metadata embedding and decoding
US7542976B2 (en) * 2005-04-22 2009-06-02 Microsoft Corporation Local metadata embedding and decoding
CA2609085C (en) 2005-05-20 2014-01-28 Laserscope Laser system and delivery device operation logging method and kit
US20060265758A1 (en) 2005-05-20 2006-11-23 Microsoft Corporation Extensible media rights
US7400777B2 (en) 2005-05-25 2008-07-15 Microsoft Corporation Preprocessing for information pattern analysis
US7729539B2 (en) 2005-05-31 2010-06-01 Microsoft Corporation Fast error-correcting of embedded interaction codes
US7764836B2 (en) 2005-06-13 2010-07-27 Shuffle Master, Inc. Card shuffler with card rank and value reading capability using CMOS sensor
JP2007013235A (en) * 2005-06-28 2007-01-18 Canon Inc Image compositing apparatus, control method and program of image processor
US9325944B2 (en) 2005-08-11 2016-04-26 The Directv Group, Inc. Secure delivery of program content via a removable storage medium
US7817816B2 (en) 2005-08-17 2010-10-19 Microsoft Corporation Embedded interaction code enabled surface type identification
TWI271684B (en) * 2005-10-11 2007-01-21 Delta Electronics Inc Display device, keypad thereof and method for activating display device
TWI258392B (en) * 2005-11-30 2006-07-21 Benq Corp Droplet generators
US9148795B2 (en) * 2005-12-22 2015-09-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus for flexible reporting of control information
US20070162759A1 (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-07-12 Motorola, Inc. Protected port for electronic access to an embedded device
US8285651B1 (en) 2005-12-30 2012-10-09 Stamps.Com Inc. High speed printing
US9397837B2 (en) * 2006-01-06 2016-07-19 Sicpa Holding Sa Secure access to information associated with a value item
US7499552B2 (en) * 2006-01-11 2009-03-03 International Business Machines Corporation Cipher method and system for verifying a decryption of an encrypted user data key
DE102006005202A1 (en) * 2006-02-02 2007-08-09 Hochschule Darmstadt University Of Applied Sciences Method for decoding information
TW200808347A (en) * 2006-03-23 2008-02-16 Kirin Brewery Agonistic antibody directed against human thrombopoietin receptor
US7556266B2 (en) 2006-03-24 2009-07-07 Shuffle Master Gmbh & Co Kg Card shuffler with gravity feed system for playing cards
JP2007279786A (en) * 2006-04-03 2007-10-25 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Information terminal device and program
US8150163B2 (en) * 2006-04-12 2012-04-03 Scanbuy, Inc. System and method for recovering image detail from multiple image frames in real-time
US8775319B2 (en) 2006-05-15 2014-07-08 The Directv Group, Inc. Secure content transfer systems and methods to operate the same
US8095466B2 (en) 2006-05-15 2012-01-10 The Directv Group, Inc. Methods and apparatus to conditionally authorize content delivery at content servers in pay delivery systems
US8001565B2 (en) 2006-05-15 2011-08-16 The Directv Group, Inc. Methods and apparatus to conditionally authorize content delivery at receivers in pay delivery systems
US8996421B2 (en) 2006-05-15 2015-03-31 The Directv Group, Inc. Methods and apparatus to conditionally authorize content delivery at broadcast headends in pay delivery systems
US7992175B2 (en) 2006-05-15 2011-08-02 The Directv Group, Inc. Methods and apparatus to provide content on demand in content broadcast systems
US7874593B1 (en) 2006-05-16 2011-01-25 Stamps.Com Inc. Rolls of image-customized value-bearing items and systems and methods for providing rolls of image-customized value-bearing items
US8579289B2 (en) 2006-05-31 2013-11-12 Shfl Entertainment, Inc. Automatic system and methods for accurate card handling
US8342525B2 (en) 2006-07-05 2013-01-01 Shfl Entertainment, Inc. Card shuffler with adjacent card infeed and card output compartments
US8353513B2 (en) 2006-05-31 2013-01-15 Shfl Entertainment, Inc. Card weight for gravity feed input for playing card shuffler
US10839332B1 (en) 2006-06-26 2020-11-17 Stamps.Com Image-customized labels adapted for bearing computer-based, generic, value-bearing items, and systems and methods for providing image-customized labels
US8070574B2 (en) 2007-06-06 2011-12-06 Shuffle Master, Inc. Apparatus, system, method, and computer-readable medium for casino card handling with multiple hand recall feature
US8196039B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2012-06-05 International Business Machines Corporation Relevant term extraction and classification for Wiki content
US8219900B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2012-07-10 International Business Machines Corporation Programmatically hiding and displaying Wiki page layout sections
US8560956B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2013-10-15 International Business Machines Corporation Processing model of an application wiki
US7954052B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2011-05-31 International Business Machines Corporation Method for processing a web page for display in a wiki environment
US20080040661A1 (en) * 2006-07-07 2008-02-14 Bryce Allen Curtis Method for inheriting a Wiki page layout for a Wiki page
US8775930B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2014-07-08 International Business Machines Corporation Generic frequency weighted visualization component
US20080010388A1 (en) * 2006-07-07 2008-01-10 Bryce Allen Curtis Method and apparatus for server wiring model
US8127413B2 (en) * 2006-07-11 2012-03-06 Georgia Tech Research Corporation System and method for preventing race condition vulnerability
US8997255B2 (en) 2006-07-31 2015-03-31 Inside Secure Verifying data integrity in a data storage device
US9178693B2 (en) 2006-08-04 2015-11-03 The Directv Group, Inc. Distributed media-protection systems and methods to operate the same
US9225761B2 (en) 2006-08-04 2015-12-29 The Directv Group, Inc. Distributed media-aggregation systems and methods to operate the same
US20080043406A1 (en) * 2006-08-16 2008-02-21 Secure Computing Corporation Portable computer security device that includes a clip
US9794247B2 (en) * 2006-08-22 2017-10-17 Stmicroelectronics, Inc. Method to prevent cloning of electronic components using public key infrastructure secure hardware device
US8191131B2 (en) * 2006-08-23 2012-05-29 International Business Machines Corporation Obscuring authentication data of remote user
US8352752B2 (en) * 2006-09-01 2013-01-08 Inside Secure Detecting radiation-based attacks
JP4019114B1 (en) * 2006-09-04 2007-12-12 株式会社I・Pソリューションズ Information output device
EP2067119A2 (en) 2006-09-08 2009-06-10 Exbiblio B.V. Optical scanners, such as hand-held optical scanners
US8125667B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2012-02-28 Avery Levy System and method for enabling transactions by means of print media that incorporate electronic recording and transmission means
US8919775B2 (en) 2006-11-10 2014-12-30 Bally Gaming, Inc. System for billing usage of an automatic card handling device
BRPI0720067A2 (en) * 2006-12-12 2013-12-17 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv CELL ANALYSIS DEVICE AND METHODS OF OPERATING AND MANUFACTURING A CELL ANALYSIS DEVICE
US8505978B1 (en) 2006-12-20 2013-08-13 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods for creating and providing shape-customized, computer-based, value-bearing items
US7953987B2 (en) * 2007-03-06 2011-05-31 International Business Machines Corporation Protection of secure electronic modules against attacks
US20080228056A1 (en) 2007-03-13 2008-09-18 Michael Blomquist Basal rate testing using frequent blood glucose input
CN101272240B (en) * 2007-03-21 2013-01-23 华为技术有限公司 Conversation cryptographic key generation method, system and communication equipment
US7735952B2 (en) * 2007-04-12 2010-06-15 Lexmark International, Inc. Method of bonding a micro-fluid ejection head to a support substrate
US8156174B2 (en) 2007-04-13 2012-04-10 Platform Computing Corporation Method and system for information exchange utilizing an asynchronous persistent store protocol
KR100875979B1 (en) * 2007-04-19 2008-12-24 삼성전자주식회사 Nonvolatile memory device, memory system including it and its read method
US7790340B2 (en) * 2007-04-20 2010-09-07 Photronics, Inc. Photomask with detector for optimizing an integrated circuit production process and method of manufacturing an integrated circuit using the same
US7851110B2 (en) * 2007-04-20 2010-12-14 Photronics, Inc. Secure photomask with blocking aperture
US7943273B2 (en) * 2007-04-20 2011-05-17 Photronics, Inc. Photomask with detector for optimizing an integrated circuit production process and method of manufacturing an integrated circuit using the same
US8762714B2 (en) * 2007-04-24 2014-06-24 Finisar Corporation Protecting against counterfeit electronics devices
US7751907B2 (en) 2007-05-24 2010-07-06 Smiths Medical Asd, Inc. Expert system for insulin pump therapy
US8221345B2 (en) 2007-05-30 2012-07-17 Smiths Medical Asd, Inc. Insulin pump based expert system
US9148286B2 (en) * 2007-10-15 2015-09-29 Finisar Corporation Protecting against counterfeit electronic devices
NL1036049A1 (en) * 2007-10-16 2009-04-20 Asml Holding Nv Securing authenticity or integrated circuit chips.
US20090240945A1 (en) * 2007-11-02 2009-09-24 Finisar Corporation Anticounterfeiting means for optical communication components
US8819423B2 (en) * 2007-11-27 2014-08-26 Finisar Corporation Optical transceiver with vendor authentication
US8986253B2 (en) 2008-01-25 2015-03-24 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Two chamber pumps and related methods
GB2457018B (en) * 2008-01-29 2012-04-04 Hewlett Packard Development Co Pattern for identifying a location on a surface
US10373398B1 (en) 2008-02-13 2019-08-06 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods for distributed activation of postage
US9978185B1 (en) 2008-04-15 2018-05-22 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods for activation of postage indicia at point of sale
US8133197B2 (en) 2008-05-02 2012-03-13 Smiths Medical Asd, Inc. Display for pump
FR2933514B1 (en) * 2008-07-02 2012-10-19 Canon Kk SIMILARITY ENCODING AND DECODING METHODS AND DEVICES FOR XML TYPE DOCUMENTS
GB2476606B (en) 2008-09-08 2012-08-08 Virginia Tech Intell Prop Systems, devices, and methods for managing energy usage
US8410780B2 (en) * 2008-09-12 2013-04-02 The Penn State Research Foundation Adaptive signal averaging method which enhances the sensitivity of continuous wave magnetic resonance and other analytical measurements
US8408421B2 (en) 2008-09-16 2013-04-02 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Flow regulating stopcocks and related methods
AU2009293019A1 (en) 2008-09-19 2010-03-25 Tandem Diabetes Care Inc. Solute concentration measurement device and related methods
FR2937212B1 (en) * 2008-10-15 2011-05-20 Sagem Defense Securite SECURE COMMUNICATION DEVICE.
US7841702B2 (en) * 2008-11-05 2010-11-30 Lexmark International, Inc. Heater stack and method for making heater stack with heater element decoupled from substrate
DE102008057681B3 (en) * 2008-11-17 2009-12-10 Giesecke & Devrient Gmbh Method for the secure storage of data in a memory of a portable data carrier
RU2491627C2 (en) * 2008-12-24 2013-08-27 Общество с ограниченной ответственностью "Оригинал" Method of tying descriptive properties of product to identification labels for recording sales
US9911246B1 (en) 2008-12-24 2018-03-06 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods utilizing gravity feed for postage metering
WO2010104543A2 (en) * 2008-12-31 2010-09-16 Arizona Board Of Regents, For And On Behalf Of Arizona State University Integrated circuits secure from invasion and methods of manufacturing the same
KR101685633B1 (en) * 2009-01-05 2016-12-12 삼성전자주식회사 Memory system
US7916539B2 (en) * 2009-01-23 2011-03-29 Analog Devices, Inc. Differential, level-shifted EEPROM structures
US8549260B2 (en) * 2009-01-29 2013-10-01 Infineon Technologies Ag Apparatus for processing data and method for generating manipulated and re-manipulated configuration data for processor
CN105930311B (en) 2009-02-18 2018-10-09 谷歌有限责任公司 Execute method, mobile device and the readable medium with the associated action of rendered document
US8447066B2 (en) 2009-03-12 2013-05-21 Google Inc. Performing actions based on capturing information from rendered documents, such as documents under copyright
WO2010105245A2 (en) 2009-03-12 2010-09-16 Exbiblio B.V. Automatically providing content associated with captured information, such as information captured in real-time
US8877648B2 (en) * 2009-03-26 2014-11-04 Semprius, Inc. Methods of forming printable integrated circuit devices by selective etching to suspend the devices from a handling substrate and devices formed thereby
US8967621B2 (en) 2009-04-07 2015-03-03 Bally Gaming, Inc. Card shuffling apparatuses and related methods
US7988152B2 (en) 2009-04-07 2011-08-02 Shuffle Master, Inc. Playing card shuffler
AU2010278894B2 (en) 2009-07-30 2014-01-30 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Infusion pump system with disposable cartridge having pressure venting and pressure feedback
EP2290463A3 (en) * 2009-08-24 2014-07-02 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Image forming apparatus for managing replacement components
EP2474155A1 (en) * 2009-09-02 2012-07-11 Image Holdings Method and system for displaying, managing and selling digital images
CA2774353C (en) * 2009-09-16 2016-01-26 Image Holdings Method and system of displaying, managing and selling images in an event photography environment
US8817031B2 (en) * 2009-10-02 2014-08-26 Nvidia Corporation Distributed stream output in a parallel processing unit
US8430301B2 (en) * 2009-11-23 2013-04-30 Konica Minolta Laboratory U.S.A., Inc. Document authentication using hierarchical barcode stamps to detect alterations of barcode
KR101646705B1 (en) * 2009-12-01 2016-08-09 삼성전자주식회사 Cryptographic device for implementing s-box
US9081799B2 (en) 2009-12-04 2015-07-14 Google Inc. Using gestalt information to identify locations in printed information
US8882701B2 (en) 2009-12-04 2014-11-11 Smiths Medical Asd, Inc. Advanced step therapy delivery for an ambulatory infusion pump and system
US9323784B2 (en) 2009-12-09 2016-04-26 Google Inc. Image search using text-based elements within the contents of images
US20110161232A1 (en) * 2009-12-28 2011-06-30 Brown Kerry D Virtualization of authentication token for secure applications
US10089797B1 (en) 2010-02-25 2018-10-02 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods for providing localized functionality in browser based postage transactions
US9842308B1 (en) 2010-02-25 2017-12-12 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods for rules based shipping
US8625802B2 (en) * 2010-06-16 2014-01-07 Porticor Ltd. Methods, devices, and media for secure key management in a non-secured, distributed, virtualized environment with applications to cloud-computing security and management
US8782434B1 (en) 2010-07-15 2014-07-15 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York System and method for validating program execution at run-time
US9424930B2 (en) * 2010-09-15 2016-08-23 Sandisk Technologies Llc Apparatus, system, and method for non-volatile storage element programming
SG189354A1 (en) 2010-10-11 2013-05-31 Graphic Security Systems Corp Method for constructing a composite image incorporating a hidden authentication image
US8800993B2 (en) 2010-10-14 2014-08-12 Shuffle Master Gmbh & Co Kg Card handling systems, devices for use in card handling systems and related methods
RU2447502C1 (en) * 2010-10-18 2012-04-10 Российская Федерация, от имени которой выступает Государственная корпорация по атомной энергии "Росатом" - Госкорпорация "Росатом" Changeable code unit
US20120091121A1 (en) * 2010-10-19 2012-04-19 Zachary Justin Reitmeier Heater stack for inkjet printheads
WO2012109139A1 (en) * 2011-02-08 2012-08-16 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for secure data representation allowing efficient collection, search and retrieval
JP2012174195A (en) * 2011-02-24 2012-09-10 Renesas Electronics Corp Authentication system
JP5292601B2 (en) * 2011-04-05 2013-09-18 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Inkjet recording device
US9914320B1 (en) 2011-04-21 2018-03-13 Stamps.Com Inc. Secure value bearing indicia using clear media
US10713634B1 (en) 2011-05-18 2020-07-14 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods using mobile communication handsets for providing postage
US20120298738A1 (en) * 2011-05-25 2012-11-29 Nukotoys, Inc. Cards with geometrically defined card use and mechanics
WO2013003213A1 (en) 2011-06-28 2013-01-03 3M Innovative Properties Company Glass-ceramics and methods of making the same
US9731190B2 (en) 2011-07-29 2017-08-15 Bally Gaming, Inc. Method and apparatus for shuffling and handling cards
US8485527B2 (en) 2011-07-29 2013-07-16 Savant Shuffler LLC Card shuffler
US10373216B1 (en) 2011-10-12 2019-08-06 Stamps.Com Inc. Parasitic postage indicia
US10846650B1 (en) 2011-11-01 2020-11-24 Stamps.Com Inc. Perpetual value bearing shipping labels
US9147505B2 (en) 2011-11-02 2015-09-29 Ut-Battelle, Llc Large area controlled assembly of transparent conductive networks
WO2013103971A1 (en) * 2012-01-06 2013-07-11 University Of New Hampshire Systems and methods for chaotic entanglement using cupolets
US10922641B1 (en) 2012-01-24 2021-02-16 Stamps.Com Inc. Systems and methods providing known shipper information for shipping indicia
DE102012206272A1 (en) * 2012-04-17 2013-10-17 Beckhoff Automation Gmbh Fieldbus communication
WO2013165335A1 (en) 2012-04-29 2013-11-07 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Piezoelectric inkjet die stack
ES2658092T3 (en) 2012-04-30 2018-03-08 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Flexible substrate with integrated circuit
US9180242B2 (en) 2012-05-17 2015-11-10 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Methods and devices for multiple fluid transfer
US8960674B2 (en) 2012-07-27 2015-02-24 Bally Gaming, Inc. Batch card shuffling apparatuses including multi-card storage compartments, and related methods
US9122873B2 (en) 2012-09-14 2015-09-01 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Continuous run-time validation of program execution: a practical approach
US9378766B2 (en) 2012-09-28 2016-06-28 Bally Gaming, Inc. Card recognition system, card handling device, and method for tuning a card handling device
US9511274B2 (en) 2012-09-28 2016-12-06 Bally Gaming Inc. Methods for automatically generating a card deck library and master images for a deck of cards, and a related card processing apparatus
US9181086B1 (en) 2012-10-01 2015-11-10 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Hinged MEMS diaphragm and method of manufacture therof
US9317721B2 (en) 2012-10-31 2016-04-19 Google Inc. Privacy aware camera and device status indicator system
US9173998B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-11-03 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. System and method for detecting occlusions in an infusion pump
US9201629B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-12-01 International Business Machines Corporation Instruction for performing a pseudorandom number seed operation
US8873750B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-10-28 International Business Machines Corporation Instruction for performing a pseudorandom number generate operation
US9242043B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-01-26 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Field update of an ambulatory infusion pump system
JP6486897B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2019-03-20 ビデリ、インコーポレイテッドVideri Inc. Display device for displaying digital images
KR102036895B1 (en) * 2013-04-23 2019-10-25 삼성전자주식회사 Camera assembly and image acquiring method using the same
US9340023B2 (en) 2013-05-31 2016-05-17 Stmicroelectronics, Inc. Methods of making inkjet print heads using a sacrificial substrate layer
GB2514611A (en) * 2013-05-31 2014-12-03 Ibm Storage integrity validator
US9036427B2 (en) * 2013-06-12 2015-05-19 Arm Limited Apparatus and a method for erasing data stored in a memory device
US9780949B2 (en) * 2013-07-24 2017-10-03 Nxp Usa, Inc. Data processing device and method for protecting a data processing device against tampering
CN104424492B (en) 2013-09-02 2017-12-05 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 A kind of data processing method and device based on Quick Response Code
CN103501398B (en) * 2013-09-24 2016-08-31 珠海艾派克微电子有限公司 Chip, imaging cartridge and chip and the means of communication of imaging device
CN105636789B (en) * 2013-10-15 2018-02-02 惠普发展公司,有限责任合伙企业 Fluid ejection apparatus and tube core
SG11201608344WA (en) 2014-04-11 2016-11-29 Bally Gaming Inc Method and apparatus for shuffling and handling cards
US9474957B2 (en) 2014-05-15 2016-10-25 Bally Gaming, Inc. Playing card handling devices, systems, and methods for verifying sets of cards
DE102014210988A1 (en) * 2014-06-10 2015-12-17 Robert Bosch Gmbh Micromechanical structure
KR20160014464A (en) * 2014-07-29 2016-02-11 삼성전자주식회사 Memory system and data protecting method thereof
USD764599S1 (en) 2014-08-01 2016-08-23 Bally Gaming, Inc. Card shuffler device
US9566501B2 (en) 2014-08-01 2017-02-14 Bally Gaming, Inc. Hand-forming card shuffling apparatuses including multi-card storage compartments, and related methods
JP2016057616A (en) * 2014-09-05 2016-04-21 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display panel, input/output device, and data processor
US9504905B2 (en) 2014-09-19 2016-11-29 Bally Gaming, Inc. Card shuffling device and calibration method
JP6098611B2 (en) * 2014-10-28 2017-03-22 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Image processing device, terminal device, processing method, and control program
KR20160082794A (en) * 2014-12-29 2016-07-11 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Timing controller and display apparatus including the same
CN104751896B (en) * 2015-04-17 2017-10-27 上海华虹宏力半导体制造有限公司 Built-in self-test circuit
WO2016187286A1 (en) 2015-05-18 2016-11-24 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Patch pump cartridge attachment
CN108348677B (en) 2015-08-20 2020-10-27 坦德姆糖尿病护理股份有限公司 Drive mechanism for a perfusion pump
CN105099712B (en) * 2015-09-17 2018-11-20 深圳三元色数码科技有限公司 A kind of data ciphering method based on Dicode verification
US9756024B2 (en) 2015-09-18 2017-09-05 Trillium Incorporated Computer-implemented cryptographic method for improving a computer network, and terminal, system and computer-readable medium for the same
KR102370169B1 (en) * 2015-10-13 2022-03-04 엘지전자 주식회사 Flexible display device and operating method thereof
US9993719B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2018-06-12 Shuffle Master Gmbh & Co Kg Card handling devices and related assemblies and components
US10063727B2 (en) * 2015-12-29 2018-08-28 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Marking apparatus and decoloring apparatus
US10569016B2 (en) 2015-12-29 2020-02-25 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. System and method for switching between closed loop and open loop control of an ambulatory infusion pump
US9786039B2 (en) * 2016-01-26 2017-10-10 Wipro Limited Method and system for processing an image extracted from a document
US10541987B2 (en) 2016-02-26 2020-01-21 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Web browser-based device communication workflow
CN106355782A (en) * 2016-08-31 2017-01-25 陕西省人民医院 Self-help printing management system for reports and films
US10235336B1 (en) 2016-09-14 2019-03-19 Compellon Incorporated Prescriptive analytics platform and polarity analysis engine
US10933300B2 (en) 2016-09-26 2021-03-02 Shuffle Master Gmbh & Co Kg Card handling devices and related assemblies and components
US10339765B2 (en) 2016-09-26 2019-07-02 Shuffle Master Gmbh & Co Kg Devices, systems, and related methods for real-time monitoring and display of related data for casino gaming devices
CN108073818B (en) * 2016-11-14 2021-07-09 华为技术有限公司 Data protection circuit of chip, chip and electronic equipment
CN106845573A (en) * 2016-12-31 2017-06-13 广州中大微电子有限公司 A kind of contact IC card reader-writer of integrated GPRS
GB201712726D0 (en) 2017-08-08 2017-09-20 Landa Labs (2012) Ltd Electric current and heat mitigation in a printing machine writing module
CN107958857B (en) * 2017-11-28 2024-03-19 北方电子研究院安徽有限公司 Briquetting trigger device and epoxy resin vacuum low-pressure packaging process method
FR3076923A1 (en) * 2018-01-16 2019-07-19 Stmicroelectronics (Rousset) Sas METHOD AND AUTHENTICATION CIRCUIT
WO2019152908A1 (en) 2018-02-05 2019-08-08 Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. Methods and systems for detecting infusion pump conditions
EP3750300B1 (en) 2018-03-20 2023-06-28 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Encoding dot patterns into printed images based on source pixel color
CN108710720B (en) * 2018-04-03 2021-11-23 合肥通用机械研究院有限公司 Analysis design method for bolt flange connection structure based on leakage rate
US10866809B2 (en) * 2018-07-05 2020-12-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Method, apparatus, and system for acceleration of inversion of injective operations
US11376489B2 (en) 2018-09-14 2022-07-05 Sg Gaming, Inc. Card-handling devices and related methods, assemblies, and components
US11896891B2 (en) 2018-09-14 2024-02-13 Sg Gaming, Inc. Card-handling devices and related methods, assemblies, and components
KR102520412B1 (en) * 2018-09-19 2023-04-12 에스케이하이닉스 주식회사 Memory system and operation method thereof
US11338194B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2022-05-24 Sg Gaming, Inc. Automatic card shufflers and related methods of automatic jam recovery
CN109949256B (en) * 2019-01-14 2023-04-07 昆明理工大学 Astronomical image fusion method based on Fourier transform
FR3098949B1 (en) 2019-07-15 2023-10-06 St Microelectronics Rousset One-way function
US11068758B1 (en) 2019-08-14 2021-07-20 Compellon Incorporated Polarity semantics engine analytics platform
PH12020050309A1 (en) 2019-09-10 2021-03-22 Shuffle Master Gmbh And Co Kg Card-handling devices with defect detection and related methods
US11173383B2 (en) 2019-10-07 2021-11-16 Sg Gaming, Inc. Card-handling devices and related methods, assemblies, and components
CN111209580B (en) * 2020-01-03 2022-08-02 湖南麒麟信安科技股份有限公司 Method, system and medium for isolating shared user environment based on mandatory access control
CN111524660B (en) * 2020-03-13 2022-05-17 乐庭电线工业(惠州)有限公司 Cable code spraying control method and system based on network and storage medium
US11488066B2 (en) * 2020-04-21 2022-11-01 SiMa Technologies, Inc. Efficient convolution of multi-channel input samples with multiple kernels
US20220012201A1 (en) * 2020-07-07 2022-01-13 Apple Inc. Scatter and Gather Streaming Data through a Circular FIFO
CN112738219B (en) * 2020-12-28 2022-06-10 中国第一汽车股份有限公司 Program running method, program running device, vehicle and storage medium
CN114048421B (en) * 2021-03-26 2023-05-05 南京理工大学 Fragment penetration target plate data processing method
US11652941B1 (en) * 2022-04-11 2023-05-16 Xerox Corporation Methods and systems for securing confidential content of a document while printing and/or generating a copy of the document
CN115292723B (en) * 2022-10-09 2023-03-24 支付宝(杭州)信息技术有限公司 Method and device for detecting side channel loophole
CN115756613B (en) * 2022-11-29 2023-08-29 中国科学院空天信息创新研究院 Sine interpolation method and device based on vectorization processing and SAR radar

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3914877A (en) * 1974-04-08 1975-10-28 Marion E Hines Image scrambling technique
US4544184A (en) * 1983-07-07 1985-10-01 Freund Precision, Inc. Tamper-proof identification card and identification system
US5825947A (en) * 1995-09-01 1998-10-20 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Optical reproducing system for multimedia information recorded with code data having function for correcting image reading distortion
US5874718A (en) * 1995-10-23 1999-02-23 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Information recording medium
US5913542A (en) * 1993-09-17 1999-06-22 Bell Data Software Corporation System for producing a personal ID card
US6182901B1 (en) * 1993-12-22 2001-02-06 Xerox Corporation Orientational disambiguation for self-clocking glyph codes

Family Cites Families (282)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US566141A (en) * 1896-08-18 Buggy-seat
GB792145A (en) 1953-05-20 1958-03-19 Technograph Printed Circuits L Improvements in and relating to devices for obtaining a mechanical movement from theaction of an electric current
US4991205A (en) * 1962-08-27 1991-02-05 Lemelson Jerome H Personal identification system and method
DE1648322A1 (en) 1967-07-20 1971-03-25 Vdo Schindling Measuring or switching element made of bimetal
US3845657A (en) 1972-02-04 1974-11-05 Westinghouse Electric Corp Surveillance system including means for detecting impending failure in high pressure, high temperature fluid conducting pipes
FR2188389B1 (en) 1972-06-08 1975-06-13 Cibie Projecteurs
US3866217A (en) 1972-12-26 1975-02-11 Currier Smith Corp Monitoring transmission link by comparing pseudorandom signals
FR2231076A2 (en) 1973-05-24 1974-12-20 Electricite De France Driving organ operated by thermal means - esp. for use in corrosive or dangerous environments formed by two metal strips
US4001777A (en) 1973-06-21 1977-01-04 Elmore Alexander Taximeter protection system
US3893173A (en) * 1974-01-11 1975-07-01 Hewlett Packard Co Miniaturized magnetic card reader/recorder for use in hand-held calculator
US4074324B1 (en) * 1975-07-14 1994-01-11 S. Barrett Jon Instant electronic camera
US4123782A (en) * 1975-07-18 1978-10-31 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Control device for television camera
US4023149A (en) * 1975-10-28 1977-05-10 Motorola, Inc. Static storage technique for four transistor IGFET memory cell
US4092654A (en) * 1976-09-13 1978-05-30 Alasia Alfred Victor Encoding system
US4139910A (en) * 1976-12-06 1979-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Charge coupled device memory with method of doubled storage capacity and independent of process parameters and temperature
GB1595797A (en) 1978-04-21 1981-08-19 Pushman Hugh John Security systems
US4262284A (en) 1978-06-26 1981-04-14 Stieff Lorin R Self-monitoring seal
DE2905063A1 (en) 1979-02-10 1980-08-14 Olympia Werke Ag Ink nozzle air intake avoidance system - has vibratory pressure generator shutting bore in membrane in rest position
US4300210A (en) * 1979-12-27 1981-11-10 International Business Machines Corp. Calibrated sensing system
US5241165A (en) * 1981-02-27 1993-08-31 Drexler Technology Corporation Erasable optical wallet-size data card
JPS58112747A (en) 1981-12-26 1983-07-05 Fujitsu Ltd Ink jet recording device
JPS58116165A (en) 1981-12-29 1983-07-11 Canon Inc Ink injection head
US4611219A (en) * 1981-12-29 1986-09-09 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid-jetting head
DE3214791A1 (en) 1982-04-21 1983-10-27 Siemens AG, 1000 Berlin und 8000 München WRITING DEVICE WORKING WITH LIQUID DROPS
JPS58225743A (en) 1982-06-23 1983-12-27 Toshiba Corp Radio telephone equipment
US4423401A (en) * 1982-07-21 1983-12-27 Tektronix, Inc. Thin-film electrothermal device
DE3245283A1 (en) 1982-12-07 1984-06-07 Siemens AG, 1000 Berlin und 8000 München Arrangement for expelling liquid droplets
US4590470A (en) * 1983-07-11 1986-05-20 At&T Bell Laboratories User authentication system employing encryption functions
US4553393A (en) 1983-08-26 1985-11-19 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Memory metal actuator
JPS60192668A (en) * 1984-03-14 1985-10-01 Toshiba Corp Image former
JPS6125849A (en) 1984-07-17 1986-02-04 Canon Inc Ink jet recording device
DE3430155A1 (en) 1984-08-16 1986-02-27 Siemens AG, 1000 Berlin und 8000 München Indirectly heated bimetal
JPS61106259A (en) 1984-10-31 1986-05-24 Hitachi Ltd Ink droplet jet discharging device
SE447222B (en) 1984-12-21 1986-11-03 Swedot System Ab ELECTROMAGNETIC MANOVERABLE VALVE DEVICE, SPECIFICALLY FOR GENERATING DROPS IN A HYDRAULIC PRINTER
US4736423A (en) * 1985-04-30 1988-04-05 International Business Machines Corporation Technique for reducing RSA Crypto variable storage
JPS61268453A (en) 1985-05-23 1986-11-27 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Ink jet printer head
US4799061A (en) * 1985-11-18 1989-01-17 International Business Machines Corporation Secure component authentication system
US4901093A (en) * 1985-11-26 1990-02-13 Dataproducts Corporation Method and apparatus for printing with ink jet chambers utilizing a plurality of orifices
US5258774A (en) 1985-11-26 1993-11-02 Dataproducts Corporation Compensation for aerodynamic influences in ink jet apparatuses having ink jet chambers utilizing a plurality of orifices
US4728978A (en) * 1986-03-07 1988-03-01 Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha Photographic camera
EP0237940B1 (en) * 1986-03-19 1993-09-08 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Manual copying apparatus
US4724307A (en) * 1986-04-29 1988-02-09 Gtech Corporation Marked card reader
US4801935A (en) * 1986-11-17 1989-01-31 Computer Security Corporation Apparatus and method for security of electric and electronic devices
US4897719A (en) * 1987-03-19 1990-01-30 Hugh Griffin Image pre-processing sub-system
US4914452A (en) * 1987-05-08 1990-04-03 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ink sheet/recording paper cassette
DE3716996A1 (en) 1987-05-21 1988-12-08 Vdo Schindling Deformation element
JPH01105746A (en) 1987-10-19 1989-04-24 Ricoh Co Ltd Ink jet head
JPH01115639A (en) 1987-10-30 1989-05-08 Ricoh Co Ltd Ink jet recording head
JPH01128839A (en) 1987-11-13 1989-05-22 Ricoh Co Ltd Inkjet recording head
JPH01148587A (en) 1987-12-04 1989-06-09 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Image receiving sheet
US5233414A (en) * 1987-12-08 1993-08-03 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Color image processing apparatus
JPH01257058A (en) 1988-04-07 1989-10-13 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet head
DE3814150A1 (en) 1988-04-27 1989-11-09 Draegerwerk Ag VALVE ARRANGEMENT MADE FROM MICROSTRUCTURED COMPONENTS
JPH01306254A (en) 1988-06-03 1989-12-11 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet head
US5051838A (en) * 1988-06-22 1991-09-24 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Portable electronic copying machine
JPH0250841A (en) 1988-08-12 1990-02-20 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet head
GB2222045B (en) * 1988-08-19 1993-04-07 Motorola Inc Transistor breakdown protection circuit
JP2653118B2 (en) * 1988-08-23 1997-09-10 ソニー株式会社 Camera-integrated video recorder
US5243370A (en) * 1988-08-30 1993-09-07 Dan Slater Camera stabilizer
JPH0292643A (en) 1988-09-30 1990-04-03 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet head
FR2637386A1 (en) * 1988-10-04 1990-04-06 Asahi Optical Co Ltd MODE CHANGE DEVICE FOR A CAMERA
IT1229927B (en) 1988-10-14 1991-09-16 Cipelletti Alberto Cae VANE PUMP.
JPH02108544A (en) 1988-10-19 1990-04-20 Seiko Epson Corp Inkjet printing head
US4864824A (en) 1988-10-31 1989-09-12 American Telephone And Telegraph Company, At&T Bell Laboratories Thin film shape memory alloy and method for producing
JP2697041B2 (en) 1988-12-10 1998-01-14 ミノルタ株式会社 Inkjet printer
JPH02162049A (en) 1988-12-16 1990-06-21 Seiko Epson Corp Printer head
US4937676A (en) 1989-02-10 1990-06-26 Polariod Corporation Electronic camera system with detachable printer
JPH041051A (en) 1989-02-22 1992-01-06 Ricoh Co Ltd Ink-jet recording device
JPH02265752A (en) 1989-04-05 1990-10-30 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Ink-jet recording head
EP0398031A1 (en) 1989-04-19 1990-11-22 Seiko Epson Corporation Ink jet head
US5016107A (en) * 1989-05-09 1991-05-14 Eastman Kodak Company Electronic still camera utilizing image compression and digital storage
EP0398295B1 (en) 1989-05-17 1996-08-14 Minolta Co., Ltd. A camera capable of recording and reproducing a photographed image
US5153532A (en) 1989-05-24 1992-10-06 Honeywell Inc. Noise generator using combined outputs of two pseudo-random sequence generators
US5035325A (en) * 1989-07-18 1991-07-30 Dai Nippon Insatsu Kabushiki Kaisha Cassette for thermal transfer printing film
JPH0365348A (en) 1989-08-04 1991-03-20 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Ink jet head
JP2746703B2 (en) 1989-11-09 1998-05-06 松下電器産業株式会社 Ink jet head device and method of manufacturing the same
JPH03112662A (en) 1989-09-27 1991-05-14 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet printer
JP2964618B2 (en) 1989-11-10 1999-10-18 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Head for inkjet printer
JPH03180350A (en) 1989-12-08 1991-08-06 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet head
US5365466A (en) * 1989-12-19 1994-11-15 Bull Cp8 Method for generating a random number in a system with portable electronic objects, and system for implementing the method
US5216521A (en) * 1990-01-10 1993-06-01 Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft Reproduction of photographic originals with scattered light correction
US5245365A (en) * 1990-02-28 1993-09-14 Compaq Computer Corporation Ink-jet printer with user replaceable printing system cartridge
US5189511A (en) * 1990-03-19 1993-02-23 Eastman Kodak Company Method and apparatus for improving the color rendition of hardcopy images from electronic cameras
US5063655A (en) 1990-04-02 1991-11-12 International Business Machines Corp. Method to integrate drive/control devices and ink jet on demand devices in a single printhead chip
US5124692A (en) * 1990-04-13 1992-06-23 Eastman Kodak Company Method and apparatus for providing rotation of digital image data
US5036461A (en) * 1990-05-16 1991-07-30 Elliott John C Two-way authentication system between user's smart card and issuer-specific plug-in application modules in multi-issued transaction device
GB2244622B (en) * 1990-05-30 1994-06-15 Sony Corp Image signal processing
DE69133502T2 (en) * 1990-06-01 2006-09-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba, Kawasaki Secret transmission method and device
JPH04118241A (en) 1990-09-10 1992-04-20 Seiko Epson Corp Amplitude conversion actuator for ink jet printer head
DE69129521T2 (en) * 1990-09-17 1998-11-26 Canon Kk Data transmission device
JPH04126255A (en) 1990-09-18 1992-04-27 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet head
US6278486B1 (en) * 1990-09-18 2001-08-21 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Information signal controlling system
JPH04141429A (en) 1990-10-03 1992-05-14 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet head
DE4031248A1 (en) 1990-10-04 1992-04-09 Kernforschungsz Karlsruhe MICROMECHANICAL ELEMENT
US5196840A (en) * 1990-11-05 1993-03-23 International Business Machines Corporation Secure communications system for remotely located computers
JP2573416B2 (en) * 1990-11-28 1997-01-22 株式会社東芝 Semiconductor storage device
JP3255409B2 (en) * 1990-11-29 2002-02-12 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming device
US5493409A (en) * 1990-11-29 1996-02-20 Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha Still video camera having a printer capable of printing a photographed image in a plurality of printing modes
JP3115660B2 (en) * 1990-12-07 2000-12-11 キヤノン株式会社 Ink jet head cartridge and ink tank cartridge using decomposable plastic as a part of the structure, and an ink jet apparatus having a mounting portion for mounting these cartridges
JP2719237B2 (en) * 1990-12-20 1998-02-25 シャープ株式会社 Dynamic semiconductor memory device
US5861897A (en) * 1991-01-19 1999-01-19 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Inkjet recording apparatus with a memory device disposed substantially within boundaries if a recording head unit
US5115888A (en) * 1991-02-04 1992-05-26 Howard Schneider Self-serve checkout system
US5218569A (en) * 1991-02-08 1993-06-08 Banks Gerald J Electrically alterable non-volatile memory with n-bits per memory cell
US5126755A (en) 1991-03-26 1992-06-30 Videojet Systems International, Inc. Print head assembly for ink jet printer
US5164740A (en) 1991-04-24 1992-11-17 Yehuda Ivri High frequency printing mechanism
US5121139A (en) * 1991-04-29 1992-06-09 Tektronix, Inc. Compact ink jet printer having a drum drive mechanism
JPH04353458A (en) 1991-05-31 1992-12-08 Brother Ind Ltd Ink jet head
JPH04368851A (en) 1991-06-17 1992-12-21 Seiko Epson Corp Magnetic field generating substrate and ink jet head equipped therewith
JP2671649B2 (en) * 1991-07-08 1997-10-29 三菱電機株式会社 Authentication method
US5239575A (en) 1991-07-09 1993-08-24 Schlumberger Industries, Inc. Telephone dial-inbound data acquisition system with demand reading capability
WO1993004425A1 (en) 1991-08-13 1993-03-04 Universal Photonix, Inc. System for remotely validating the identity of indivuals and determining their locations
GB9121851D0 (en) 1991-10-15 1991-11-27 Willett Int Ltd Device
US5211806A (en) 1991-12-24 1993-05-18 Xerox Corporation Monolithic inkjet printhead
JP3450349B2 (en) 1992-03-31 2003-09-22 キヤノン株式会社 Cantilever probe
DE4310727C2 (en) * 1992-04-06 1996-07-11 Hell Ag Linotype Method and device for analyzing image templates
JPH05318724A (en) 1992-05-19 1993-12-03 Seikosha Co Ltd Ink jet recorder
US5278585A (en) 1992-05-28 1994-01-11 Xerox Corporation Ink jet printhead with ink flow directing valves
JPH07325934A (en) * 1992-07-10 1995-12-12 Walt Disney Co:The Method and equipment for provision of graphics enhanced to virtual world
US5398131A (en) * 1992-08-13 1995-03-14 Hall; Dennis R. Stereoscopic hardcopy methods
US5231455A (en) * 1992-08-17 1993-07-27 Phoenix Precision Graphics, Inc. Air jet cleaner for one pump color imager
JPH0691865A (en) 1992-09-17 1994-04-05 Seikosha Co Ltd Ink jet head
JP2615319B2 (en) 1992-09-17 1997-05-28 セイコープレシジョン株式会社 Inkjet head
IL107120A (en) * 1992-09-29 1997-09-30 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Atomising nozzle and filter and spray generating device
JPH06149051A (en) 1992-11-08 1994-05-27 Ricoh Co Ltd Developer container, processing cartridge, judgement device for recycling of such container or cartridge and image forming device
DE4243888A1 (en) * 1992-12-23 1994-06-30 Gao Ges Automation Org Data carrier and method for checking the authenticity of a data carrier
CA2153156A1 (en) * 1993-01-06 1994-07-21 Allen Kwok Wah Lo A filmless method and apparatus for producing 3-d photographs
GB9302170D0 (en) 1993-02-04 1993-03-24 Domino Printing Sciences Plc Ink jet printer
US5408746A (en) * 1993-04-30 1995-04-25 Hewlett-Packard Company Datum formation for improved alignment of multiple nozzle members in a printer
FR2705810B1 (en) * 1993-05-26 1995-06-30 Gemplus Card Int Chip card chip provided with a means of limiting the number of authentications.
IT1270861B (en) * 1993-05-31 1997-05-13 Olivetti Canon Ind Spa IMPROVED INK JET HEAD FOR A POINT PRINTER
US5363448A (en) * 1993-06-30 1994-11-08 United Technologies Automotive, Inc. Pseudorandom number generation and cryptographic authentication
US5666141A (en) 1993-07-13 1997-09-09 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Ink jet head and a method of manufacturing thereof
US5322594A (en) * 1993-07-20 1994-06-21 Xerox Corporation Manufacture of a one piece full width ink jet printing bar
DE4328433A1 (en) 1993-08-24 1995-03-02 Heidelberger Druckmasch Ag Ink jet spray method, and ink jet spray device
US5801773A (en) * 1993-10-29 1998-09-01 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image data processing apparatus for processing combined image signals in order to extend dynamic range
US5499294A (en) * 1993-11-24 1996-03-12 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Digital camera with apparatus for authentication of images produced from an image file
GB9325076D0 (en) 1993-12-07 1994-02-02 The Technology Partnership Plc Electronic camera
FR2714780B1 (en) * 1993-12-30 1996-01-26 Stern Jacques Method for authenticating at least one identification device by a verification device.
US6095418A (en) * 1994-01-27 2000-08-01 Symbol Technologies, Inc. Apparatus for processing symbol-encoded document information
FR2717286B1 (en) * 1994-03-09 1996-04-05 Bull Cp8 Method and device for authenticating a data medium intended to allow a transaction or access to a service or a place, and corresponding medium.
US5477264A (en) * 1994-03-29 1995-12-19 Eastman Kodak Company Electronic imaging system using a removable software-enhanced storage device
US5621868A (en) * 1994-04-15 1997-04-15 Sony Corporation Generating imitation custom artwork by simulating brush strokes and enhancing edges
US5635968A (en) * 1994-04-29 1997-06-03 Hewlett-Packard Company Thermal inkjet printer printhead with offset heater resistors
DE19516997C2 (en) 1994-05-10 1998-02-26 Sharp Kk Ink jet head and method of manufacturing the same
US5515441A (en) * 1994-05-12 1996-05-07 At&T Corp. Secure communication method and apparatus
JPH07314673A (en) 1994-05-27 1995-12-05 Sharp Corp Ink-jet head
JPH07314665A (en) 1994-05-27 1995-12-05 Canon Inc Ink jet recording head, recorder using the same and recording method therefor
US5539690A (en) * 1994-06-02 1996-07-23 Intel Corporation Write verify schemes for flash memory with multilevel cells
US5506905A (en) * 1994-06-10 1996-04-09 Delco Electronics Corp. Authentication method for keyless entry system
WO1995035549A1 (en) * 1994-06-21 1995-12-28 Soltesz John A Modular optical memory card image display point of sale terminal
US5907149A (en) * 1994-06-27 1999-05-25 Polaroid Corporation Identification card with delimited usage
JPH0890769A (en) 1994-09-27 1996-04-09 Sharp Corp Gusseted diaphragm type ink-jet head
JP3525353B2 (en) * 1994-09-28 2004-05-10 株式会社リコー Digital electronic still camera
CH688960A5 (en) * 1994-11-24 1998-06-30 Pelikan Produktions Ag Droplet generator for microdroplets, especially for an inkjet printer.
JPH08142323A (en) 1994-11-24 1996-06-04 Sharp Corp Ink jet head and manufacture thereof
DE69528757T2 (en) * 1994-12-28 2003-07-17 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd CHIP CARD CONTROL CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM
EP0725364B1 (en) * 1995-02-02 2006-11-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Image processing apparatus
WO1996032265A1 (en) 1995-04-12 1996-10-17 Eastman Kodak Company A color video printer and a photocd system with integrated printer
US5909227A (en) 1995-04-12 1999-06-01 Eastman Kodak Company Photograph processing and copying system using coincident force drop-on-demand ink jet printing
TW365578B (en) 1995-04-14 1999-08-01 Canon Kk Liquid ejecting head, liquid ejecting device and liquid ejecting method
DE69626879T2 (en) 1995-04-26 2004-02-05 Canon K.K. Liquid ejection head, liquid ejection device and liquid ejection method
US5619571A (en) * 1995-06-01 1997-04-08 Sandstrom; Brent B. Method for securely storing electronic records
JPH08336965A (en) 1995-06-14 1996-12-24 Sharp Corp Ink-jet head
US5815181A (en) 1995-06-28 1998-09-29 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Micromachine, liquid jet recording head using such micromachine, and liquid jet recording apparatus having such liquid jet recording headmounted thereon
JP3361916B2 (en) * 1995-06-28 2003-01-07 シャープ株式会社 Method of forming microstructure
US5999203A (en) * 1995-08-18 1999-12-07 Ttp Group, Plc Printer assembly with easily loaded paper cartridge
US5847836A (en) * 1995-08-29 1998-12-08 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Printer-built-in image-sensing apparatus and using strobe-light means electric-consumption control method thereof
JPH09116843A (en) 1995-10-20 1997-05-02 Canon Inc Image pickup device with printer
JPH0971015A (en) 1995-09-05 1997-03-18 Ricoh Co Ltd Recording device and image communication device
JP3313952B2 (en) * 1995-09-14 2002-08-12 キヤノン株式会社 Ink jet recording device
EP0763930B1 (en) 1995-09-15 2002-10-16 Agfa-Gevaert Method for calculating color gamuts
US5828394A (en) 1995-09-20 1998-10-27 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Fluid drop ejector and method
JP3541522B2 (en) * 1995-10-09 2004-07-14 松下電器産業株式会社 Communication protection system and equipment between devices
JPH09104109A (en) 1995-10-12 1997-04-22 Sharp Corp Ink jet head and production thereof
US5896176A (en) * 1995-10-27 1999-04-20 Texas Instruments Incorporated Content-based video compression
US6034740A (en) * 1995-10-30 2000-03-07 Kabushiki Kaisha Photron Keying system and composite image producing method
JPH09128507A (en) * 1995-11-02 1997-05-16 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Mutual certifying method
US5884013A (en) * 1995-11-17 1999-03-16 Agfa-Gevaert Autotypical screening with optimised dotshape
US5706049A (en) * 1995-11-30 1998-01-06 Eastman Kodak Company Camera that records an active image area identifier with an image
US5633932A (en) * 1995-12-19 1997-05-27 Intel Corporation Apparatus and method for preventing disclosure through user-authentication at a printing node
US6000621A (en) * 1995-12-21 1999-12-14 Xerox Corporation Tilings of mono-code and dual-code embedded data pattern strips for robust asynchronous capture
JP3303255B2 (en) 1995-12-28 2002-07-15 富士写真光機株式会社 Driving device for zoom lens
WO1997030375A1 (en) * 1996-02-13 1997-08-21 Obsidian Imaging, Inc. Method and apparatus for configuring a camera through external means
US5668596A (en) * 1996-02-29 1997-09-16 Eastman Kodak Company Digital imaging device optimized for color performance
US5887065A (en) * 1996-03-22 1999-03-23 Activcard System and method for user authentication having clock synchronization
US6052648A (en) * 1996-04-12 2000-04-18 Earthwatch Communications, Inc. Method and system for display of weather-related information
JP3200012B2 (en) * 1996-04-19 2001-08-20 株式会社東芝 Storage system
US6020931A (en) * 1996-04-25 2000-02-01 George S. Sheng Video composition and position system and media signal communication system
US5815186A (en) * 1996-04-29 1998-09-29 Hewlett-Packard Company Removable roll-feed apparatus and method
JP3037140B2 (en) * 1996-06-13 2000-04-24 日本電気オフィスシステム株式会社 Digital camera
US5966134A (en) * 1996-06-28 1999-10-12 Softimage Simulating cel animation and shading
US5790365A (en) 1996-07-31 1998-08-04 Applied Materials, Inc. Method and apparatus for releasing a workpiece from and electrostatic chuck
JPH1056604A (en) * 1996-08-07 1998-02-24 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Electronic camera with built-in printer and medium to be recorded
US5894326A (en) * 1996-08-26 1999-04-13 Eastman Kodak Company Electronic camera having a printer
US5914748A (en) * 1996-08-30 1999-06-22 Eastman Kodak Company Method and apparatus for generating a composite image using the difference of two images
US5878283A (en) * 1996-09-05 1999-03-02 Eastman Kodak Company Single-use camera with motion sensor
JPH1098176A (en) * 1996-09-19 1998-04-14 Toshiba Corp Solid-state image pickup device
US5810146A (en) * 1996-10-31 1998-09-22 Authentication Technologies, Inc. Wide edge lead currency thread detection system
US5917913A (en) * 1996-12-04 1999-06-29 Wang; Ynjiun Paul Portable electronic authorization devices and methods therefor
US5715234A (en) * 1996-12-16 1998-02-03 Eastman Kodak Company Electronic camera and associated printer which uses a display image
US5757388A (en) * 1996-12-16 1998-05-26 Eastman Kodak Company Electronic camera and integral ink jet printer
US6192473B1 (en) * 1996-12-24 2001-02-20 Pitney Bowes Inc. System and method for mutual authentication and secure communications between a postage security device and a meter server
US6002434A (en) * 1997-01-14 1999-12-14 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Registration correction waveform determination method and system for a television camera
US5909248A (en) * 1997-01-31 1999-06-01 Eastman Kodak Company Exposure control of camera attached to printer electronic camera
US5740480A (en) * 1997-02-20 1998-04-14 Eastman Kodak Company Camera with movable first lens cover which supports movable second lens cover which opens during movement of first lens cover
AUPO799197A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image processing method and apparatus (ART01)
JPH10285610A (en) * 1997-04-01 1998-10-23 Sony Corp Color correction device and color correction controller
US5999190A (en) * 1997-04-04 1999-12-07 Avid Technology, Inc. Computer imaging using graphics components
US5963076A (en) * 1997-04-14 1999-10-05 Motorola, Inc. Circuit with hot-electron protection and method
AUPP653998A0 (en) 1998-10-16 1998-11-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Micromechanical device and method (ij46B)
US7111925B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2006-09-26 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printhead integrated circuit
AUPP398398A0 (en) * 1998-06-09 1998-07-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (ij45)
US6283582B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-09-04 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Iris motion ink jet printing mechanism
US6338547B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2002-01-15 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Conductive PTFE bend actuator vented ink jet printing mechanism
US6257704B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-07-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Planar swing grill electromagnetic ink jet printing mechanism
US7578582B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2009-08-25 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet nozzle chamber holding two fluids
US6264307B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-07-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Buckle grill oscillating pressure ink jet printing mechanism
AUPP399198A0 (en) * 1998-06-09 1998-07-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (ij42)
US6317192B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-11-13 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Utilization of image tiling effects in photographs
AUPO800297A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ20)
US6336710B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2002-01-08 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Dual nozzle single horizontal actuator ink jet printing mechanism
AUPO804297A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ29)
US6231163B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-05-15 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Stacked electrostatic ink jet printing mechanism
US6245246B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-06-12 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method of manufacture of a thermally actuated slotted chamber wall ink jet printer
US6217165B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-04-17 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Ink and media cartridge with axial ink chambers
US6227653B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-05-08 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Bend actuator direct ink supply ink jet printing mechanism
AUPO804797A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ05)
US6234609B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-05-22 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd High Young's modulus thermoelastic ink jet printing mechanism
AUPO803597A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ06)
US6247792B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-06-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd PTFE surface shooting shuttered oscillating pressure ink jet printing mechanism
US6217153B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-04-17 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Single bend actuator cupped paddle ink jet printing mechanism
US6264306B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-07-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Linear spring electromagnetic grill ink jet printing mechanism
US6491833B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2002-12-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method of manufacture of a dual chamber single vertical actuator ink jet printer
AUPO804897A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ14)
US7472984B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2009-01-06 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet chamber with plurality of nozzles
US6425651B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2002-07-30 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd High-density inkjet nozzle array for an inkjet printhead
US6416167B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2002-07-09 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Thermally actuated ink jet printing mechanism having a series of thermal actuator units
US6834939B2 (en) 2002-11-23 2004-12-28 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Micro-electromechanical device that incorporates covering formations for actuators of the device
AUPP259398A0 (en) * 1998-03-25 1998-04-23 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ41)
US6180427B1 (en) 1997-07-15 2001-01-30 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Method of manufacture of a thermally actuated ink jet including a tapered heater element
AUPO806497A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ30)
AUPO803797A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ27)
US6188415B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-02-13 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet printer having a thermal actuator comprising an external coil spring
AUPO804997A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ12)
AUPO803697A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ13)
US6824251B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2004-11-30 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Micro-electromechanical assembly that incorporates a covering formation for a micro-electromechanical device
US6239821B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-05-29 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Direct firing thermal bend actuator ink jet printing mechanism
US7004566B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2006-02-28 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printhead chip that incorporates micro-mechanical lever mechanisms
US6582059B2 (en) * 1997-07-15 2003-06-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Discrete air and nozzle chambers in a printhead chip for an inkjet printhead
AUPO804397A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ28)
US6213588B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-04-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Electrostatic ink jet printing mechanism
US6557977B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2003-05-06 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Shape memory alloy ink jet printing mechanism
AUPP087397A0 (en) * 1997-12-12 1998-01-08 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ36)
AUPP095997A0 (en) 1997-12-16 1998-01-15 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd A data processing method and apparatus (art 68)
US6260953B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-07-17 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Surface bend actuator vented ink supply ink jet printing mechanism
AUPO798697A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Data processing method and apparatus (ART51)
US6471336B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2002-10-29 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd. Nozzle arrangement that incorporates a reversible actuating mechanism
US7011390B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2006-03-14 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printing mechanism having wide format printing zone
US6416168B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2002-07-09 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Pump action refill ink jet printing mechanism
US6257705B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-07-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Two plate reverse firing electromagnetic ink jet printing mechanism
US6241342B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-06-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd. Lorentz diaphragm electromagnetic ink jet printing mechanism
AUPO806697A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ01)
US6213589B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-04-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd. Planar thermoelastic bend actuator ink jet printing mechanism
US6254220B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-07-03 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Shutter based ink jet printing mechanism
AUPP089397A0 (en) * 1997-12-12 1998-01-08 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ37)
AUPO804497A0 (en) * 1997-07-15 1997-08-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (IJ07)
AUPP398798A0 (en) 1998-06-09 1998-07-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Image creation method and apparatus (ij43)
US6247796B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-06-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Magnetostrictive ink jet printing mechanism
US7465030B2 (en) 1997-07-15 2008-12-16 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Nozzle arrangement with a magnetic field generator
US6220694B1 (en) * 1997-07-15 2001-04-24 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd. Pulsed magnetic field ink jet printing mechanism
US6229565B1 (en) * 1997-08-15 2001-05-08 Howard H. Bobry Hand-held electronic camera with integral printer
US6628333B1 (en) * 1997-11-12 2003-09-30 International Business Machines Corporation Digital instant camera having a printer
US6102505A (en) * 1997-12-18 2000-08-15 Eastman Kodak Company Recording audio and electronic images
US6011923A (en) * 1998-01-26 2000-01-04 Eastman Kodak Company Single use camera having flexure of a front cover constrained by an exposed-film door
US6652074B2 (en) * 1998-03-25 2003-11-25 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink jet nozzle assembly including displaceable ink pusher
US6011536A (en) * 1998-04-17 2000-01-04 New York University Method and system for generating an image having a hand-painted appearance
US6019449A (en) * 1998-06-05 2000-02-01 Hewlett-Packard Company Apparatus controlled by data from consumable parts with incorporated memory devices
EP0967792B1 (en) * 1998-06-26 2011-08-03 Sony Corporation Printer having image correcting capability
US6805435B2 (en) * 1998-10-16 2004-10-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printhead assembly with an ink distribution arrangement
WO2000023279A1 (en) 1998-10-16 2000-04-27 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Improvements relating to inkjet printers
US6398343B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2002-06-04 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Residue guard for nozzle groups of an ink jet printhead
AU2000247313B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2004-10-21 Memjet Technology Limited Ink jet printhead having a moving nozzle with an externally arranged actuator

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3914877A (en) * 1974-04-08 1975-10-28 Marion E Hines Image scrambling technique
US4544184A (en) * 1983-07-07 1985-10-01 Freund Precision, Inc. Tamper-proof identification card and identification system
US5913542A (en) * 1993-09-17 1999-06-22 Bell Data Software Corporation System for producing a personal ID card
US6182901B1 (en) * 1993-12-22 2001-02-06 Xerox Corporation Orientational disambiguation for self-clocking glyph codes
US5825947A (en) * 1995-09-01 1998-10-20 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Optical reproducing system for multimedia information recorded with code data having function for correcting image reading distortion
US5874718A (en) * 1995-10-23 1999-02-23 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Information recording medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7093762B2 (en) 2006-08-22
US20110050807A1 (en) 2011-03-03
US20040168071A1 (en) 2004-08-26
US20090135232A1 (en) 2009-05-28
US6334190B1 (en) 2001-12-25
US7234645B2 (en) 2007-06-26
US20070201846A1 (en) 2007-08-30
US20090135215A1 (en) 2009-05-28
US6787051B2 (en) 2004-09-07
US20050150963A1 (en) 2005-07-14
US6938990B2 (en) 2005-09-06
US6331946B1 (en) 2001-12-18
US20050218236A1 (en) 2005-10-06
AUPO799197A0 (en) 1997-08-07
US20050225606A1 (en) 2005-10-13
US20050178846A1 (en) 2005-08-18
US20040004129A1 (en) 2004-01-08
US6827282B2 (en) 2004-12-07
US7845764B2 (en) 2010-12-07
US20050092849A1 (en) 2005-05-05
US7703910B2 (en) 2010-04-27
US6374354B1 (en) 2002-04-16
US20070285483A1 (en) 2007-12-13
US7866797B2 (en) 2011-01-11
US20070035583A1 (en) 2007-02-15
US7362971B2 (en) 2008-04-22
US7654626B2 (en) 2010-02-02
US20080012905A1 (en) 2008-01-17
US20080252734A1 (en) 2008-10-16
US7278711B2 (en) 2007-10-09
US20040239728A1 (en) 2004-12-02
US20090073240A1 (en) 2009-03-19
US7222799B2 (en) 2007-05-29
US7631966B2 (en) 2009-12-15
US20050061886A1 (en) 2005-03-24
US7980670B2 (en) 2011-07-19
US7454617B2 (en) 2008-11-18
US20070126880A1 (en) 2007-06-07
US20030071012A1 (en) 2003-04-17
US7416282B2 (en) 2008-08-26
US7773113B2 (en) 2010-08-10
US20090141088A1 (en) 2009-06-04
US7506965B2 (en) 2009-03-24
US7373083B2 (en) 2008-05-13
US20070201845A1 (en) 2007-08-30
US6442525B1 (en) 2002-08-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7093762B2 (en) Image processing and printing apparatus
US7119836B2 (en) Print roll for use in a camera imaging system
US7050143B1 (en) Camera system with computer language interpreter
US6362868B1 (en) Print media roll and ink replaceable cartridge
US8328101B2 (en) Camera unit incoporating program script scanner
US6317192B1 (en) Utilization of image tiling effects in photographs
US8077207B2 (en) Camera unit incorporating a printer configured to print distorted images
US7083108B2 (en) Redundantly encoded data structure for encoding a surface
US7092011B2 (en) Camera for printing on media provided on print roll
US6750901B1 (en) Digital instant printing camera with image processing capability
US6431669B1 (en) Method and apparatus for information storage in a portable print roll
US6542645B1 (en) Adaptive tracking of dots in optical storage system using ink dots
US6356715B1 (en) Prints remaining indicating for camera with variable length print capability

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: SILVERBROOK RESEARCH PTY. LTD., AUSTRALIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SILVERBROOK, KIA;REEL/FRAME:016208/0621

Effective date: 20050119

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION